A934C-LI 1006-1007 57105 07-2011 en PDF

en
Operating manual
Machine for Industrial Applications

A 934 C Litronic / A 934 C HD Litronic
from serial number 57105
Document identification
ORIGINAL OPERATING MANUAL
Id. number: 11140237
Edition: 07 / 2011
Valid for: A 934 C Litronic / A 934 C HD Litronic from serial
number 57105
Author: LHB - Technical documentation department
Product identification
Manufacturer: LIEBHERR Hydraulikbagger GmbH
Type: A 934 C Litronic / A 934 C HD Litronic
Type no.: 1006 / 1007
Conformity: CE
LHB/en/Edition: 07 / 2011
Address
Liebherr Hydraulikbagger GmbH
Liebherr-Straße 12
D - 88457 Kirchdorf / Iller
Operating manual
Machine data
Please fill in the following data when you receive your machine.
This will also be helpful when ordering spare parts.
Vehicle Id. No.:

WLHZ . . . . . . . . . . . .
Year of manufacture:
. . . .
Delivery date:
. . / . . / . .
A 934 C Litronic / A 934 C HD Litronic / 11140237

MJFCIFSS
Introduction
This operating manual has been specifically devised for machine operators and
maintenance personnel. It contains important warnings, information and tips
regarding the maintenance and proper operation of the machine. It assists you in
becoming familiar with the functions and features of the machine and helps prevent
incorrect operation.
By strictly adhering to the instructions in the operating manual, you can significantly
enhance the reliability and service life of the machine.
The operating manual is an integral part of the scope of delivery of the
machine. Ensure that a copy is at all times available in the storage
compartment in the operator's cab.
Carefully read the operating manual before starting the machine and then regularly
read it again. All persons carrying out work on or with the machine must be fully
familiar with the content of the operating manual and must adhere to the instructions.
Such work include:
– Machine operation including tooling, troubleshooting during work, general care
and cleaning, disposal of fuels and lubricants.
– Maintenance including inspection, servicing and repair.
– Transport or loading of the machine.
The machine owner must ensure that this operating manual is complemented with
the relevant statutory regulations for accident prevention and the protection of the
environment. Apart from the instructions in this operating manual and the statutory
accident prevention, health and safety regulations applicable in the country of
operation, all personnel working on or with the machine must adhere to best practice
for safe and proper operation.
Certain sections in this manual might not apply to your specific model.
Some of the figures in this operating manual might show details or equipment that
differ from those in your machine.
Some of the figures show the equipment with guards or covers removed (for better
depiction).
As our products are constantly being improved, certain changes might be made to
the equipment which are not referred to specifically in this operating manual.
Should you require additional information or if you have any queries, please contact
the LIEBHERR customer service department.
Warranty and liability

Due to the range of products (e.g. fuels, lubricants, tool attachments, spare parts)
available from other manufacturers, LIEBHERR is not in a position to assess the
compatibility of these products with its own machines. This also applies in relation to
possible effects that third-party products have on LIEBHERR products and vice
versa.
copyright by
A 934 C Litronic / A 934 C HD Litronic / 11140237 1-1
MJFCIFSS
Operating manual
It is therefore the responsibility of the machine owner to assess whether third-party

products can be safely used in conjunction with the LIEBHERR machine. LIEBHERR
shall not be liable for damage to or downtimes of LIEBHERR machine caused by the
use a third-party products. Such damage is not covered by the LIEBHERR warranty.
LIEBHERR shall not be liable for damage caused by improper operation, insufficient
maintenance or non-compliance with safety instructions.
Amendments, general terms and conditions, copyright

We reserve the right to modify our products and amend the instructions in this
operating manual without prior notice.
The reproduction or publication of the content of this operating manual (including
figures) is prohibited. LIEBHERR reserves all rights in this operating manual,
including copyright.
The warranty and liability clauses of the general business terms and conditions of
LIEBHERR apply.
copyright by
1-2 A 934 C Litronic / A 934 C HD Litronic / 11140237
MJFCIFSS
Operating manual
Table of contents
1 Product description ....................................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1 Design and overview ............................................................................................................................. 1-1
1.1.1 General overview ..................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.2 Uppercarriage........................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.1.3 Undercarriage........................................................................................................................... 1-3
1.2 Vibration emissions................................................................................................................................ 1-3
1.3 Sound emission ..................................................................................................................................... 1-4
1.4 EC Declaration of Conformity ................................................................................................................ 1-5
1.5 Technical data ....................................................................................................................................... 1-6
2 Safety notes, signs ........................................................................................................................................ 2-1

2.1 Symbols used in this operating manual ................................................................................................. 2-1
2.2 Proper use ............................................................................................................................................. 2-2
2.3 Safety instructions ................................................................................................................................. 2-2
2.3.1 General safety instructions ....................................................................................................... 2-2
2.3.2 Crushing and burn prevention .................................................................................................. 2-3
2.3.3 Fire and explosion prevention .................................................................................................. 2-4
2.4 Signs on the machine ............................................................................................................................ 2-4
2.4.1 Safety and information signs .................................................................................................... 2-4
2.4.2 ID tag ...................................................................................................................................... 2-12
3 Control, operation.......................................................................................................................................... 3-1

3.1 Operating and control elements............................................................................................................. 3-1
3.1.1 Overview of operator's platform................................................................................................ 3-1
3.1.2 Keypad ..................................................................................................................................... 3-3
3.1.3 Monitoring screen ..................................................................................................................... 3-7
3.1.4 Main screen ............................................................................................................................ 3-10
3.1.5 Information symbols on the main screen................................................................................ 3-11
3.1.6 Operator's menu..................................................................................................................... 3-13
3.2 Control ................................................................................................................................................. 3-28
3.2.1 Entering and exiting the operator's cab .................................................................................. 3-28
3.2.2 Adjusting vertical position of the operator's cab (optional equipment) ................................... 3-32
3.2.3 Emergency lowering of the operator's cab ............................................................................. 3-33
3.2.4 Safety lever ............................................................................................................................ 3-34
3.2.5 Operator seat ......................................................................................................................... 3-35
3.2.6 Adjusting the steering column ................................................................................................ 3-38
3.2.7 Windscreen ............................................................................................................................ 3-39
3.2.8 Sun blind ................................................................................................................................ 3-39
3.2.9 Emergency exit through rear window ..................................................................................... 3-40
3.2.10 Inside lighting ......................................................................................................................... 3-40
3.2.11 Fire extinguisher (optional equipment)*.................................................................................. 3-41
3.2.12 Windshield wiper .................................................................................................................... 3-41
3.2.13 Lighting ................................................................................................................................... 3-43
3.2.14 Radio mute mode (optional equipment) ................................................................................. 3-44
3.2.15 Heating and air-conditioning system ...................................................................................... 3-44
3.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................. 3-50

3.3.1 Safety instructions .................................................................................................................. 3-50
3.3.2 Starting machine .................................................................................................................... 3-51
3.3.3 Switching off the diesel engine ............................................................................................... 3-57
3.3.4 Starting aids ........................................................................................................................... 3-57
3.3.5 Jump start procedure ............................................................................................................. 3-60
3.3.6 Travelling operation ................................................................................................................ 3-61
3.3.7 Travel warning device (option) ............................................................................................... 3-63
3.3.8 Drive deactivation (optional extra) .......................................................................................... 3-63
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Operating manual
3.3.9 Oscillating axle locking device ................................................................................................ 3-64

3.3.10 Support ................................................................................................................................... 3-65
3.4 Working with the machine.................................................................................................................... 3-67
3.4.1 Safety Instructions .................................................................................................................. 3-67
3.4.2 Sensor controlled low idle automatic ...................................................................................... 3-70
3.4.3 Working position ..................................................................................................................... 3-71
3.4.4 Operating working attachment................................................................................................ 3-72
3.4.5 Swivelling the uppercarriage .................................................................................................. 3-73
3.4.6 Halting the uppercarriage ....................................................................................................... 3-74
3.4.7 Lowering the working attachment when diesel engine is shut off........................................... 3-75
3.4.8 Electronic stick cylinder shut-down function (optional equipment) ......................................... 3-76
3.4.9 Mechanical stick cylinder shut-down function......................................................................... 3-78
3.4.10 Adjustment of attachment tool ................................................................................................ 3-81
3.4.11 Operating the attachment tool (by pedals, push buttons) ....................................................... 3-81
3.4.12 Changeover of control (optional equipment) .......................................................................... 3-83
3.4.13 Operating attachment tool (mini joystick control, optional equipment) ................................... 3-83
3.4.14 Changeover of joystick control (optional equipment).............................................................. 3-86
3.4.15 Magnetic system (option) ....................................................................................................... 3-86
3.5 Installation and removal of attachment parts ....................................................................................... 3-87
3.5.1 Safety Instructions .................................................................................................................. 3-87
3.5.2 Installation and removal of digging tool .................................................................................. 3-89
3.5.3 Attachment of grapple to bucket stick..................................................................................... 3-91
3.5.4 Attachment of grapple to industrial stick ................................................................................. 3-94
3.5.5 Multi-coupling system (optional equipment) ........................................................................... 3-96
3.5.6 Industrial stick with mechanical quick-change adapter (optional equipment) ......................... 3-99
3.5.7 Industrial stick with hydraulic quick-change adapter (optional equipment)........................... 3-103
3.5.8 LIKUFIX MH 40 quick-coupling system (optional equipment) .............................................. 3-109
3.5.9 Hydraulic quick-change adapter (optional equipment) ......................................................... 3-114
3.5.10 Hydraulic quick-change adapter with LIKUFIX (optional equipment) ................................... 3-120
3.5.11 Mechanical quick-change adapter (optional equipment) ...................................................... 3-121
3.6 General working methods .................................................................................................................. 3-125
3.6.1 Tips for the proper operation of the machine preventing damage and wear ........................ 3-125
3.6.2 Preparation ........................................................................................................................... 3-127
3.6.3 Working with grapples .......................................................................................................... 3-128
3.6.4 Excavating and moving material with grapples..................................................................... 3-128
3.6.5 Loading operation ................................................................................................................. 3-129
3.6.6 Load lifting operation ............................................................................................................ 3-130
3.6.7 Use of quick-change adapter for load lifting operation ......................................................... 3-131
3.6.8 Overload warning system (optional equipment) ................................................................... 3-132
3.7 Parking and exiting machine.............................................................................................................. 3-134
3.8 Transport............................................................................................................................................ 3-134
3.8.1 Safety instructions ................................................................................................................ 3-134
3.8.2 Transporting the machine on a low loader ........................................................................... 3-135
3.8.3 Loading the machine with a crane ........................................................................................ 3-137
4 Malfunctions ................................................................................................................................................... 4-1

4.1 Error code list......................................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2 Faults and remedies .............................................................................................................................. 4-8
4.2.1 Diesel engine and fuel system.................................................................................................. 4-8

4.2.2 Hydraulic system .................................................................................................................... 4-10
4.2.3 Travelling ................................................................................................................................ 4-11
4.2.4 Brakes .................................................................................................................................... 4-12
4.2.5 Electrical system..................................................................................................................... 4-12
4.2.6 Heating and air conditioning system....................................................................................... 4-13
4.2.7 Working attachment................................................................................................................ 4-13
4.3 Fuses and relays.................................................................................................................................. 4-13
4.3.1 Fuse box E50 ......................................................................................................................... 4-14
4.3.2 ESP02 printed circuit board .................................................................................................... 4-15
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Operating manual
4.4 Emergency operation........................................................................................................................... 4-16

4.4.1 Purpose .................................................................................................................................. 4-16
4.4.2 Identifying solenoid valve ....................................................................................................... 4-17
4.4.3 Emergency mode control ....................................................................................................... 4-17
4.4.4 Emergency operation of hydraulic pump ................................................................................ 4-20
4.4.5 Emergency operation of electric stick cylinder shut-down function ........................................ 4-20
4.4.6 Emergency gear shifting......................................................................................................... 4-21
4.4.7 Towing the machine ............................................................................................................... 4-22
4.4.8 Disengaging transmission (emergency release) .................................................................... 4-22
5 Maintenance ................................................................................................................................................... 5-1

5.1 Safety instructions ................................................................................................................................. 5-1
5.1.1 General safety instructions ....................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.2 Checking for cracks .................................................................................................................. 5-1
5.1.3 Welding .................................................................................................................................... 5-2
5.1.4 Fuels, lubricants and process chemicals.................................................................................. 5-2
5.1.5 Repair ....................................................................................................................................... 5-2
5.1.6 Electrical system ...................................................................................................................... 5-3
5.1.7 Pressure accumulator .............................................................................................................. 5-3
5.1.8 Hydraulic hoses and lines ........................................................................................................ 5-4
5.1.9 Cab protection (FOPS) ............................................................................................................. 5-5
5.2 Maintenance access doors .................................................................................................................... 5-5
5.2.1 Overview of access doors ........................................................................................................ 5-5
5.2.2 Door locking mechanism .......................................................................................................... 5-6
5.2.3 Engine hood locking mechanism.............................................................................................. 5-7
5.3 Cleaning machine .................................................................................................................................. 5-7
5.4 Care for rubber components.................................................................................................................. 5-8
5.5 Tyres...................................................................................................................................................... 5-8
5.5.1 Checking tyre pressure ............................................................................................................ 5-9
5.5.2 Foam tyres ............................................................................................................................. 5-10
5.5.3 Checking wheel lugs for proper fit .......................................................................................... 5-10
5.6 Fuels, lubricants and process chemicals ............................................................................................. 5-11
5.6.1 General information ................................................................................................................ 5-11
5.6.2 Filling volumes, lubricating chart ............................................................................................ 5-11
5.7 Specifications for fuels, lubricants and process chemicals.................................................................. 5-15
5.7.1 Diesel fuels ............................................................................................................................. 5-15
5.7.2 Lubricating oil for the diesel engine ........................................................................................ 5-16
5.7.3 Coolants for diesel engine ...................................................................................................... 5-18
5.7.4 Hydraulic oil ............................................................................................................................ 5-21
5.7.5 Lubricants for axles and gearboxes ....................................................................................... 5-27
5.7.6 Lubricating oil for transmission ............................................................................................... 5-28
5.7.7 Grease.................................................................................................................................... 5-29
5.7.8 Lubricants and care products for electrical and mechanical components .............................. 5-29
5.8 Diesel engine ....................................................................................................................................... 5-30
5.8.1 Checking the oil level in the diesel engine ............................................................................. 5-30
5.8.2 Changing the diesel engine oil ............................................................................................... 5-30
5.8.3 Ribbed V-belt for A/C compressor and alternator installation................................................. 5-32
5.8.4 Crankcase bleeding point ....................................................................................................... 5-32
5.8.5 Grease the starter tooth ring .................................................................................................. 5-33

5.9 Cooling system .................................................................................................................................... 5-34
5.9.1 Checking and cleaning the cooling system ............................................................................ 5-34
5.9.2 Checking the coolant level ..................................................................................................... 5-34
5.9.3 Changing the coolant ............................................................................................................. 5-35
5.9.4 Checking coolant, adjusting mixing ratio ................................................................................ 5-37
5.10 Fuel system ......................................................................................................................................... 5-41
5.10.1 Refuelling ............................................................................................................................... 5-41
5.10.2 Dewatering fuel tank............................................................................................................... 5-42
5.10.3 Emptying and cleaning fuel tank ............................................................................................ 5-43
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Operating manual
5.10.4 Maintenance of fuel filter ........................................................................................................ 5-44

5.10.5 Bleeding fuel system .............................................................................................................. 5-46
5.11 Dry air filter........................................................................................................................................... 5-48
5.11.1 Changing the main element.................................................................................................... 5-49
5.11.2 Changing the safety element .................................................................................................. 5-50
5.11.3 Checking the filtered air line ................................................................................................... 5-50
5.12 Hydraulic system.................................................................................................................................. 5-51
5.12.1 Preparation ............................................................................................................................. 5-51
5.12.2 Checking the oil level in the hydraulic tank............................................................................. 5-52
5.12.3 Releasing the pressure from the hydraulic system................................................................. 5-52
5.12.4 Replacing breather filter ......................................................................................................... 5-53
5.12.5 Emptying and refilling hydraulic tank ...................................................................................... 5-53
5.12.6 Return filter ............................................................................................................................. 5-54
5.12.7 Control oil filter........................................................................................................................ 5-56
5.12.8 Control circuit.......................................................................................................................... 5-56
5.12.9 Bleeding of hydraulic pumps .................................................................................................. 5-57
5.12.10 Removing suction hose .......................................................................................................... 5-58
5.12.11 Feed line filter of the slewing gear circuit ............................................................................... 5-59
5.12.12 Leak oil filter ........................................................................................................................... 5-59
5.12.13 Bypass oil filter (optional extra) .............................................................................................. 5-60
5.12.14 Maintenance of hydraulic cylinders ........................................................................................ 5-61
5.12.15 Replacing hydraulic hoses...................................................................................................... 5-62
5.13 Changing the oil on components ......................................................................................................... 5-62
5.13.1 General notes ......................................................................................................................... 5-62
5.13.2 Swin gear - oil change ............................................................................................................ 5-63
5.13.3 Transmission – oil change ...................................................................................................... 5-64
5.13.4 Steering axle and rigid axle - oil change................................................................................. 5-64
5.13.5 Wheel hub - oil change ........................................................................................................... 5-65
5.13.6 Pump distributor gear - oil change.......................................................................................... 5-66
5.14 Checking brake pads for wear ............................................................................................................. 5-66
5.15 Electrical system .................................................................................................................................. 5-67
5.15.1 Notes regarding the electrical system .................................................................................... 5-67
5.15.2 Battery main switch ................................................................................................................ 5-67
5.15.3 Battery care ............................................................................................................................ 5-68
5.15.4 Slip ring body (optional equipment) ........................................................................................ 5-69
5.16 Heating and air-conditioning system.................................................................................................... 5-70
5.16.1 Recirculated and ambient air filter .......................................................................................... 5-70
5.16.2 Heating system ....................................................................................................................... 5-71
5.16.3 air-conditioning system ........................................................................................................... 5-71
5.17 Automatic lubrication of the machine ................................................................................................... 5-72
5.17.1 Semi-automatic central greasing system................................................................................ 5-72
5.17.2 Fully automatic central greasing system (optional extra)........................................................ 5-74
5.18 Manual lubrication of the machine ....................................................................................................... 5-76
5.18.1 Lubricating the axles and drive shaft ...................................................................................... 5-76
5.18.2 Attachments (optional equipment) .......................................................................................... 5-77
5.18.3 Industrial stick with mechanical quick-change adapter........................................................... 5-78
5.18.4 Industrial stick with hydraulic quick-change adapter............................................................... 5-78
5.18.5 LIKUFIX MH 40 quick-coupling system .................................................................................. 5-79
5.18.6 Hydraulic quick change adapter ............................................................................................. 5-80
5.18.7 Mechanical quick-change adapter .......................................................................................... 5-80

5.19 Couplings of the quick-change adapter systems (optional equipment) ............................................... 5-81
5.19.1 Hydraulic coupling .................................................................................................................. 5-81
5.19.2 LIKUFIX electric coupling ....................................................................................................... 5-82
5.20 Parking and swing gear brake ............................................................................................................. 5-83
5.21 General maintenance tasks ................................................................................................................. 5-84
5.21.1 Replacing wear parts .............................................................................................................. 5-84
5.21.2 Replacing teeth on digging tool .............................................................................................. 5-84
5.21.3 Welded parts on the machine ................................................................................................. 5-86
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Operating manual
5.22 Maintenance and inspection schedule................................................................................................. 5-86

copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Operating manual
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
1 Product description
1.1 Design and overview
1.1.1 General overview
Fig. 1-1 General overview
1 Undercarriage 2 Uppercarriage
3 Industrial boom 4 Stick cylinder

5 Industrial stick 6 Boom cylinder
7 Grapple
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Product description Operating manual
Design and overview
1.1.2 Uppercarriage
Fig. 1-2 Uppercarriage
1 Slewing gear mechanism 2 Control block

3 Fuel tank 4 Hydraulic tank
5 Hydraulic pump 6 Dry air cleaner
7 Diesel engine 8 Radiator
9 Central lubrication system 10 Operator's cab
11 Operator's platform
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Operating manual Product description
Vibration emissions
1.1.3 Undercarriage
Fig. 1-3 Undercarriage
1 Outrigger support 2 Rigid axle

3 Ladder with toolbox 4 Transmission
5 Steering axle 6 Oscillating axle locking device
7 Rotary connection
1.2 Vibration emissions
The operator seat built into the machine by the manufacturer conforms to ISO
7096:2000, EM 6. When replacing the seat, ensure that the new seat also conforms
to this standard.
Hand-arm vibration
If the machine is operated according to the manufacturer instructions, the weighted
(frequency-rated) effective hand-arm vibration is below 2.5 m/s² according to ISO
5349-1:2001.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Sound emission
Whole-body vibration
If the machine is operated according to the manufacturer instructions, the weighted
(frequency-rated) effective vibration shown for specific machine applications in the
table below apply. These values conform to the specifications in the technical report
ISO/TR 25398:2006 "Earth-moving machinery – Guidelines for assessment of
exposure to whole-body vibration of ride-on machines – Use of harmonized data
measured by international institutes, organizations and manufacturers". The method
of assessment conforms to ISO 2631-1:1997. The effective values in the table for
representable machines are shown with the applicable standard deviations. These
deviations are classified according to the operating conditions in the classes "light-
duty", "normal" and "heavy-duty". It is the responsibility of the machine owner to
assess the operating conditions according to the classes, taking into account the
terrain, site conditions, site organisation, material, machine equipment, working
procedure and training of the operator.
As the quoted values are effective values for specific, common applications, the
whole-body vibration to which the operator is exposed can only be estimated. For a
more detailed assessment of the daily exposure of the operator across an 8-hour
shift, please refer to the LIEBHERR brochure on whole-body vibration and the
software designed for the assessment. This document and software are available
from the LIEBHERR dealer and are included as standard on the documentation CD
(Liebherr-Parts) shipped with new machines.
For instructions how to reduce whole-body vibration during operation of mobile
construction machinery, please refer to chapter "Control, operation / working with
machine / safety instructions / vibration protection".
Weighted effective vibration in m/s²

at operating conditions "light-duty" (1), "normal" (2) and "heavy-duty" (3)
Machine type Typical working cycles

x-axis y-axis z-axis
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
Crawler excavator Excavator 0.14 0.31 0.49 0.08 0.19 0.31 0.13 0.30 0.47
with hydraulic hammer 0.16 0.38 0.59 0.09 0.22 0.35 0.27 0.55 0.83
Use for mining 0.31 0.46 0.61 0.19 0.30 0.41 0.29 0.61 0.93
Transfer travel 0.21 0.34 0.48 0.09 0.23 0.37 0.56 0.79 1.02
Mobile excavator Excavator 0.19 0.37 0.56 0.09 0.25 0.41 0.16 0.29 0.42
Transfer travel 0.21 0.29 0.38 0.24 0.38 0.52 0.42 0.61 0.80
The measurement uncertainty is defined in standard EN 12096:1997.
1.3 Sound emission

The sound values of the machine are specified in the technical data.
The sound power level (Lwa) is determined according to Directive 2000/14/EC. The
measurement uncertainty of the sound power level value corresponds to the
difference between the guaranteed and the measured value.
The sound pressure level (Lpa) is determined according to ISO 6396. The
measurement uncertainty is defined in the above standard.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Operating manual Product description
EC Declaration of Conformity
1.4 EC Declaration of Conformity
EC Declaration of Conformity
Original Declaration of Conformity
Herewith we declare that the machine/equipment designated below is designed and built in the
version sold by us in such a way as to comply with the relevant fundamental safety and health criteria
of the applicable EC Directive(s). This declaration shall cease to be valid if alterations are made to the
machine/equipment without our prior agreement.
Designation/function: Hydraulic excavator

Make: LIEBHERR
Trade name: xxx Litronic
Type/serial number: WLHxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Engine power: xxx kW at xxxx min-1
1. Relevant regulations (last valid version):

1.1. 2006/42/EG
1.1.1. Documentation officer:
Liebherr-Hydraulikbagger GmbH, Liebherrstrasse 12, D-88457 Kirchdorf/Iller
1.1.2. Submitted voluntary for a design type examination with:
Fachausschüsse Bau (BAU) und Tiefbau (TB), Prüf- und Zertifizierungsstelle im BG-
PRÜFZERT, Landsberger Straße 309, D-80687 München
1.2. 2004/108/EG
1.3. 2000/14/EG
1.3.1. Measured sound power level on machines representative for this type: xxx dB(A)
1.3.2. Guaranteed sound power level: xxx dB(A)
1.3.3. Applied conformity assessment procedure according to Annex VIII
1.3.4. Filing location of technical documentation: Technical office
1.3.5. Notified body:
Fachausschüsse Bau (BAU) und Tiefbau (TB), Prüf- und Zertifizierungsstelle im BG-
PRÜFZERT (Kennnummer 0515), Landsberger Straße 309, D-80687 München
2. Applied harmonised standards, in particular:

2.1. EN 474-1
3. Applied national technical standards and specifications, in particular:
3.1. EN 474-5
LIEBHERR-HYDRAULIKBAGGER GMBH
D-88457 Kirchdorf/Iller
Kirchdorf, tt.mm.yyyy (Head of Quality Management Dept.)
Liebherrstraße 12 Biberach an der Riß HRB 171 Robert Bausch Deutsche Bank AG
88457 Kirchdorf/Iller UST-Id.Nr.: DE 811120044 Geschäftsführer: Filiale Ulm
Telefon +49 73 54 80-0 Steuer-Nr.: 54001/05050 Andreas Böhm, Matthias Herzog, (BLZ 630 700 88) Kto-Nr.: 206360000
Telefax +49 73 54 80-7294 Werner Seifried, Joachim Strobel, SWIFT- Code (BIC): DEUTDESS630
www.liebherr.com IBAN: DE24 6307 0088 0206 3600 00
Ein Unternehmen der Liebherr-EMtec GmbH
Fig. 1-4 Sample EC Declaration of Conformity (from year of manufacture 2010)

Only for customers in member states of the European Union: a EC Declaration of

Conformity has been shipped together with your machine. You will find this document
in the machine documentation.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Technical data
1.5 Technical data
See technical description on the following pages.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Machine for
Industrial Applications A 934 C
Operating weight: 36,300 - 37,200 kg
Engine output: 150 kW / 204 HP
A 934 C Umschlag.indd 1 06.04.2009 13:21:37

11:35:37 Uhr
A 934 C
Operating weight: 36,300 - 37,200 kg
Engine output: 150 kW / 204 HP
2 A 934 C Litronic Machine for Industrial Applications
A 934 C Umschlag.indd 2 06.04.2009 13:21:37

11:35:38 Uhr
Performance Comfort
Liebherr material handling equipment is developed for the Largely dimensioned and ergonomically designed, the
highest productivity. A high lifting capacity and rapid work Liebherr excavator cab features an operator’s seat which
cycles form the prerequisites of a powerful industrial mate- can be individually adjusted, as well as clearly arranged
rial handling operation. Numerous attachment options op- control instruments and ideal allround view. Automatic air-
timise machine performance. conditioning guarantees an optimum temperature in the
Liebherr Feel-Good cab at all times.
Reliability
Liebherr hydraulic excavators are designed and built to Economy
operate in the harshest material handling environments. The Liebherr-Litronic-System increases machine perform-
Their rugged design, high-tensile materials and indi- ance, reduces fuel consumption and minimises service
vidual components ensure maximum availability and maintenance costs. Due to Liebherr’s well-balanced
and long life expectancy. range, the ideal machine can always be selected to suit
every application.
A 934 C Litronic Machine for Industrial Applications 3
A 934 C Umschlag.indd 3 06.04.2009 13:21:37

11:35:38 Uhr
Liebherr diesel engine
• Long life expectancy, expansive cyl-
inder capacity and increased weight
• According to level IIIA / Tier 3
• Specially Developed for construction
and industrial machinery operation
• Oil supply even with 100 % tilt angle
• Excellent torque
A 934 C Umschlag.indd 4 06.04.2009 13:21:38

11:35:39 Uhr
Performance
The A 934 C Litronic has been designed for maximum production. Perfectly har-
monized, the Liebherr-developed and Liebherr-manufactured components includ-
ing diesel engine, hydraulic pump and motor, as well as swing gear and cylinders,
guarantee maximum performance. This results in a high lifting capacity with rapid
work and travel movements.
Innovative solutions
Multitude of Liebherr provide an individual, application-related
attachments range of diverse attachments. A straight or angled
industrial mono boom can be combined with vari-
ous industrial sticks to suit any application.
High lifting capacities The efficient handling of materials of differing con-
sistencies, e.g. scrap metal, wood or bulk solids,
are everyday demands on material handler equip-
ment. This is ensured by the most efficient use of
kinematics.
Rapid work cycles A separate hydraulic circuit with a maximum hy-
draulic pressure of 380 bar makes a high swing
torque possible. Rapid work cycles are achieved
through an independent control system.
Performance without Maximum performance and maximum forces are
compromise available to the operator at all times.
ReGenerationPlus The new ReGenerationPlus system on the lifting
cylinders saves energy and quickly lowers the at-
tachment.
VarioLiftPlus Changeable boom attachments for optimal lifting
capacity.
Robust undercarriage Litronic-System

• The box-type construction of the under- • Increases productivity
carriage with securely-welded supports of the excavator
provides a solid base, the greatest stability
• Reduces fuel consumption
and a long service life in every application
• Reduces service costs
• An additional dozer blade can be selected
and eases operation
• 2-range powershift transmission
• Allows maximum sensitivity and
for stepless acceleration
as many overlapping movements
as are required
A 934 C Umschlag.indd 5 06.04.2009 13:21:38

11:35:40 Uhr
Features
• High-tensile steel plates in highstress
areas for the toughest of applications
• Stable storage of attachments
and cylinders
• Maximum resistance, even
when lifting heavy loads
• VarioLiftPlus System
A 934 C Umschlag.indd 6 06.04.2009 13:21:38

11:35:40 Uhr
Reliability
Liebherr material handlers prove themselves day in, day out in the most var-
ied industrial applications all over the world. Many years of experience as the
world’s largest manufacturer of wheeled excavator, continuous development
and the introduction of the latest technology are evident in every machine,
guaranteeing absolute safety during applications. With its rugged design, and
featuring Liebherr components, the A 934 C Litronic has been designed for
extremely long life expectancy.
Quality in detail
Liebherr components Liebherr develops, tests and manufactures com-
ponents such as diesel engines, slewing gear, hy-
draulic cylinders and electronics specifically for
industrial machinery. Parts including engines and
pumps for example, are already being synchro-
nized with each other as early as the construction
phase, yielding a constant standard of quality.
Functional safety Safety-orientated components, fitted as stand-
ard, allow high availability. The operator can thus
concentrate fully on the task at hand, due to the
integrated on-board electronics performing a con-
stant balancing of pre-defined set data.
The magnet bar, fitted as standard in the hydraulic
system, increases the operating life of the hydrau-
lic components and serves as a service indicator.
Rugged attachments
Working attachment The stable attachments are designed for the
harshest applications and have a long service life.
All components have been optimised using the FE
method. Stress-reducing two-sided cylinder bear-
ings on mono and arm connections. Integrated
large diameter torsion tube for the best possible
force absorption by the attachment components.
Piping Routing the hydraulic lines in the arm offers the
best protection against damage. The electric
cabling is made with high-grade materials, thus
guaranteeing a reliable supply to the consumer.
Liebherr hydraulic cylinders Functional safety

• Specific size for each machine • Essential operating data is stored
and can be recalled at any time
• High-grade surface coating
of the piston rods • Control and monitoring functions increase
functional safety of the machine
• All Liebherr cylinders feature special
long-life sealing systems • Four fixed working modes for output discharge
facilitate an effective and efficient operation:
• Shock absorption at both sides
– ECO-Mode: High handling and loading performance
in the working cylinders
coupled with low fuel consumption
– POWER-Mode: For maximum handling and loading
performance under severe conditions
– LIFT-Mode: for precise handling of heavy loads
– FINE-Mode: for fine control at precision work
A 934 C Umschlag.indd 7 06.04.2009 13:21:38

11:35:41 Uhr
Large-sized cab
• Adjustable steering column
• Operator’s seat, adjustable in
height and can also be adapted
to the individual weight of the
operator
• Consoles with or without pos-
sibility of horizontal adjustment
• Large roof window
• Sun blinds
A 934 C Umschlag.indd 8 06.04.2009 13:21:38

11:35:42 Uhr
Comfort
The excavator operator is provided with an ergonomically-arranged working
area within Liebherr hydraulic excavator cabs. All switches and functions are
logically laid out, and operator’s seat, steering column and consoles can be
adjusted individually. Conditioning and concentration can thus be maintained
throughout the entire working day, guaranteeing constant, maximum productiv-
ity of the operator.
Mobile comfort
Easy access Wide steps, ergonomically-positioned handles and
adjustable steering column allow an easy access
into the Liebherr operator’s cab.
Optimum visibility A well-thought-out design of the uppercarriage,
featuring large glass panels and rounded edges, in-
crease overall visibility and guarantees a safe over-
view of the entire working area. The best field of
vision in all directions and from any cab position.
Pleasant surroundings Reduced engine speed together with elaborate
sound insulation, as well as optimised hydraulic
components, allow a comfortable noise level both
inside and out. The noise level is comparable with
that of modern cars.
Maintenance features
Simple maintenance Liebherr semi-automatic central lubrication system
for slewing gear and main attachment components.
Ease of operation A shut-off valve, fitted to the hydraulic tank as
standard, disconnects the system and guarantees
ease of maintenance to the hydraulic system.
Easy access Large, self-locking maintenance hatches allow easy
and safe access to all maintenance points.
Storage compartment – Fully-automatic air-conditioning system

Everything has its place
• The air-conditioning system, fitted
• Sufficient storage space for a as standard, offers the same comfort
commercially-approved cooler as that of a regular car
box behind the operator’s seat
• Two sensors for precise temperature
• Drinks holder and storage regulation
compartment in operator’s cab
• Ventilation flaps are controlled via keys
• Large storage box behind
• Reheat function for quick dehumidifying /
the operator’s cab
defrosting of the windshield
• Two standard tool boxes in
the undercarriage
A 934 C Umschlag.indd 9 06.04.2009 11:35:43

13:21:38 Uhr
Hydrostatic fan drive
• Accelerated warm-up period
• Guaranteed constant oil quality as
a result of constant oil temperature
• Increased life expectancy of drive
components
• The fan only runs at the output
required, thus conserving fuel
and reducing the noise level
considerably
• Thermostatic control
A 934 C Umschlag.indd 10 06.04.2009 13:21:39

11:35:43 Uhr
Economy
Liebherr offer a wide range of models, guaranteeing optimum suitability for every
application. Easy access to components, as well as the proven service offer al-
lows maintenance tasks to be performed in the shortest of times, thus reducing
operating costs considerably.
Low operating costs

Liebherr engine Full engine power available even at low speeds.
This means that unrestricted power is available
when it is really required, providing high levels of
productivity and low fuel consumption.
Automatic idle If no working or travel movements are being per-
formed, the shiftable function reduces the engine
speed to idle, which in turn reduces fuel consump-
tion and emission levels.
Intelligent hydraulic The state-of-the-art hydraulic system allows con-
management version of the maximum engine output into high
force or speed, as required. The maximum possible
forces are available at all times.
Hydraulically- The hydraulically-adjustable cab allows the driver
adjustable cab to optimise his field of view to increase material-
handling performance.
Investment for the future

Extensive Proven service offers assured by our service per-
service offer sonnel trained directly at the manufacturing plants,
and endorsed by our tight-knit network of dealers,
provide services in all required areas. Direct contact
to Liebherr is guaranteed via complete integration
of all service points in our own Liebherr logistics
system. Electronic access to our global spare-parts
management allows a 98 % availability of spare-
parts 24 hours a day.
High resale values Liebherr excavators are built with high-grade ma-
terials and quality production to provide a longterm
operational life-span, thus guaranteeing maximum
resale values.
Service oriented A wide range

• Engine service points - such as the • Modular quick connection system
filter or capacity displays - easily to
• Liebherr mechanical and hydraulic
access and reach via a catwalk
quick connection for efficient chang-
• The magnet bar in the hydraulic oil ing of working tools
tank acts as a service indicator and
• Comprehensive Liebherr
increases the service life of the oil
grab program
• Liebherr semi-automatic central lubri-
• Wide range of Liebherr grabs
cating systems for the slewing gear
for different applications
and main attachment components
fitted as standard for quick and tar-
geted maintenance
A 934 C Umschlag.indd 11 06.04.2009 13:21:39

11:35:43 Uhr
Technical Data
Engine Swing Drive
Rating per ISO 9249 �� 150 kW (204 HP) at 1800 RPM Drive by �� Liebherr swash plate motor with integrated
Model �� Liebherr D 934 L according to level IIIA / Tier 3 brake valves
Type �� 4 cylinder in-line Transmission �� Liebherr compact planetary reduction gear
Bore/Stroke �� 122/150 mm Swing ring �� Liebherr, sealed single race ball bearing
Displacement �� 7,0 l swing ring, internal teeth
Engine operation �� 4-stroke diesel Swing speed �� 0 – 8,2 RPM stepless
unit pump system Swing torque �� 84 kNm
turbo-charged and after-cooled Holding brake �� wet multi-disc (spring applied, pressure
reduced emissions released), pedal controlled positioning
Cooling �� water-cooled and integrated motor oil brake
cooler
Air cleaner �� dry-type air cleaner with pre-cleaner,
primary and safety elements, automatic
dust discharge Operator’s Cab
Fuel tank �� 580 l
Standard �� sensor controlled engine idling Cab �� resiliently mounted, sound insulated, tinted
Electrical system windows, front window stores overhead,
Voltage �� 24 V door with sliding window
Batteries �� 2 x 170 Ah/12 V Operator’s seat �� fully adjustable, shockabsorbing suspen
Starter �� 24 V/6,6 kW sion, adjustable to operator’s weight and
Alternator �� three phase current 28 V/80 A size, 6-way adjustable Liebherr seat
Option �� Liebherr particle filter Joysticks �� integrated into adjustable consoles
Monitoring �� menu driven query of current operating
conditions via the LCD display. Automatic
monitoring, display, warning (acoustical
Hydraulic System and optical signal) and saving machine
data, for example, engine overheating, low
Hydraulic pump engine oil pressure or low hydraulic oil level
for attachment and Air conditioning �� standard air conditioning, combined
travel drive �� two Liebherr variable flow, swash plate cooler/heater, additional dust filter in fresh
pumps air/recirculated
Max. flow �� 2 x 245 l/min. Noise emission
Max. pressure �� 350 bar ISO 6396 �� LpA (inside cab) = 74 dB(A)
Pump regulation �� electro-hydraulic with electronic engine 2000/14/EC �� LWA (surround noise) = 104 dB(A)
speed sensing regulation, pressure com
pensation, flow compensation, automatic
oil flow optimizer
Hydraulic pump Undercarriage
for swing drive �� reversible, variable flow, swash plate pump,
closed-loop circuit Drive �� Liebherr variable flow swashplate motor
Max. flow �� 148 l/min. with automatic brake valves
Max. pressure �� 380 bar Transmission �� oversized two speed power shift trans
Hydraulic tank �� 350 l mission with additional creeper speeds
Hydraulic system �� 590 l Travel speed �� 0 – 2,5 km/h (creeper speed)
Hydraulic oil filter �� 2 full flow filters in return line with inte 0 – 5,0 km/h (cross country)
grated fine filter area (5 µm) 0 – 10,0 km/h (creeper speed road)
Hydraulic oil cooler �� compact cooler, consisting of a water 0 – 20,0 km/h (road travel)
cooler, sandwiched with hydraulic oil Axles �� 60 t excavator axles; automatic or operator
cooler, fuel cooler and after-cooler cores controlled front axle oscillation lock
and hydrostatically driven fan Service and
MODE selection �� adjustment of machine performance and holding brakes �� multiple wet discs
the hydraulics via a mode selector to match Parking brake �� multiple wet discs (spring applied –
application pressure released)
ECO �� for especially economical and environ Stabilization �� 4-point outriggers with suspended rocker
mentally friendly operation arm supports
POWER �� for maximum digging power and heavy
duty jobs
LIFT �� for lifting
FINE �� for precision work and lifting through very Attachment
sensitive movements
RPM adjustment �� stepless adjustment of engine output via Type �� high-strength steel plates at highly-
the rpm at each selected mode stressed points for the toughest require
Tool Control (Option) �� ten preadjustable pump flows and pres ments. Complex and stable mountings of
sures for add on tools attachment and cylinders. Unrivalled
strength, even at high loads
Hydraulic cylinders �� Liebherr cylinders with special seal system.
Shock absorption
Hydraulic Controls Pivots �� sealed, low maintenance
Lubrication �� Liebherr semi-automatic central lubrication
Power distribution �� via control valves in single block with inte system
grated safety valves
Flow summation �� to boom and stick
Closed-loop circuit �� for uppercarriage swing drive
Servo circuit
Attachment and
swing �� proportional via joystick levers
Travel �� proportional via foot pedal
Additional functions �� via foot pedals or joystick push buttons

Dimensions
E A1
D A
C
W H
T4 M T1 B
L B1
U4
Z
V
X
Hydraulic Cab Elevation mm Industrial-Type Straight Boom 7,60 m

A 3060 and Industrial-Type Stick m 5,00 6,00
A1) 3000 V mm 7620 6800
A1 3240 W mm 2950 3450
A11) 3410 X mm 11200 11200
B 2990
B1 4700 Industrial-Type Straight Boom 8,60 m
C 3390 and Industrial-Type Stick m 6,00 7,50
D 3145 V mm 7540 6440
E 3145 W mm 2950 4250
H 2840 X mm 12200 12100
K 1465
L 3000 Industrial-Type Gooseneck Boom 8,60 m
M 1500 and Industrial-Type Stick m 6,00 7,50
Q 255 V mm – 6540
T1 1310 W mm 3300 4850
T4 1310 X mm 12150 12100
U4 5620
Z 5905 Industrial Stick m 5,00 6,00 7,50
1) Rigid
F mm 5350 6350 7850
cab elevation
G mm 1200 1250 1250
E = Tail radius
P mm 1050 1050 1050
Tires 12.00-20 Dimensions are with attachment over steering axle

Industrial Attachment
with Industrial-Type Straight Boom 7,60 m
ft m
16 Attachment Envelope
50
15
Kinematic variants 2A/3B
45 14
1 with industrial stick 5,00 m
13
40 12 3 with industrial stick 5,00 m and grapple model 70 C
35
11 4 with industrial stick 6,00 m and grapple model 70 C
10
30 9
8
25
7
Operating Weight
20 6 Operating weight includes basic machine A 934 C litronic` with
5 4 point outriggers, hydraulic cab elevation, 8 solid tires plus spacer
15
4 rings and industrial application with industrial-type straight boom
10
7,60 m.
3
2 with grapple model 70 C/0,80 m3 semi-closed tines Weight
5 industrial stick 5,00 m 36300 kg
1
industrial stick 6,00 m 36500 kg
0 0
-1
-5
-2
1
-10 -3
2
-4
-15
-5
3
-20 -6
4
-7
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 m
45 40 35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0 ft
VarioLiftPlus
VarioLiftPlus: Variable boom mounting positions for optimized lift capacities
with the same working range with a different working range
Hole A 2A
Hole B 2A
3B
Hole 3 Version 2A
3A
Hole 2 Kinematic Variant 2A: Kinematic Variant 3A:
Increased lift capacities above ground level Altered range curve with additional reach
Kinematic Variant 3B: depth, e.g. for unloading from ships
Increased lift capacities below ground level
and when working at large outreach

Lift Capacities
with Industrial-Type Straight Boom 7,60 m (Kinematic Variant 2A)
Industrial Stick 5,00 m

3,0 m 4,5 m 6,0 m 7,5 m 9,0 m 10,5 m 12,0 m 13,5 m 15,0 m
m Undercarriage m
Stabilizers raised
16,5 4 pt. outriggers down
Stabilizers raised
Stabilizers raised 10,4* 10,4* 9,3* 9,3*
13,5
4,96
4 pt. outriggers down 10,4* 10,4* 9,3* 9,3*
Stabilizers raised 8,9 10,4* 6,1 7,4* 6,1 7,4*
12,0
7,52
4 pt. outriggers down 10,4* 10,4* 7,4* 7,4* 7,4* 7,4*
Stabilizers raised 9,1 10,0* 6,4 8,0 4,6 5,8 4,4 5,6
10,5
9,15
4 pt. outriggers down 10,0* 10,0* 8,6* 8,6* 7,2* 7,2* 6,6* 6,6*
9,0
10,32
Stabilizers raised 8,9 10,3* 6,2 7,9 4,6 5,9 3,5 4,5 3,1 4,0
7,5
11,16
4 pt. outriggers down 10,3* 10,3* 8,7* 8,7* 7,5* 7,5* 6,6* 6,6* 6,0* 6,0*
Stabilizers raised 13,2 13,7* 8,4 10,8 6,0 7,6 4,5 5,7 3,5 4,4 2,8 3,7
6,0
11,75
4 pt. outriggers down 13,7* 13,7* 10,8* 10,8* 8,9* 8,9* 7,6* 7,6* 6,5* 6,5* 5,6* 5,6*
Stabilizers raised 22,5* 22,5* 12,0 15,0* 7,9 10,1 5,7 7,3 4,3 5,5 3,4 4,3 2,7 3,5 2,6 3,4
4,5
12,13
4 pt. outriggers down 22,5* 22,5* 15,0* 15,0* 11,4* 11,4* 9,2* 9,2* 7,7* 7,7* 6,5* 6,5* 5,3* 5,3* 5,2* 5,2*
Stabilizers raised 10,6 14,4 7,2 9,4 5,3 6,9 4,1 5,3 3,2 4,2 2,6 3,4 2,5 3,3
3,0
12,31
4 pt. outriggers down 16,0* 16,0* 11,8* 11,8* 9,3* 9,3* 7,7* 7,7* 6,4* 6,4* 5,1* 5,1* 4,8* 4,8*
Stabilizers raised 9,2* 9,2* 6,6 8,8 5,0 6,5 3,9 5,1 3,1 4,1 2,6 3,4 2,5 3,3
1,5
12,30
0
12,11
Stabilizers raised 8,9* 8,9* 6,1 8,3 4,6 6,1 3,6 4,8 3,0 4,0 2,8 3,7
– 1,5
10,98
Stabilizers raised
– 3,0 4 pt. outriggers down
Stabilizers raised
Stabilizers raised

3,0 m 4,5 m 6,0 m 7,5 m 9,0 m 10,5 m 12,0 m 13,5 m 15,0 m
m Undercarriage m
Stabilizers raised
Stabilizers raised 9,8* 9,8*
15,0
3,67
4 pt. outriggers down 9,8* 9,8*
13,5
7,08
Stabilizers raised 9,4 9,5* 6,5 8,2 4,7 5,9 4,6 5,8*
12,0
9,05
Stabilizers raised 6,7 8,1* 4,9 6,1 3,6 4,6
10,5
10,45
9,0
11,48
7,5
12,24
6,0
12,78
4,5
13,13
Stabilizers raised 15,1* 15,1* 11,4 15,3 7,6 9,9 5,5 7,1 4,2 5,4 3,3 4,3 2,6 3,5 2,2 2,9
3,0
13,30
1,5
13,29
0
13,12
Stabilizers raised 8,9 9,0* 6,1 8,3 4,6 6,1 3,6 4,8 2,9 3,9 2,4 3,3 2,4 3,1
– 1,5
12,37
Stabilizers raised 6,0 8,1 4,5 6,0 3,5 4,7 2,9 3,9 2,9 3,8
– 3,0
10,55
Stabilizers raised
Stabilizers raised
Height Can be slewed through 360° In longitudinal position of undercarriage Max. reach * Limited by hydr. capacity
The lift capacities on the stick end without attachment are stated in metric tons (t) and are valid on a firm, level supporting surface with blocked
oscillating axle. These capacities can be slewed through 360° with the undercarriage in the transverse position. Capacities in the longitudinal posi
tion of the undercarriage (+/– 15°) are specified over the steering axle with the stabilisers raised and over the rigid axle with the stabilisers down.
Indicated loads comply with the ISO 10567 standard and do not exceed 75 % of tipping or 87 % of hydraulic capacity.
In accordance with the harmonised EU Standard EN 474-5, hydraulic excavators used for lifting operations must be equipped with pipe rupture
protection devices on the hoist cylinders and an overload warning device.

Lift Capacities
with Industrial-Type Straight Boom 7,60 m (Kinematic variant 3B)

3,0 m 4,5 m 6,0 m 7,5 m 9,0 m 10,5 m 12,0 m 13,5 m 15,0 m
m Undercarriage m
Stabilizers raised
Stabilizers raised
13,5
5,42
Stabilizers raised 8,3* 8,3* 6,2 7,7* 5,7 7,2
12,0
7,84
Stabilizers raised 8,0* 8,0* 6,4 7,3* 4,6 5,8 4,2 5,4
10,5
9,41
Stabilizers raised 8,0* 8,0* 6,3 7,3* 4,7 5,9 3,5 4,5 3,5 4,4
9,0
10,53
7,5
11,34
Stabilizers raised 11,3* 11,3* 8,4 9,2* 5,9 7,5 4,4 5,7 3,4 4,4 2,7 3,5
6,0
11,91
4 pt. outriggers down 11,3* 11,3* 9,2* 9,2* 7,9* 7,9* 7,0* 7,0* 6,4* 6,4* 5,6 5,9*
4,5
12,27
4 pt. outriggers down 20,4* 20,4* 13,4* 13,4* 10,3* 10,3* 8,5* 8,5* 7,4* 7,4* 6,5* 6,5* 5,5 5,9* 5,3 5,8*
3,0
12,43
4 pt. outriggers down 15,7* 15,7* 11,4* 11,4* 9,1* 9,1* 7,7* 7,7* 6,7 6,7* 5,5 5,9* 5,2 5,6*
1,5
12,40
0
12,19
4 pt. outriggers down 7,5* 7,5* 12,4* 12,4* 9,8* 9,8* 8,0 8,0* 6,4 6,7* 5,4 5,6* 5,3 5,4*
– 1,5
10,90
4 pt. outriggers down 12,0* 12,0* 9,5* 9,5* 7,8* 7,8* 6,4 6,4* 6,1* 6,1*
Stabilizers raised
Stabilizers raised
Stabilizers raised

3,0 m 4,5 m 6,0 m 7,5 m 9,0 m 10,5 m 12,0 m 13,5 m 15,0 m
m Undercarriage m
Stabilizers raised
15,0
4,31
Stabilizers raised 8,0* 8,0* 6,3 6,6*
13,5
7,44
12,0
9,34
Stabilizers raised 6,5* 6,5* 4,9 6,1 3,6 4,6 3,5 4,4
10,5
10,68
Stabilizers raised 6,5* 6,5* 4,9 6,1 3,7 4,7 2,9 3,8
9,0
11,68
7,5
12,42
6,0
12,94
Stabilizers raised 11,5* 11,5* 11,7* 11,7* 8,2 9,3* 5,8 7,4 4,4 5,6 3,4 4,4 2,7 3,5 2,2 2,9
4,5
13,27
3,0
13,41
1,5
13,39
4 pt. outriggers down 2,5* 2,5* 13,4* 13,4* 11,6* 11,6* 9,2* 9,2* 7,7* 7,7* 6,6 6,6* 5,4 5,8* 4,6 5,0*
Stabilizers raised 3,2* 3,2* 8,6* 8,6* 6,3 8,4 4,7 6,2 3,7 4,9 3,0 3,9 2,4 3,3 2,1 2,9
0
13,20
– 1,5
12,34
4 pt. outriggers down 8,6* 8,6* 12,2* 12,2* 9,6* 9,6* 7,8 7,9* 6,3 6,6* 5,3 5,5* 5,1 5,2*
Stabilizers raised 5,9 8,1 4,4 5,9 3,5 4,7 2,9 3,9
– 3,0
10,34
Stabilizers raised
Stabilizers raised

ft m
55 17
16 Kinematic variants 2A/3B
50 15 1 with industrial stick 6,00 m
13 3 with industrial stick 6,00 m and grapple model 65
40 12 4 with industrial stick 7,50 m and grapple model 65
35 11
10
30 9
25
8 Operating Weight
7
20 6 Operating weight includes basic machine A 934 C litronic` with
5
4 point outriggers, hydraulic cab elevation, 8 solid tires plus spacer
15 rings and industrial application with industrial-type straight boom
4
8,60 m.
10 3
2 with grapple model 65/0,60 m3 semi-closed tines Weight
1
0 0
-1
-5
-2
-10 -3
1
-4
-15
-5 2
-20 -6 3
-7
-25 4
-8
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 m
55 50 45 40 35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0 ft
VarioLiftPlus
Hole A 2A
Hole B 2A
3B
Hole 3 Version 2A
3A
Hole 2 Kinematic Variant 2A: Kinematic Variant 3A:

Lift Capacities

3,0 m 4,5 m 6,0 m 7,5 m 9,0 m 10,5 m 12,0 m 13,5 m 15,0 m
m Undercarriage m
Stabilizers raised
15,0
6,39
13,5
8,79
12,0
10,45
10,5
11,67
9,0
12,60
7,5
13,30
6,0
13,80
Stabilizers raised 21,7* 21,7* 11,8 14,3* 7,7 10,0 5,5 7,1 4,1 5,4 3,2 4,2 2,5 3,3 2,0 2,7 1,8 2,5
4,5
14,12
4 pt. outriggers down 21,7* 21,7* 14,3* 14,3* 10,8* 10,8* 8,6* 8,6* 7,2* 7,2* 6,1* 6,1* 5,2* 5,2* 4,4* 4,4* 3,9* 3,9*
Stabilizers raised 9,9 13,7 6,8 9,0 5,0 6,6 3,8 5,0 3,0 4,0 2,4 3,2 1,9 2,6 1,7 2,4
3,0
14,28
1,5
14,27
0
14,11
– 1,5
13,37
– 3,0
11,55
Stabilizers raised
Stabilizers raised

3,0 m 4,5 m 6,0 m 7,5 m 9,0 m 10,5 m 12,0 m 13,5 m 15,0 m
m Undercarriage m
16,5
6,60
15,0
9,20
13,5
10,99
12,0
12,35
10,5
13,41
9,0
14,22
7,5
14,84
6,0
15,29
4,5
15,58
Stabilizers raised 21,4* 21,4* 11,6 14,1* 7,6 9,9 5,4 7,0 4,0 5,3 3,1 4,1 2,5 3,3 1,9 2,7 1,5 2,2 1,4 2,0
3,0
15,72
4 pt. outriggers down 21,4* 21,4* 14,1* 14,1* 10,5* 10,5* 8,4* 8,4* 7,0* 7,0* 5,9* 5,9* 5,1* 5,1* 4,4* 4,4* 3,6* 3,6* 3,1* 3,1*
Stabilizers raised 2,7* 2,7* 9,7 13,4 6,6 8,8 4,8 6,4 3,7 4,9 2,9 3,9 2,3 3,1 1,8 2,6 1,5 2,1 1,4 1,9
1,5
15,72
Stabilizers raised 2,4* 2,4* 7,1* 7,1* 5,8 8,0 4,3 5,9 3,3 4,6 2,7 3,6 2,1 3,0 1,7 2,5 1,4 2,1 1,4 1,9
0
15,57
– 1,5
15,19
– 3,0
14,04
– 4,5
11,91
Stabilizers raised

Lift Capacities
with Industrial-Type Straight Boom 8,60 m (Kinematic Variant 3B)

3,0 m 4,5 m 6,0 m 7,5 m 9,0 m 10,5 m 12,0 m 13,5 m 15,0 m
m Undercarriage m
Stabilizers raised
15,0
6,82
13,5
9,11
12,0
10,70
10,5
11,90
Stabilizers raised 7,2* 7,2* 6,4* 6,4* 4,8 5,8* 3,6 4,6 2,7 3,6 2,3 3,1
9,0
12,80
7,5
13,47
4 pt. outriggers down 7,7* 7,7* 6,7* 6,7* 6,0* 6,0* 5,5* 5,5* 5,0* 5,0* 4,6 4,7*
Stabilizers raised 10,6* 10,6* 8,4 8,5* 5,9 7,2* 4,4 5,6 3,3 4,3 2,6 3,4 2,0 2,7 1,9 2,5
6,0
13,95
Stabilizers raised 19,4* 19,4* 11,5 12,6* 7,5 9,5* 5,4 7,0 4,1 5,3 3,1 4,1 2,5 3,3 2,0 2,7 1,7 2,4
4,5
14,26
4 pt. outriggers down 19,4* 19,4* 12,6* 12,6* 9,5* 9,5* 7,8* 7,8* 6,6* 6,6* 5,8* 5,8* 5,2* 5,2* 4,5 4,7* 4,1 4,5*
Stabilizers raised 9,6 10,6* 6,6 8,9 4,9 6,5 3,7 5,0 2,9 3,9 2,3 3,2 1,9 2,6 1,7 2,3
3,0
14,39
1,5
14,37
0
14,19
4 pt. outriggers down 4,6* 4,6* 11,5* 11,5* 9,0* 9,0* 7,4* 7,4* 6,1 6,2* 5,0 5,4* 4,3 4,6* 4,0 4,2*
– 1,5
13,34
– 3,0
11,34
Stabilizers raised
Stabilizers raised

3,0 m 4,5 m 6,0 m 7,5 m 9,0 m 10,5 m 12,0 m 13,5 m 15,0 m
m Undercarriage m
16,5
7,05
Stabilizers raised 6,0* 6,0* 4,8 5,6* 4,3 4,9*
15,0
9,53
13,5
11,27
12,0
12,59
10,5
13,61
9,0
14,41
Stabilizers raised 5,8* 5,8* 5,0 5,3* 3,7 4,8 2,9 3,7 2,2 2,9 1,6 2,3 1,6 2,3
7,5
15,01
6,0
15,44
Stabilizers raised 9,5* 9,5* 8,2* 8,2* 5,9 6,9* 4,4 5,6 3,3 4,3 2,6 3,4 2,0 2,7 1,6 2,2 1,4 2,0
4,5
15,71
Stabilizers raised 19,1* 19,1* 11,3 12,3* 7,4 9,3* 5,3 6,9 4,0 5,2 3,1 4,1 2,4 3,2 1,9 2,6 1,5 2,1 1,3 1,9
3,0
15,84
4 pt. outriggers down 19,1* 19,1* 12,3* 12,3* 9,3* 9,3* 7,5* 7,5* 6,4* 6,4* 5,6* 5,6* 5,0* 5,0* 4,4 4,5* 3,7 4,0* 3,4 3,7*
1,5
15,82
0
15,66
4 pt. outriggers down 2,2* 2,2* 6,4* 6,4* 10,9* 10,9* 8,5* 8,5* 7,0* 7,0* 6,0* 6,0* 5,0 5,2* 4,2 4,5* 3,6 4,0* 3,4 3,6*
– 1,5
15,20
4 pt. outriggers down 3,1* 3,1* 5,9* 5,9* 11,2* 11,2* 8,7* 8,7* 7,2* 7,2* 5,9 6,0* 4,9 5,2* 4,1 4,5* 3,6 3,7* 3,5 3,6*
– 3,0
13,98
4 pt. outriggers down 6,4* 6,4* 10,9* 10,9* 8,6* 8,6* 7,1* 7,1* 5,8 5,9* 4,8 5,0* 4,1 4,2* 3,9 4,0*
– 4,5
11,65
Stabilizers raised

with Industrial-Type Gooseneck Boom 8,60 m
ft m
16
Attachment Envelope
50 15 Kinematic variant 3D
45 14
13
40 2 with industrial stick 7,50 m
12
3 with industrial stick 6,00 m and clamshell model 20 B
11
35 4 with industrial stick 7,50 m and clamshell model 20 B
10
30 9
8
25
7
20 6
Operating Weight
5 Operating weight includes basic machine A 934 C litronic` with
15
4 4 point outriggers, hydraulic cab elevation, 8 solid tires plus spacer
10 3 rings and industrial application with industrial-type gooseneck boom
2 8,60 m.
5
1 with clamshell model 20 B/1,50 m3 shells for loose material Weight
0 0 industrial stick 6,00 m 36900 kg
-1 industrial stick 7,50 m 37200 kg
-5
-2
-10 -3
-4
-15 1
-5
-20 -6 2
-7
-25 3
-8
-30 -9 4
-10
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 m
55 50 45 40 35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0 ft
VarioLiftPlus
with a different working range
Hole D
Hole C
3D
3D
Hole 3 Version 3D
Hole 2
3C
Kinematic Variant 3D: Kinematic Variant 3C:

Increased lift capacities below ground level Altered range curve with additional reach
and when working at large outreach depth, e.g. for unloading from ships

Lift Capacities
with Industrial-Type Gooseneck Boom 8,60 m (Kinematic Variant 3D)

3,0 m 4,5 m 6,0 m 7,5 m 9,0 m 10,5 m 12,0 m 13,5 m 15,0 m
m Undercarriage m
Stabilizers raised
Stabilizers raised
13,5
8,36
Stabilizers raised 5,0 5,5* 4,0 5,1
12,0
10,08
10,5
11,34
9,0
12,29
7,5
12,99
6,0
13,48
4,5
13,80
Stabilizers raised 2,1* 2,1* 9,9 13,7 6,9 9,1 5,0 6,7 3,9 5,1 3,0 4,0 2,4 3,3 1,9 2,7 1,8 2,5
3,0
13,94
Stabilizers raised 1,8* 1,8* 7,2* 7,2* 6,0 8,2 4,6 6,1 3,6 4,8 2,8 3,8 2,3 3,1 1,9 2,6 1,8 2,4
1,5
13,92
4 pt. outriggers down 1,8* 1,8* 7,2* 7,2* 10,9* 10,9* 8,5* 8,5* 7,1* 7,1* 6,0* 6,0* 5,2 5,3* 4,4 4,7* 4,2 4,5*
0
13,73
4 pt. outriggers down 3,1* 3,1* 6,4* 6,4* 11,4* 11,4* 8,9* 8,9* 7,3* 7,3* 6,1 6,2* 5,1 5,4* 4,3 4,7* 4,2 4,6*
– 1,5
13,37
Stabilizers raised 5,1 7,2 3,8 5,3 3,0 4,2 2,4 3,4 2,0 2,9 1,9 2,6
– 3,0
12,83
4 pt. outriggers down 10,9* 10,9* 8,7* 8,7* 7,2* 7,2* 5,9 6,0* 4,9 5,1* 4,5* 4,5*
Stabilizers raised 3,8 5,3 3,0 4,2 2,5 3,4
– 4,5
10,46
Stabilizers raised

3,0 m 4,5 m 6,0 m 7,5 m 9,0 m 10,5 m 12,0 m 13,5 m 15,0 m
m Undercarriage m
Stabilizers raised
15,0
8,63
13,5
10,53
Stabilizers raised 4,0 4,4* 3,0 3,9*
12,0
11,93
10,5
13,01
9,0
13,84
7,5
14,46
6,0
14,91
4,5
15,19
Stabilizers raised 17,8* 17,8* 11,5* 11,5* 7,7 8,7* 5,5 7,1* 4,1 5,4 3,2 4,2 2,5 3,3 2,0 2,7 1,6 2,2 1,5 2,1
3,0
15,32
4 pt. outriggers down 17,8* 17,8* 11,5* 11,5* 8,7* 8,7* 7,1* 7,1* 6,1* 6,1* 5,3* 5,3* 4,8* 4,8* 4,3* 4,3* 3,8 4,0* 3,6 3,9*
1,5
15,30
0
15,14
4 pt. outriggers down 3,9* 3,9* 8,6* 8,6* 10,6* 10,6* 8,3* 8,3* 6,8* 6,8* 5,8* 5,8* 5,1 5,1* 4,2 4,5* 3,6 4,0* 3,6 3,9*
– 1,5
14,81
4 pt. outriggers down 4,3* 4,3* 7,4* 7,4* 11,0* 11,0* 8,6* 8,6* 7,1* 7,1* 6,0* 6,0* 4,9 5,2* 4,2 4,5* 3,6 4,0*
– 3,0
14,32
4 pt. outriggers down 5,0* 5,0* 7,4* 7,4* 11,0* 11,0* 8,7* 8,7* 7,1* 7,1* 5,8 6,0* 4,8 5,1* 4,1 4,4* 3,8 4,0*
Stabilizers raised 7,2 7,8* 4,8 6,9 3,6 5,1 2,8 4,0 2,3 3,2 1,9 2,7 1,6 2,3 1,6 2,3
– 4,5
13,56
4 pt. outriggers down 7,8* 7,8* 10,6* 10,6* 8,4* 8,4* 6,9* 6,9* 5,7 5,8* 4,8 4,9* 4,0* 4,0* 4,0* 4,0*
– 6,0
10,67

Choice of Cab Elevation
and Cab Protection
D
Rigid Cab Elevation
Height mm 800 1200 1500 2000
A mm 3360 3760 4060 4560
B mm 3700 4100 4400 4900
C C mm 4200 4600 4900 5400
B D mm 675 675 675 675
A
A rigid cab elevation has a fixed eye level height. For a lower trans
port height the shell of the cab can be removed. The overall height is
then dimension A.
For additional protection of the operator a cab guard with or without
screen cab guard and a front window screen are available.
D2
D1 Hydraulic Cab Elevation
(Parallelogram)
B1 2890 mm
B2 5390 mm
C1 3390 mm
C2 5890 mm
D1 1370 mm
D2 1615 mm
E 3305 mm
C2
B2 The parallelogram cab raiser allows the operator to choose his field of
view between dimensions B1 and B2. For a transport height lower
C1 E than C1 the shell of the cab can be removed. The overall height is
B1
then E.
As cab protection a front window screen can be installed.
Grille above Grilles in front

Variety of Tools
Shells for loose material with
Shells
for Loose Material Clamshell Model 20 B cutting edge (without teeth)
Cutting width of shells mm 1000 1200 1600
Capacity m3 1,30 1,50 2,00
For loose material, specific weight up to t/m3 1,5 1,5 1,5
Weight kg 1355 1415 1550
Multiple Tine Grapples open tines semi-closed tines closed tines

Grapple Model 64 Capacity m3 0,40 0,60 0,40 0,60 0,40 0,60
(4 tines) Weight kg 845 1130 1055 1330 1060 1520
(5 tines) Weight kg 1150 1230 1285 1415 1325 1520
(4 tines) Weight kg 1345 1395 1535 1640 1900 2060
Grapple Model 70 C Capacity m3 0,80 1,10 0,80 1,10 0,80 1,10
(5 tines) Weight kg 1485 1590 1705 1860 1950 1995
Crane Hook with Suspension

Max. load t 12,5
Height with suspension mm 930
Weight kg 96
Magnet Devices/Lifting Magnets

Generator kW 13 20
Electromagnets with Suspension
Power kW 8,5 10
Diameter of magnet mm 1300 1400
Height with suspension mm 1100 1100
Weight kg 1350 1830

Equipment
Undercarriage Operator’s Cab
Two circuit travel brake with accumulator • Storage tray •
Travel motor protection + Displays for engine operating condition •
Outrigger cylinder rod guards + Mechanical hour meters, readable from outside the cab •
Creeper speed electrically switchable from cab • Roof hatch •
New tires • 6-way adjustable seat •
Service free parking brake • Airpressure operator seat with heating and head-rest +
Independent outrigger control + Seat and consoles independently adjustable •
Choice of tires + Extinguisher +
Auto check valve directly on each stabilizer cylinder • Removable customized foot mat •
Proportional power steering • Dome light •
Customized colors + Hydraulic cab elevation +
Two lockable storage boxes • Rigid cab elevation +
Two-speed power shift transmission • Cab heater with defroster •
Cloth hook •
Air conditioning •
Electric cool box +
Uppercarriage Steering wheel adjustable •
Electric fuel tank filler pump + Bullet proof window (fixed installation – can not be opened) +
Maintenance-free swing brake lock • Stereo radio +
Handrails, Non slip surfaces • Preparation for radio installation +
Main switch for electric circuit • Rain hood over front window opening •
Printed in Germany by Eberl RG-BK-RP LHB/VF 8421023-2-03.09 All illustrations and data may differ from standard equipment. Subject to change without notice.
Engine hood with lift help • Beacon +
Pedal controlled positioning swing brake • All tinted windows •
Reverse travel warning system + Door with sliding window •
Sound insulation • Optical warning if outriggers are not fully retracted +
Customized colors + Auxiliary heating +
Maintenance-free HD-batteries • Sun shade +
Lockable tool box • Sun roller blind •
Tool kit • Electronic drive away lock +
Wiper/washer •
Cigarette lighter and ashtray •
Additional flood lights +
Hydraulics
Hydraulic tank shut-off valve •
Extra hydr. control for hydr. swivel +
Pressure compensation • Attachment
Hook up for pressure checks • Flood lights •
Pressure storage for controlled lowering of attachments with Hydr. lines for clam operation in sticks •
engine turned off • Industrial-type gooseneck sticks with remote hydraulic pin puller +
Filter with partial micro filteration (5 µm) • Sealed pivots •
Electronic pump regulation • Safety lift hook +
Stepless mode system (ECO) • Liebherr line of clams +
Flow compensation • Liebherr semi-automatic central lubrication system •
Four mixed modes, can also be adjusted • Liebherr fully-automatic central lubrication system +
Full flow micro filtration + Likufix +
Bio degradable hydraulic oil + Safety check valves on hoist cylinder •
Tool Control + Safety check valves on stick cylinder •
Additional hydraulic circuits + Hose quick connection •
Hydraulic or manual quick change tool adapter +
Customized colors +
Special buckets and other tools +
Engine Overload warning device +
Turbo charger • Two way valves for bucket/clam use +
After-cooled • Locking of connections for clam operation +
Sensor controlled engine idling • Cylinders with shock absorber •
Liebherr particle filter +
Unit pump system •
Air filter with pre-cleaner main- and safety element •
• = Standard, + = Option
Options and/or special attachments, supplied by vendors other than Liebherr, are only to be installed with the
knowledge and approval of Liebherr to retain warranty.
Liebherr-Hydraulikbagger GmbH
Liebherrstraße 12, D-88457 Kirchdorf/Iller
S +49 7354 80-0, Fax +49 7354 80-72 94
www.liebherr.com, E-Mail: info.lhb@liebherr.com
Machine for Industrial Applications A 934 C HD
litronic`
Operating Weight:41,150 – 42,400 kg

Engine Output: 150 kW / 204 HP
Technical Data
Engine Swing Drive
Rating per ISO 9249 �� 150 kW (204 HP) at 1800 RPM Drive by �� Liebherr swash plate motor with integrated
Model �� Liebherr D 934 L according to level IIIA / Tier 3 brake valves
Type �� 4 cylinder in-line Transmission �� Liebherr compact planetary reduction gear
Bore/Stroke �� 122/150 mm Swing ring �� Liebherr, sealed single race ball bearing
Displacement �� 7,0 l swing ring, internal teeth
Engine operation �� 4-stroke diesel Swing speed �� 0 – 8,2 RPM stepless
unit pump system Swing torque �� 84 kNm
turbo-charged and after-cooled Holding brake �� wet multi-disc (spring applied, pressure
reduced emissions released), pedal controlled positioning
Cooling �� water-cooled and integrated motor oil brake
cooler
Air cleaner �� dry-type air cleaner with pre-cleaner,
primary and safety elements, automatic
dust discharge Operator’s Cab
Fuel tank �� 580 l
Standard �� sensor controlled engine idling Cab �� resiliently mounted, sound insulated, tinted
Electrical system windows, front window stores overhead,
Voltage �� 24 V door with sliding window
Batteries �� 2 x 170 Ah/12 V Operator’s seat �� fully adjustable, shockabsorbing suspen
Starter �� 24 V/6,6 kW sion, adjustable to operator’s weight and
Alternator �� three phase current 28 V/80 A size, 6-way adjustable Liebherr seat
Option �� Liebherr particle filter Joysticks �� integrated into adjustable consoles
Monitoring �� menu driven query of current operating
conditions via the LCD display. Automatic
monitoring, display, warning (acoustical
Hydraulic System and optical signal) and saving machine
data, for example, engine overheating, low
Hydraulic pump engine oil pressure or low hydraulic oil level
for attachment and Air conditioning �� standard air conditioning, combined
travel drive �� two Liebherr variable flow, swash plate cooler/heater, additional dust filter in fresh
pumps air/recirculated
Max. flow �� 2 x 245 l/min. Noise emission
Max. pressure �� 350 bar ISO 6396 �� LpA (inside cab) = 74 dB(A)
Pump regulation �� electro-hydraulic with electronic engine 2000/14/EC �� LWA (surround noise) = 104 dB(A)
speed sensing regulation, pressure com
pensation, flow compensation, automatic
oil flow optimizer
Hydraulic pump Undercarriage
for swing drive �� reversible, variable flow, swash plate pump,
closed-loop circuit Drive �� Liebherr variable flow swashplate motor
Max. flow �� 148 l/min. with automatic brake valves
Max. pressure �� 380 bar Transmission �� oversized two speed power shift trans
Hydraulic tank �� 350 l mission with additional creeper speeds
Hydraulic system �� 590 l Travel speed �� 0 – 2,5 km/h (creeper speed)
Hydraulic oil filter �� 2 full flow filters in return line with inte 0 – 5,0 km/h (cross country)
grated fine filter area (5 µm) 0 – 9,0 km/h (creeper speed road)
Hydraulic oil cooler �� compact cooler, consisting of a water 0 – 18,0 km/h (road travel)
cooler, sandwiched with hydraulic oil Axles �� 70 t excavator axles; automatic or operator
cooler, fuel cooler and after-cooler cores controlled front axle oscillation lock
and hydrostatically driven fan Service and
MODE selection �� adjustment of machine performance and holding brakes �� multiple wet discs
the hydraulics via a mode selector to match Parking brake �� multiple wet discs (spring applied –
application pressure released)
ECO �� for especially economical and environ Stabilization �� 4-point outriggers with suspended rocker
mentally friendly operation arm supports
POWER �� for maximum digging power and heavy
duty jobs
LIFT �� for lifting
FINE �� for precision work and lifting through very Attachment
sensitive movements
RPM adjustment �� stepless adjustment of engine output via Type �� high-strength steel plates at highly-
the rpm at each selected mode stressed points for the toughest require
Tool Control (Option) �� ten preadjustable pump flows and pres ments. Complex and stable mountings of
sures for add on tools attachment and cylinders. Unrivalled
strength, even at high loads
Hydraulic cylinders �� Liebherr cylinders with special seal system.
Shock absorption
Hydraulic Controls Pivots �� sealed, low maintenance
Lubrication �� Liebherr semi-automatic central lubrication
Power distribution �� via control valves in single block with inte system
grated safety valves
Flow summation �� to boom and stick
Closed-loop circuit �� for uppercarriage swing drive
Servo circuit
Attachment and
swing �� proportional via joystick levers
Travel �� proportional via foot pedal
Additional functions �� via foot pedals or joystick push buttons
2 A 934 C HD Litronic Machine for Industrial Applications

Dimensions
E A1
D A
C
W H
T4 M T1 B
L B1
U4
Z
V
X
Hydraulic Cab Elevation mm Industrial-Type Straight Boom 7,60 m

A 3060 and Industrial Stick m 5,00 6,00
A1) 3000 V mm 7770 6680
A1 3240 W mm 3200 3200
A11) 3410 X mm 11300 11250
B 3200
B1 5250 Industrial-Type Straight Boom 8,60 m
C 3600 and Industrial Stick m 6,00 7,50
D 3235 V mm 7660 6520
E 3235 W mm 3200 4150
H 3050 X mm 12250 12200
K 1675
L 3200 Industrial-Type Gooseneck Boom 8,60 m
M 1600 and Industrial Stick m 6,00 7,50
Q 390 V mm – 6750
T1 1535 W mm 3500 5050
T4 1385 X mm 12200 12150
U4 6120
Z 6295 Industrial-Type Straight Boom 9,60 m
1) Rigid
and Industrial Stick m 6,00 7,50
cab elevation
V mm – 7370
E = Tail radius
W mm 3200 3800
X mm 13250 13250
Tires 20.5-25
Industrial Stick m 5,00 6,00 7,50
F mm 5350 6350 7850
G mm 1200 1250 1250
P mm 1050 1050 1050
Dimensions are with attachment over steering axle
A 934 C HD Litronic Machine for Industrial Applications 3

ft m
50 15
Kinematic variants 2A/3B
14
45
40
12
3 with industrial stick 5,00 m and grapple model 70 C
35
10
30 9
8
25
7 Operating Weight
20 6
Operating weight includes basic machine A 934 C HD litronic` with
5 4 point outriggers, hydraulic cab elevation, 4 solid tires and industrial
15
4 application with indus trial-type straight boom 7,60 m.
10 3
with grapple model 70 C/1,10 m3 semi-closed tines Weight
5
0 0
-1
-5
-2
1
-10 -3
2
-4
-15
-5
3
-20 -6
4
-7
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 m
45 40 35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0 ft
VarioLiftPlus
Hole A
2A
Hole B 2A
3B
Hole 3 Version 2A
3A
Hole 2
Kinematic Variant 2A: Kinematic Variant 3A:

Lift Capacities

3,0 m 4,5 m 6,0 m 7,5 m 9,0 m 10,5 m 12,0 m 13,5 m 15,0 m 16,5 m
m Undercarriage m
Stabilizers raised
Stabilizers raised
Stabilizers raised
13,5
5,60
Stabilizers raised 11,0* 11,0* 7,9 8,4* 7,1* 7,1*
12,0
7,90
Stabilizers raised 11,4 11,6* 8,1 10,1* 6,0 7,5 5,5 6,5*
10,5
9,42
Stabilizers raised 11,4 11,7* 8,0 10,1* 6,0 7,6 4,6 5,8 4,6 5,8
9,0
10,51
7,5
11,30
6,0
11,84
4,5
12,18
3,0
12,32
1,5
12,28
Stabilizers raised 8,1* 8,1* 8,5 11,2 6,4 8,3 5,0 6,5 4,1 5,3 3,5 4,5
0
12,00
Stabilizers raised 8,3 10,6* 6,2 8,2 5,0 6,5 4,1 5,3 4,1 5,2*
– 1,5
10,60
Stabilizers raised
Stabilizers raised

3,0 m 4,5 m 6,0 m 7,5 m 9,0 m 10,5 m 12,0 m 13,5 m 15,0 m 16,5 m
m Undercarriage m
Stabilizers raised
Stabilizers raised
15,0
4,60
Stabilizers raised 9,1* 9,1* 6,6* 6,6* 6,5* 6,5*
13,5
7,54
Stabilizers raised 8,3 8,9* 6,1 6,6* 5,6* 5,6*
12,0
9,37
Stabilizers raised 8,4 9,4* 6,2 7,8 4,7 5,8* 4,6 5,2*
10,5
10,68
9,0
11,65
7,5
12,37
6,0
12,87
4,5
13,18
3,0
13,31
1,5
13,27
0
13,06
– 1,5
12,11
Stabilizers raised 8,2 9,7* 6,1 8,0* 4,9 6,3 4,3 5,5*
– 3,0
9,91
Stabilizers raised

Lift Capacities

3,0 m 4,5 m 6,0 m 7,5 m 9,0 m 10,5 m 12,0 m 13,5 m 15,0 m 16,5 m
m Undercarriage m
Stabilizers raised
Stabilizers raised
Stabilizers raised
13,5
6,01
12,0
8,19
Stabilizers raised 9,2* 9,2* 8,1 8,5* 6,0 7,5 5,3 6,4*
10,5
9,66
9,0
10,72
7,5
11,48
Stabilizers raised 14,4* 14,4* 13,6* 13,6* 10,5 11,1* 7,5 9,5* 5,7 7,3 4,5 5,8 3,6 4,6
6,0
12,00
4,5
12,31
3,0
12,44
1,5
12,38
0
12,00
– 1,5
10,47
Stabilizers raised
Stabilizers raised

3,0 m 4,5 m 6,0 m 7,5 m 9,0 m 10,5 m 12,0 m 13,5 m 15,0 m 16,5 m
m Undercarriage m
Stabilizers raised
Stabilizers raised
15,0
5,13
13,5
7,88
12,0
9,64
10,5
10,91
9,0
11,85
7,5
12,54
Stabilizers raised 11,5* 11,5* 9,9* 9,9* 7,8 8,7* 5,9 7,5 4,6 5,9 3,7 4,7 3,2 4,1
6,0
13,02
4,5
13,31
3,0
13,42
1,5
13,37
0
13,14
– 1,5
12,07
– 3,0
9,56
Stabilizers raised

ft m
55 17
35 11
10
30 9
25
8 Operating Weight
7
20 6 Operating weight includes basic machine A 934 C HD litronic` with
5
4 point outriggers, hydraulic cab elevation, 4 solid tires and industrial
15 application with industrial-type straight boom 8,60 m.
4
10 3 with grapple model 70 C/1,10 m3 semi-closed tines Weight
1
0 0
-1
-5
-2
-10 -3
1
-4
-15
-5 2
-20 -6 3
-7
-25 4
-8
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 m
55 50 45 40 35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0 ft
VarioLiftPlus
Hole A
2A
Hole B 2A
3B
Hole 3 Version 2A
3A
Hole 2

Lift Capacities

3,0 m 4,5 m 6,0 m 7,5 m 9,0 m 10,5 m 12,0 m 13,5 m 15,0 m 16,5 m
m Undercarriage m
Stabilizers raised
Stabilizers raised
15,0
6,96
Stabilizers raised 9,9* 9,9* 8,2 8,7* 6,0 6,3* 5,7 5,9*
13,5
9,17
12,0
10,72
10,5
11,88
9,0
12,76
Stabilizers raised 11,3 11,4* 8,0 9,6* 6,0 7,5 4,6 5,9 3,6 4,7 2,9 3,8
7,5
13,42
6,0
13,88
4,5
14,16
3,0
14,29
1,5
14,25
0
14,06
Stabilizers raised 5,9* 5,9* 7,5 10,2 5,6 7,5 4,4 5,9 3,6 4,8 3,1 4,1 2,7 3,6*
– 1,5
13,11
– 3,0
10,91
Stabilizers raised

3,0 m 4,5 m 6,0 m 7,5 m 9,0 m 10,5 m 12,0 m 13,5 m 15,0 m 16,5 m
m Undercarriage m
Stabilizers raised
16,5
7,22
15,0
9,60
13,5
11,29
12,0
12,58
Stabilizers raised 6,6 7,4* 5,1 6,3 3,9 5,0 3,0 3,9 3,0 3,8*
10,5
13,58
9,0
14,36
Stabilizers raised 8,5 8,8* 6,3 7,7* 4,9 6,1 3,8 4,9 3,0 3,9 2,4 3,2
7,5
14,95
6,0
15,36
4,5
15,62
3,0
15,73
1,5
15,70
0
15,52
– 1,5
15,01
Stabilizers raised 6,8* 6,8* 7,2 9,9 5,4 7,3 4,2 5,7 3,5 4,7 2,9 3,9 2,5 3,3 2,4 3,3*
– 3,0
13,72
– 4,5
11,18

Lift Capacities

3,0 m 4,5 m 6,0 m 7,5 m 9,0 m 10,5 m 12,0 m 13,5 m 15,0 m 16,5 m
m Undercarriage m
Stabilizers raised
16,5
3,67
15,0
7,36
Stabilizers raised 8,5* 8,5* 7,7* 7,7* 6,0 6,9* 5,4 5,8*
13,5
9,47
12,0
10,97
10,5
12,10
9,0
12,95
Stabilizers raised 9,2* 9,2* 7,9 8,1* 5,9 7,2* 4,6 5,8 3,6 4,7 2,9 3,8 2,8 3,7
7,5
13,58
Stabilizers raised 10,3* 10,3* 12,8* 12,8* 10,3* 10,3* 7,5 8,7* 5,6 7,2 4,4 5,7 3,5 4,6 2,8 3,7 2,6 3,5
6,0
14,03
4,5
14,30
3,0
14,40
1,5
14,35
0
14,14
– 1,5
13,07
– 3,0
10,56
Stabilizers raised

3,0 m 4,5 m 6,0 m 7,5 m 9,0 m 10,5 m 12,0 m 13,5 m 15,0 m 16,5 m
m Undercarriage m
Stabilizers raised
16,5
7,63
15,0
9,91
13,5
11,56
12,0
12,81
10,5
13,79
9,0
14,54
7,5
15,11
6,0
15,51
4,5
15,75
Stabilizers raised 8,1* 8,1* 14,3 15,2* 9,4 11,3* 6,9 8,9 5,2 6,8 4,1 5,4 3,3 4,4 2,7 3,6 2,2 3,0 2,0 2,7
3,0
15,85
1,5
15,80
0
15,61
– 1,5
15,01
– 3,0
13,65
– 4,5
10,77

with Industrial-Type Gooseneck Boom 8,60 m
ft m
17
Attachment Envelope
55
16 Kinematic variant 3D
50 15
45 14
13
40
3 with industrial stick 6,00 m and clamshell model 20 B
12 4 with industrial stick 7,50 m and clamshell model 20 B
35 11
10
30 9
25
8
Operating Weight
7
20 6 Operating weight includes basic machine A 934 C HD litronic` with
5 4 point outriggers, hydraulic cab elevation, 4 solid tires and industrial
15
4 application with indus trial-type gooseneck boom 8,60 m.
10 3 with clamshell model 20 B/1,50 m3 shells for loose material Weight
5
0 0
-1
-5
-2
-10 -3
-4
-15 1
-5
-20 -6 2
-7
-25 3
-8
4
-30 -9
-10
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 m
55 50 45 40 35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0 ft
VarioLiftPlus
with a different working range
Hole D
Hole C
3D
3D
Hole 3 Version 3D
Hole 2
3C
Kinematic Variant 3D: Kinematic Variant 3C:

Increased lift capacities below ground level Altered range curve with additional reach
and when working at large outreach depth, e.g. for unloading from ships

Lift Capacities
with Industrial-Type Gooseneck Boom 8,60 m (Kinematic Variant 3D)

3,0 m 4,5 m 6,0 m 7,5 m 9,0 m 10,5 m 12,0 m 13,5 m 15,0 m 16,5 m
m Undercarriage m
Stabilizers raised
Stabilizers raised
Stabilizers raised
13,5
8,75
Stabilizers raised 6,4 6,4* 4,9 5,1*
12,0
10,36
10,5
11,55
Stabilizers raised 7,0* 7,0* 6,3 6,5* 4,8 6,1* 3,8 4,8 3,5 4,5
9,0
12,44
7,5
13,10
6,0
13,56
Stabilizers raised 14,4* 14,4* 14,5* 14,5* 9,9 10,9* 7,2 8,9* 5,5 7,0 4,3 5,6 3,5 4,5 2,8 3,7 2,7 3,6
4,5
13,84
3,0
13,95
1,5
13,90
0
13,67
– 1,5
13,28
– 3,0
12,66
Stabilizers raised

3,0 m 4,5 m 6,0 m 7,5 m 9,0 m 10,5 m 12,0 m 13,5 m 15,0 m 16,5 m
m Undercarriage m
Stabilizers raised
Stabilizers raised
15,0
9,06
13,5
10,84
Stabilizers raised 5,2 5,3* 4,0 4,1* 3,8* 3,8*
12,0
12,17
10,5
13,19
Stabilizers raised 5,5* 5,5* 5,1 5,3* 4,0 5,1 3,1 4,0 2,9 3,7*
9,0
13,98
7,5
14,57
Stabilizers raised 6,9* 6,9* 6,2 6,3* 4,8 5,8* 3,8 4,8 3,0 3,9 2,4 3,2
6,0
14,98
4,5
15,23
3,0
15,33
1,5
15,28
0
15,08
– 1,5
14,73
– 3,0
14,20
– 4,5
13,18

ft m
60 18
55
40 12
35 11
10
30 9
Operating Weight
8
25
7 Operating weight includes basic machine A 934 C HD litronic` with
20 6 4 point outriggers, hydraulic cab elevation, 4 solid tires and industrial
5 application with industrial-type straight boom 9,60 m.
15
4
with grapple model 70 C/0,80 m3 semi-closed tines Weight
10 3
2
1
0 0
-1
-5
-2
-10 -3 1
-4
-15 2
-5
-20 -6 3
-7
-25 4
-8
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 m
55 50 45 40 35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0 ft
VarioLiftPlus
Hole A
2A
Hole B 2A
3B
Hole 3 Version 2A
3A
Hole 2

Lift Capacities

3,0 m 4,5 m 6,0 m 7,5 m 9,0 m 10,5 m 12,0 m 13,5 m 15,0 m 16,5 m
m Undercarriage m
Stabilizers raised
16,5
6,13
15,0
8,82
13,5
10,64
12,0
12,00
10,5
13,05
9,0
13,85
7,5
14,46
6,0
14,89
4,5
15,15
3,0
15,27
1,5
15,24
0
15,05
Stabilizers raised 6,7 7,4* 5,0 7,0 4,0 5,5 3,3 4,5 2,8 3,8 2,4 3,2 2,2 3,0*
– 1,5
14,11
Stabilizers raised 4,0 5,4* 3,2 4,5 2,8 3,7*
– 3,0
11,91
Stabilizers raised

3,0 m 4,5 m 6,0 m 7,5 m 9,0 m 10,5 m 12,0 m 13,5 m 15,0 m 16,5 m
m Undercarriage m
18,0
6,27
16,5
9,16
15,0
11,13
13,5
12,62
12,0
13,79
10,5
14,71
9,0
15,42
Stabilizers raised 8,3 8,9* 6,1 7,6* 4,7 6,0 3,7 4,7 2,9 3,8 2,3 3,1 2,0 2,7
7,5
15,97
6,0
16,36
Stabilizers raised 20,0* 20,0* 15,3 16,0* 9,9 12,0* 7,1 9,1 5,4 6,9 4,2 5,4 3,3 4,4 2,7 3,6 2,2 3,0 1,8 2,5 1,8 2,4
4,5
16,60
4 pt. outriggers down 20,0* 20,0* 16,0* 16,0* 12,0* 12,0* 9,6* 9,6* 8,0* 8,0* 6,8* 6,8* 5,9* 5,9* 5,2* 5,2* 4,5* 4,5* 3,6* 3,6* 3,6* 3,6*
Stabilizers raised 12,8 13,0* 8,7 11,6 6,4 8,4 4,9 6,5 3,9 5,1 3,1 4,2 2,6 3,5 2,1 2,9 1,7 2,4 1,7 2,4
3,0
16,71
Stabilizers raised 0,5* 0,5* 4,3* 4,3* 7,7 10,5 5,8 7,8 4,5 6,0 3,6 4,8 3,0 4,0 2,4 3,3 2,0 2,8 1,7 2,4 1,7 2,3
1,5
16,68
Stabilizers raised 1,3* 1,3* 3,7* 3,7* 7,0 9,4* 5,3 7,2 4,2 5,7 3,4 4,6 2,8 3,8 2,3 3,2 2,0 2,7 1,7 2,4 1,7 2,4
0
16,51
Stabilizers raised 4,2* 4,2* 6,6 8,1* 5,0 6,9 3,9 5,4 3,2 4,4 2,7 3,7 2,2 3,1 1,9 2,7 1,7 2,4*
– 1,5
16,01
Stabilizers raised 6,4 8,1* 4,8 6,7 3,8 5,3 3,1 4,3 2,6 3,6 2,2 3,1 1,9 2,7*
– 3,0
14,72
Stabilizers raised 4,7 6,0* 3,7 5,1* 3,0 4,3 2,6 3,5* 2,5 3,4*
– 4,5
12,18

Lift Capacities

3,0 m 4,5 m 6,0 m 7,5 m 9,0 m 10,5 m 12,0 m 13,5 m 15,0 m 16,5 m
m Undercarriage m
Stabilizers raised
16,5
6,60
15,0
9,15
13,5
10,91
12,0
12,23
10,5
13,25
9,0
14,04
Stabilizers raised 12,0* 12,0* 9,6* 9,6* 7,6 8,1* 5,7 7,1* 4,4 5,7 3,5 4,5 2,8 3,7 2,3 3,1
7,5
14,62
6,0
15,03
4,5
15,28
3,0
15,38
1,5
15,34
0
15,14
– 1,5
14,06
– 3,0
11,54
Stabilizers raised

3,0 m 4,5 m 6,0 m 7,5 m 9,0 m 10,5 m 12,0 m 13,5 m 15,0 m 16,5 m
m Undercarriage m
18,0
6,77
16,5
9,52
15,0
11,42
13,5
12,87
12,0
14,00
10,5
14,90
9,0
15,60
Stabilizers raised 8,2* 8,2* 7,1* 7,1* 6,1 6,3* 4,7 5,7* 3,7 4,7 2,9 3,8 2,3 3,1 1,9 2,6
7,5
16,13
6,0
16,50
Stabilizers raised 21,0* 21,0* 13,7* 13,7* 9,7 10,4* 7,0 8,4* 5,3 6,8 4,1 5,4 3,3 4,3 2,7 3,6 2,2 2,9 1,8 2,4 1,7 2,4
4,5
16,73
3,0
16,82
1,5
16,78
Stabilizers raised 1,3* 1,3* 3,5* 3,5* 6,8 8,5* 5,2 7,1 4,1 5,6 3,3 4,5 2,7 3,8 2,3 3,2 1,9 2,7 1,6 2,3 1,6 2,3
0
16,60
– 1,5
16,00
– 3,0
14,64
– 4,5
11,74

Choice of Cab Elevation
and Cab Protection
D2
(Parallelogram)
Seite ist rechts 2 mm schmäler

B1 3100 mm
B2 5600 mm
C1 3600 mm
C2 6100 mm
D1 1370 mm
D2 1615 mm
C2 E 3515 mm
B2
The parallelogram cab raiser allows the operator to choose his field of
C1 E view between dimensions B1 and B2. For a transport height lower
B1 than C1 the shell of the cab can be removed. The overall height is
then E.
D2
(Parallelogram)
+ Intermediate Piece 0,35 m
B1 3450 mm
B2 6870 mm
C1 3950 mm
C2 7370 mm
D1 2400 mm
C2 D2 2395 mm
B2 E 3935 mm
The parallelogram cab raiser allows the operator to choose his field of
E view between dimensions B1 and B2. For a transport height lower
C1
B1 than C1 the shell of the cab can be removed. The overall height is
then E.
Grille above Grilles in front

Variety of Tools
Shells for loose material with
Shells for Loose Material Clamshell Model 20 B
Seite ist rechts 15 mm schmäler (Klappseite)

cutting edge (without teeth)
Cutting width of shells mm 1000 1200 1600
Capacity m3 1,30 1,50 2,00
For loose material, specific weight up to t/m3 1,5 1,5 1,5
Weight kg 1355 1415 1550
Multiple Tine Grapples open tines semi-closed tines closed tines

(4 tines) Weight kg 845 1130 1055 1330 1060 1520
(5 tines) Weight kg 1150 1230 1285 1415 1325 1520
(4 tines) Weight kg 1345 1395 1535 1640 1900 2060
Grapple Model 70 C Capacity m3 0,80 1,10 0,80 1,10 0,80 1,10
(5 tines) Weight kg 1485 1590 1705 1860 1950 1995
Crane Hook with Suspension

Max. load t 12,5
Height with suspension mm 930
Weight kg 96
Magnet Devices/Lifting Magnets

Generator kW 13 20
Electromagnets with Suspension
Power kW 8,5 10
Diameter of magnet mm 1300 1400
Height with suspension mm 1100 1100
Weight kg 1350 1830

Equipment
Undercarriage Operator’s Cab
Seite ist rechts 15 mm schmäler (Klappseite)

Two circuit travel brake with accumulator • Storage tray •
Travel motor protection + Displays for engine operating condition •
Outrigger cylinder rod guards + Mechanical hour meters, readable from outside the cab •
Creeper speed electrically switchable from cab • Roof hatch •
New tires • 6-way adjustable seat •
Service free parking brake • Airpressure operator seat with heating and head-rest +
Independent outrigger control + Seat and consoles independently adjustable •
Choice of tires + Extinguisher +
Auto check valve directly on each stabilizer cylinder • Removable customized foot mat •
Proportional power steering • Dome light •
Customized colors + Hydraulic cab elevation +
Two lockable storage boxes • Rigid cab elevation +
Two-speed power shift transmission • Cab heater with defroster •
Cloth hook •
Air conditioning •
Electric cool box +
Uppercarriage Steering wheel adjustable •
Electric fuel tank filler pump + Bullet proof window (fixed installation – can not be opened) +
Maintenance-free swing brake lock • Stereo radio +
Handrails, Non slip surfaces • Preparation for radio installation +
Main switch for electric circuit • Rain hood over front window opening •
Engine hood with lift help • Beacon +
Pedal controlled positioning swing brake • All tinted windows •
Reverse travel warning system + Door with sliding window •
Sound insulation • Optical warning if outriggers are not fully retracted +
Customized colors + Auxiliary heating +
Maintenance-free HD-batteries • Sun shade +
Lockable tool box • Sun roller blind •
Tool kit • Electronic drive away lock +
Wiper/washer •
Cigarette lighter and ashtray •
Additional flood lights +
Hydraulics
Hydraulic tank shut-off valve •
Extra hydr. control for hydr. swivel +
Pressure compensation • Attachment
Hook up for pressure checks • Flood lights •
Pressure storage for controlled lowering of attachments with Hydr. lines for clam operation in sticks •
engine turned off • Industrial-type gooseneck sticks with remote hydraulic pin puller +
Filter with partial micro filteration (5 µm) • Sealed pivots •
Electronic pump regulation • Safety lift hook +
Stepless mode system (ECO) • Liebherr line of clams +
Flow compensation • Liebherr semi-automatic central lubrication system •
Four mixed modes, can also be adjusted • Liebherr fully-automatic central lubrication system +
Full flow micro filtration + Likufix +
Bio degradable hydraulic oil + Safety check valves on hoist cylinder •
Tool Control + Safety check valves on stick cylinder •
Additional hydraulic circuits + Hose quick connection •
Hydraulic or manual quick change tool adapter +
Customized colors +
Special buckets and other tools +
Engine Overload warning device +
Turbo charger • Two way valves for bucket/clam use +
After-cooled • Locking of connections for clam operation +
Sensor controlled engine idling • Cylinders with shock absorber •
Liebherr particle filter +
Unit pump system •
Air filter with pre-cleaner main- and safety element •
• = Standard, + = Option
Options and/or special attachments, supplied by vendors other than Liebherr, are only to be installed with the
knowledge and approval of Liebherr to retain warranty.

Liebherr-Hydraulikbagger GmbH
Liebherrstraße 12, D-88457 Kirchdorf/Iller
S +49 7354 80-0, Fax +49 7354 80-72 94
www.liebherr.com, E-Mail: info.lhb@liebherr.com
Printed in Germany by Typodruck RG-BK LHB/VF 8421027-2-03.09 All illustrations and data may differ from standard equipment. Subject to change without notice.
Seite ist rechts 2 mm schmäler

2 Safety notes, signs
There are certain risks associated with the operation of the machine. These risks
might concern you as the owner, operator or maintenance technician of the machine.
Read the safety notes and instructions in this operating manual carefully and on a
regular basis. Strictly adhere to the safety notes and instructions in order to prevent
dangerous situations and accidents. This applies especially to persons who only
rarely work on or with the machine, e.g. in the context of maintenance work.
In addition to the safety instructions in this manual, always adhere to all safety
regulations applicable at the place of operation. Such regulations might include
statutory regulations or instructions issued by trade associations.
For operation in EU member states, the minimum safety requirements to be met by
the machine owner are laid down in Directive 2009/104/EC.
2.1 Symbols used in this operating manual
Potential dangers in connection with work on or with the machine are labelled with
safety notes and signs as follows: Danger, Caution and Note.
These terms have the following meaning:
Danger!
Warning referring to a danger where there is a high probability of death or serious
injury to operators, unless the prescribed safety measures are taken.
Caution!
Warning relating to dangers that might lead to injury and/or damage to the machine,
unless the prescribed safety measures are taken.
Note!
This symbol accompanies instructions and tips regarding the operation and
maintenance of the equipment. If adhered to, the service life of the machine can be
extended and/or procedures are made easier.
The following symbols are used to guide you through the prescribed procedures:
Identifies a precondition or prerequisite that must be met before the
subsequent procedures can be carried out.
X Identifies a procedure or activity.

ª Identifies the result of a procedure or activity.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Safety notes, signs Operating manual
Proper use
2.2 Proper use
– The hydraulic excavator is a machine equipped with an attachment (e.g. backhoe

bucket, grapple, front shovel) designed to loosen, lift, transport and disperse soil,
stones and other material, whereby the load is normally transported with the
machine being stationary during the process. If the machine is to travel with a
load, special safety measures must be taken (see section "Instructions for safe
work").
– Machines used to lift loads are subject to special safety requirements and must
be equipped with specific safety devices (see section "Load lifting operation").
– Machines used underground (deep mining and tunnel construction) must be
equipped with exhaust gas reducing equipment (e.g. diesel particle filter). Always
comply with the statutory regulations applicable at the location of operation.
– Special tasks such as demolition work and goods handling require special
attachments and possibly also special safety devices. This equipment (e.g. tree
grapple, demolition hammer, concrete shear, etc.) may only be attached to the
machine and used with the explicit consent of and according to the instructions of
the manufacturer of the basic machine.
– Any other use, in particular transportation of persons or working in explosive
atmospheres or contaminated environments is deemed improper. The
manufacturer shall not be liable for any damage arising from such use. The
operator shall be solely responsible for any damage caused by improper use of
the equipment.
– Compliance with the instructions in the operating manual and the inspection and
maintenance schedules is an integral part of proper use.
2.3 Safety instructions
2.3.1 General safety instructions

– Please familiarize yourself with the operating instructions before starting the
machine.
– Please verify that you have read and understood supplemental instructions (this
may concern special options for the machine).
– Only explicitly authorized personnel may operate, maintain or repair the machine.
The legal minimum age must be observed.
– Use only trained or instructed personnel. Clearly define who is responsible for the
operation or set up, maintenance and repair. Reject unsafe instructions by third
parties and/or allow your personnel to reject these. This also applies in regards to
traffic regulations.
– Any person still in training should only operate or work on the machine under the
constant supervision and guidance of an experienced person.

– Check and observe all persons working or operating the machine at least
periodically to ensure that they observe safety instructions and guidelines given
in the operating manual.
– Wear proper work clothing when operating or working on the machine. Avoid
wearing rings, watches, ties, scarves, open jackets or loose clothing. There is a
danger of injury, as these items could get caught or be pulled in.
Wear task-appropriate personal protective equipment at all times.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Operating manual Safety notes, signs
Safety instructions
– Consult the supervisor for any special safety procedures applicable to your job
site.
– Always raise the safety lever before leaving the operator’s seat.
– Keep steps, ladders and handholds (handles) in proper condition. Make
especially sure that they are free of dirt, oil, ice and snow.
NOTE: To ensure that the doors open in all weather conditions, lubricate the
weather strips at least every two months, or more often, if necessary, with talcum
powder or silicon. Lubricate the door hinges and locks regularly.
– When entering or leaving the cab, do not use the steering column, the control
panel or the joysticks as handholds.
– Never jump off the machine, always use the steps, ladders, rails and handles
provided to climb off or on the machine.
– Always face towards the machine when climbing on and off it, and always use the
three points of contact with the machine (all times either two hands and one foot,
or two feet and one hand are in contact with the access system).
– Familiarize yourself with the emergency exit.
– Proceed as described in the operating manual, if no other instructions are
available for maintenance and repairs:
• Place the machine on a solid and level ground and lower the working
attachment to the ground.
• Depressurize the hydraulic system.
• Move all control levers to the neutral position.
• Move the safety levers up prior to leaving the machine.
• Remove the ignition key.
– Before servicing the hydraulic system you must reduce the pressure in the
hydraulic system and tank, as described in this operating manual.
– Secure all loose parts on the machine.
– Never start a machine before completing a thorough walkaround inspection.
Insure that all required safety signs are in place and legible.
– Do not modify, alter or otherwise change any safety-related systems of
components without the specific approval of LIEBHERR.
– Do not stand near the running diesel engine. Persons with a pacemaker must
keep clear of the vicinity of the running diesel engine (minimum distance 50 cm).
– While the diesel engine is running, do not touch the powered components at the
electrical connection of the solenoid valve-controlled injection pumps.
2.3.2 Crushing and burn prevention

– Never work underneath the attachment as long as it is not safely resting on the
ground or properly supported.
– Insure that all load supporting systems are in good repair and rated for the
required load.
– Always wear work gloves when handling wire ropes.
– When working on the attachment, never align bores with your fingers, always use
a suitable alignment tool.
– Keep hands, tools and any other objects away from contact with the cooling fan.
The cooling fan can cause severe injury, objects can be catapulted away or
destroyed, and the fan can be damaged by the objects.
– At or near operating temperature, the engine cooling system is hot and under
pressure. Avoid contact with any components containing coolant. Danger of
severe burns.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Signs on the machine
– Check the coolant level only after the radiator cap on the expansion tank is cool
enough to touch. Turn the cap carefully to relieve the pressure.
– At or near operating temperature, the engine and the hydraulic oil are hot. Do not
allow your skin to come into contact with hot oil or components containing hot oil.
– Always wear safety glasses and protective gloves when handling batteries. Avoid
sparks and naked flames.
– Do not let any assisting personnel hold the attachment, bucket or grapple to assist
in any operation.
– When working on the engine area, make sure that the side doors are properly
secured to remain open during the service operation.
2.3.3 Fire and explosion prevention

– Switch off the diesel engine prior to filling the tank.
– Have skilled personnel immediately repair all defects, such as loose connections,
blown fuses and burned out light bulbs, burned or frayed cables.
– Do not smoke and avoid naked flames when filling the tank or loading the
batteries.
– Always start the diesel engine according to the operating instructions.
– Never store flammable fluids on the machine except in appropriate storage tanks.
– Regularly inspect all lines, hoses and fittings for leaks and damage.
– Repair any leaks immediately and replace damaged components.
– Be certain that all clamps, guards and heat shields are properly installed to
prevent vibration, rubbing and heat build up.
– Do not use cold start aids (ether) near heat sources or naked flames or in
insufficiently ventilated areas.
– Do not use ether containing starting aids to start diesel engines with pre-heat
system or flame glow systems.
– Familiarize yourself with the location and use of fire extinguishers on the machine
as well as the local fire reporting procedures and fire fighting possibilities.
2.4 Signs on the machine
2.4.1 Safety and information signs

The signs refer to specific hazards and accident prevention measures. They contain
information for the operation, maintenance and transportation of the machine as well
as details of machine properties.
Danger!
Non-compliance with safety and other information provided on the signs can result
in serious or even fatal injury and damage to the machine.
X Ensure that all required safety signs are in place and legible.
X Always replace missing and illegible signs without delay.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Fig. 2-1 Position of the signs on the machine
The signs indicate the following:
1: Safety belt
Before starting the machine, put on the safety belt.
2: Operating symbols
Functions of not specifically labelled operating devices.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3: Payload chart
Indicates the permissible lift loads that can be attached to the end of the stick,
depending on its actual extension.
4: Information sign re. Lwa noise level

Indicates the sound power level of the machine in dB(A).
*XX = the value that applies to the machine is indicated on the operator's cab.
5: Steering system
The steering system can only be operated when the vehicle engine is ready for
operation.
6: Operating brake / parking brake

During machine operation, do not simultaneously apply the operating brake and the
parking brake.
The operating brake may only be applied when the machine is in operation. When
exiting the operator's cab, do not use the operating brake as a parking brake.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7: Accident prevention
All safety and accident prevention instructions in the operating manual must be
strictly adhered to.
7: Accident prevention, safety lever

Before leaving the operator seat, tilt the safety lever upwards.
7: Accident prevention, attachment

The working attachment can reach the operator's cab! Proceed with extreme caution
when retracting the attachment.
8: Lubrication chart
Provides information on work to be carried out in connection with lubricants and
specifies the test, lubrication and change intervals.
9: Loading and tie-down points

Indicates the position of the loading and tie-down points and the respective weight of
the machine.
The values are maximum values. The actual values might deviate from those
indicated on the signs.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
10: Emergency exit through rear window

Pull the handle at the inside of the rear window to remove the rubber insert. Push the
rear window outwards.
11: Service manual

Indicates the screw connections that can only be properly assembled and fastened
by referring to the factory instructions. Improper assembly and fastening can impair
the operational safety of the equipment and cause accidents.
Always refer to the respective documentation (LIEBHERR installation instructions or
service manual).
These screw connections can only be released by LIEBHERR service technicians or
authorised specialist workshops.
12: Point of danger
Risk of injury!
Do not stand inside the danger area of the machine while it is in operation.
13: Tie-down point

Indicates tie-down points.
The use of the tie-down points depends on the chosen method of transport. For more
information, refer to chapter "Transport".
14: Jump-starting
When jump-starting the machine, strictly adhere to the instructions in the operating
manual.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
15: Lubrication chart for diesel engine

Contains instructions regarding the maintenance of the diesel engine.
16: Attachment point for lifting

Indicates attachment points for lifting.
The use of the lifting points depends on the chosen method of transport. For more
information, refer to chapter "Transport".
17: Prohibition sign

It is prohibited to access the marked area.
18: Engine shut-down

Before opening the bonnet, shut down the engine.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Fig. 2-2 Location of signs (US version)
The US version deviates somewhat from the standard design:

No. Sign No. Sign
1 2
copyright by
2 - 10 A 934 C Litronic / A 934 C HD Litronic / 11140237
MJFCIFSS
No. Sign No. Sign
3 4
5 6
7 8
9 10
11 12
13 14
copyright by
A 934 C Litronic / A 934 C HD Litronic / 11140237 2 - 11
MJFCIFSS
No. Sign No. Sign
15 16
17 18
19 20
2.4.2 ID tag
The machine and its components (e.g. diesel engine, gearbox, pumps) are equipped
with ID tags. The ID tags indicate the ID numbers of the components.

The ID tag of the machine is located at the front of the uppercarriage. It contains the
following information:
– Vehicle ID no.
– Type
– Year of manufacture
– Motor output
– Max. speed
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
– Permissible total weight

– Permissible front axle load
– Permissible rear axle load
Fig. 2-3 ID tag of the machine
The US ID tag contains the following information:

– Model no.
– Vehicle ID
Fig. 2-4 Type ID of the machine (US version)

copyright by
MJFCIFSS
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3 Control, operation
3.1 Operating and control elements
3.1.1 Overview of operator's platform
Fig. 3-1 Operator's platform
1 Operator seat 2 Heating and air-conditioning system

3 Safety lever of servo control 4 Horn
5 Heating air outlet 6 Ignition switch
7 Radio 8 Operating hours counter
9 Control console - emergency
operation
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Control, operation Operating manual
Operating and control elements
Fig. 3-2 Operator's platform as seen from the operator
1 Left joystick 2 Push buttons for special functions*

3 Steering wheel 4 Indicator lever
5 Adjustable steering column 6 Operation of attachment, additional
functions*
7 Positioning slewing brake* 8 Operating brake
9 Travelling pedal 10 Monitoring display
11 Keyboard 12 Right joystick
13 Warning light system 14 Support actuation
15 Switch / oscillating axle support 16 Cigarette lighter, 24 V socket

automatic
* optional equipment
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Operating manual Control, operation
3.1.2 Keypad
Fig. 3-3 Keypad
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
S10 – Attachment headlight, roof light

The switch is assigned several functions that are operated with repeat actuation:
– 1. Attachment light on.
– 2. Attachment light off.
– 3. Attachment light and roof light on.
– 4. Attachment light and roof light off.
S11 - Windscreen washer system
Windscreen washing solution is sprayed onto the window while the windscreen wiper
is on.
S14 - Windscreen wiper

– 1. Windscreen wiper is on (interval mode)
– 2. Continuous operation
– 3. Windscreen wipers are switched off.
S16 - Parking brake
The parking brake ensures that the machine cannot roll away. When shutting down
and exiting the machine, always apply the parking brake. While working with the
machine, the parking brake must be released and the machine must be slowed down
and kept in its position by the working brake (operated with foot pedal).
S17 - Slewing gear brake
Applies/releases the mechanical slewing gear brake.
May only be used when the uppercarriage is not in motion.
S18 - Overload warning system (optional equipment)
The overload warning system warns the machine operator with a visual signal
(screen icon) and an acoustic signal (buzzer sound) when the permissible maximum
load is reached. The warning signal should ensure that the permissible load is not
inadvertently exceeded. In the event of a warning signal, reduce the extension of the
attachment or lower the load to the ground without increasing the extension.
S19 - Release auxiliary function (grapple rotator)
The control console allows operators to activate the rotators of the working tools (e.g.
grapple), the quick-change adapters and similar functions.
S20 - Idle automatic

The idle automatic function automatically reduces the engine speed without
actuation of the joystick or the travel pedal, saving fuel and reducing noise. By
touching the joystick or the pedals, the engine speed returns to the initial level.
S21 - Creeper speed
In creeper speed mode, the machine can be driven with improved traction over
slopes and difficult terrain. The creep speed may only be selected when the machine
is standing still.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
S22 - Parking light, dipped light

– 1. Parking light and rear light on
– 2. Dipped light and rear light on
– 3. The lighting system is off
S35 - Servo steering
The equipment and attachments can only be operated when the servo control is
activated.
S36 - Special function 1 (optional equipment)

Assignment and activation depend on kit.



S41 - Beacon (optional equipment)

Activates the beacon.
S42 - First gear, gear switching

The transmission can be operated at two speeds. The first gear is selected with the
switch. If the switch is not actuated, the machine is automatically operated in second
gear.
S85 - No function
S85 - Grab control

The grab control improves the control of the equipment during grapple operation. It
limits the hydraulic pressure and thus the clamping forces (closing forces) of the
grapple. This means that there is more pressure available for other functions.
The grab control is not suitable for loads that can only be held by the grapple when
the maximum clamping force is applied.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
S86 - Power selection (mode)

Four different modes can be selected by pressing the switch. The active mode is
indicated by the letter below the LED.
– L: LIFT mode (sensitive lifting of loads)
– F: FINE mode (precision operation)
– E: ECO mode (economical operation)
– P: POWER mode
P4 - Display of engine speed
Indicates the preselected motor engine speed (10 speeds).
S228 - Increase speed

Increases the nominal speed of the diesel engine.
S229 - Reduce speed

Reduces the nominal speed of the diesel engine.
S354- Super Finish (flow reduction)

With the Super Finish function, the movement of the attachment can be slowed
down, so that tasks can be carried out with greater precision. The function is based
on flow reduction.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.1.3 Monitoring screen
Fig. 3-4 Monitoring screen
A Analog-value display H24 Indicator light, steering

B Indicator display P2 Coolant temperature indicator
C Main screen P2.1 Indicator when coolant
temperature in red area
D Menu control, screen P3 Fuel level display
H2 Indicator light, engine oil pressure P3.1 Indicator that fuel level is in red
area
H12 Battery indicator light S349 Back button
H19 Indicator light for vehicle S350 Down button
indicators
H20 Indicator light, parking brake S351 Up button
H23 Indicator light, service brake S352 Menu button

reservoir pressure
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.1.3.1 Area A: Monitoring the diesel engine
P2 –Diesel engine coolant temperature display

The indicator must be in the green area when the machine is being operated.
In the event of overheating (above 98 ºC), the red LEDs P2.1 at the end of indicator
P2 will flash.
The buzzer in the cab will also sound.
X Stop working as soon as possible.
X Allow the engine to continue idling high.
The alarm warning lasts longer than 60 seconds.
X Immediately bring the engine to a low idle.
X Allow the engine to idle for another 3 to 5 minutes.
X Switch off the engine.
X Find and rectify the cause of the problem.
P3 – Fuel level display
The LEDs illuminated in the display indicate the amount of fuel remaining in the tank.
When the red LEDs P3.1 are lit, a reserve quantity of 100 litres is still in the tank.
H2 – Indicator light, low engine oil pressure
The indicator light illuminates if the engine oil pressure drops below a given value
when the machine is running.
The buzzer in the cab will also sound.
When this indicator light illuminates, the error will be saved as error code E501.
H12 – Indicator light, battery
The indicator light illuminates if the ignition key is turned to the contact position.
The indicator light goes out as soon as the engine is started.
During operation this indicator light is lit if the V-belt alternator or electrical charging
system is defective.
X Allow the engine to idle for approximately another 5 seconds.
X Rectify the error.
H19 – Indicator light, vehicle indicator lamps
The indicator light lights up if the turn signal switch and the hazard warning system
are actuated.
H20 – Indicator light, parking brake
The indicator light illuminates if the parking brake is engaged (S16) or if the parking
brake release pressure is too low.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
H23 – Indicator light, reservoir pressure (service brake)

The indicator light illuminates if the reservoir pressure is too low. The brakes may not
function correctly.
When this indicator light illuminates, the error will be saved as error code E510.
X Bring the machine to a stop.
X Push the safety lever up.
X Check the brake system.
H24 – Indicator light, steering
No function
3.1.3.2 Area B: Screen menu control
Fig. 3-5 Screen menu control
The screen can be operated using the following 4 buttons:

– S349: Back
– S350: Down
– S351: Up
– S352: Menu*
* = Change from main to submenus
These buttons are used to jump from the operator menu to the submenus or to move
from page to page.
3.1.3.3 Area C: Screen
To change the screen contrast:

X Simultaneously press button Menu and arrow button Up (higher contrast) or
Down (lower contrast).
ª The set value will be saved.
To alter the brightness of the main screen:

X Simultaneously press button Back and arrow button Up (brighter) or Down
(darker).
ª The set value will be saved.
Note!
A light sensor built into the top left of the monitoring screen controls the illumination
of the main screen depending on the ambient brightness. Fine adjustment of these
basic settings is performed using the buttons. Illumination will be automatically
reduced in conditions of low ambient light.
To change the brightness and contrast settings to the factory-default setting:

X Turn off the ignition.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
X Press and hold the Up and Down buttons simultaneously.

X Turn on the ignition again.
X Release the buttons once the automatic check has completed.
3.1.4 Main screen
Fig. 3-6 Display: main screen
SY Time / warning symbols EC Error codes

INF Information symbols TI Total operating hours, daily counter, current
tool (Tool Control)
The "Main screen" menu serves as the main source of information of the machine
operator. It is automatically displayed when the ignition is switched on. The menu
shows operating data and other information in the form of text or symbols and allows
the operator to access the operator' menu.
Field SY
This section shows the time and warning symbols. These symbols indicate
unfavourable operating statuses and improperly locked quick-change adapter
systems.
If the system needs to display more than 2 warning symbols, the clock is not
displayed. If more than 4 warning symbols are to be displayed, they are moved
across the screen from left to right by one symbol every 10 seconds.
Field EC
This section shows error codes* (E xxx) of pending electrical errors (e.g. line faults,
sensor errors).
If the operator has called up a different menu while such an error occurred, the
system automatically returns to the main screen. Depending on the type of the error
and its level of urgency, the buzzer emits a continuous signal or a sequence of short
signals.
Certain error codes are accompanied by warning symbols. For a description of the
error codes and warning symbols, see chapter "Malfunctions - error code list".
The main screen can show maximum 7 error codes at the same time. If there are
more than 7 faults or errors, an arrow is displayed beside the error code field,
indicating that there are more codes outside the current display range.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
X Press the Up or Down button.

ª The display scrolls through the list in the selected direction.
Danger!
If the indicated error or fault is not eliminated immediately, there is a danger persons
might be injured or equipment becomes damaged.
X Make sure that all faults are dealt with without delay.
Acknowledging errors:
When an error code is displayed, the error acknowledgment symbol is shown in the
INF field.
X Press the Back button.
ª The error message is acknowledged and stored.
ª The buzzer is off.
Field INF
This section shows information symbols. They indicate operating statuses and
events that occurred during operation and are relevant for the further operation of the
machine.
If more than 3 information symbols are to be displayed, they are moved across the
screen from left to right by one symbol every 10 seconds.
Field TI
This section shows the operating hours of the machine, the daily operating hours
counter and the selected working tool.
The ® symbol indicates that an optional piece of equipment or a working tool with
flow reduction is in operation.
3.1.5 Information symbols on the main screen
Symbol Description
Preheating
This symbol is displayed during preheating, indicating to the operator that the diesel engine
must only be started after preheating is completed.
End of preheating
This symbol is displayed when preheating is completed. It remains visible for approx. 2
seconds on the screen and indicates to the operator that the diesel engine can now be
started.
Forward travel
This symbol is displayed, if travelling direction "forward" is selected.
Reverse travel
This symbol is displayed, if travelling direction "reverse" is selected.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Symbol Description
Oscillating axle locking device

This symbol indicates that the oscillating axle is locked.
Automatic oscillating axle locking

This symbol indicates that the oscillating axle is automatically locked.
Service interval indication

This symbol is displayed for a short period prior to starting the ignition, if a service is due.
Acknowledge error
This symbol is displayed if a machine fault or error occurred. It is accompanied by a buzzer
signal. To acknowledge the error and switch off the buzzer signal, press the button Back .
Overload warning system*

This symbol is displayed, if the overload warning system * is switched on and the maximum
permissible load of the machine is reached.
It indicates to the operator that the load must be reduced.
No overload warning system

This symbol is displayed, if the operator attempts to switch on the overload warning
system* in a machine that is not equipped with this function.
It indicates to the operator that the machine does not feature an overload warning system.
Outrigger monitoring system*

This symbol is displayed if one or more of the outrigger supports are not fully retracted.
Stick cylinder shut-down

Shut-down point reached when stick is being retracted.
Overriding stick cylinder shut-down function

The shut-down point for retracting is overridden and the industrial stick can be retracted
without restrictions.

Shut-down point reached when stick is being extended.

The shut-down point for extending is overridden. and the industrial stick can be extended
without restrictions.
Emergency operation of diesel engine

This symbol is displayed if the diesel engine is run in emergency mode.
It indicates that, in emergency mode, the speed can be adjusted with an additional switch.
The machine must only be operated in emergency mode for limited periods only.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Symbol Description
Emergency operation of control devices: Danger

This symbol is displayed if the emergency control mode is activated.
It indicates that the control system is set to emergency mode. The machine can thus not
be operated as normal, and there is an increased risk of accidents.
The machine must only be operated in emergency control mode for a limited period of time
and by operating personnel who know how to operate the affected functions.
Emergency operation of control, brake

It indicates that the parking and slewing gear brakes are in emergency mode and cannot
be operated through the normally used switches.
Emergency operation of servo control

It indicates that the servo control cannot be operated through the normally used switch.
3.1.6 Operator's menu
Changing to operator's menu:
Fig. 3-7 Main screen
To change to the operator's menu, you must first call up the main screen.
X Press the Menu button on the main screen.
ª The operator's menu is displayed.
ª The list of the accessible submenus is indicated by symbols.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Fig. 3-8 Operator's menu
Scrolling through the operator's menu:

X Press the arrow buttons UP and/or DOWN.
ª The preceding and/or subsequent submenu is displayed on a black
background.
Depending on the equipment of the machine, there might be more menus in addition
to the above listed. These can be accessed by scrolling to the bottom of the screen.
Select a menu:
The menu showing a black background is selected.
X Press the Menu button.
ª The submenu of the selected function is displayed.
X Press the BACK button.
ª The submenu is closed.
Symbol Description
Resetting of daily operating hours counter
Fine adjustment for rotating grapple (optional equipment)
Confirmation of service interval
Tool Control – selection of settings for working tool (optional

equipment)
Operating hours, machine data

Status of hydraulic pumps and electrical inputs/outputs
Detected and saved errors
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Symbol Description
Time
Electronic stick cylinder shut-down (optional equipment)
Automatic central lubrication system mode (optional

equipment)
Purge mode
Starting diesel engine in PURGE mode
Reset menu for daily operating hours counter
Fig. 3-9 Resetting the daily operating hours counter
Use this menu to reset the daily operating hours counter.

X Press the UP button.
ª Option OK is not stricken through and is highlighted in black.
ª The operating hours counter is reset.
ª The UP and DOWN buttons and the Menu symbol are no longer visible.
Fine adjustment menu for rotating grapple

This menu is available in machines equipped with mini joystick control (optional
equipment). On the menu page, the maximum achievable speed of the "rotate
grapple" function can be adjusted.
The function is used to rotate grapples or adjust other attachment tools.
Note!
After fine adjustment: Before resuming work, check the response of the machine to
the control movements. Familiarise yourself with the operation of the control
devices at the modified settings.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Fig. 3-10 Fine adjustment menu for rotating grapple
The bar indicator indicates the maximum achievable speed of the "rotate grapple"
function. The speed can be set to slow (min) or fast (max).
The higher the chosen value, the faster the working tool is moved when the mini
joystick is operated. If a high value (bar near "max") is selected, the attachment tool
is moved at high speed, even if the mini joystick is only moved a short distance. We
recommend choosing low to medium values.
The settings remain permanently activated and can only be disabled or modified in
the menu.
X Press the UP or DOWN arrow button to select the desired speed.
ª The settings are saved.
Alternatively
X Press the Menu button again.
ª The menu page is displayed.
ª The settings are saved.
Menu: Service interval confirmation
Fig. 3-11 Service interval menu

This menu provides information concerning scheduled service checks. It also allows
for the confirmation of completed services. The current operating hours (e.g.
"478 Hrs") are displayed together with the scheduled service interval (e.g.
"500 Hrs").
The service can be completed earliest 50 operating hours before it is due.
As soon as the pre-set operating hours are reached, the operator is requested to
indicate whether the service tasks have been completed.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Service has been carried out:

X Press the UP button.
ª The OK symbol is not stricken through and is highlighted in black.
ª The service is confirmed to have been completed at the current operating
hours.
Service has not been carried out:
Tool Control menu -

Selection of working tool settings
This menu is used to assign pre-set pressure and flow reductions to the working tools
(activation of foot pedals, e.g. for hydraulic hammer or grapple).
Caution!
A
Incorrect pressure or flow reduction settings may result in damage to the working
tool (e.g. hydraulic hammer) or impair its functions (e.g. mill).
Fig. 3-12 Tool Control menu
EV1 = oil volume 1 EV2 = oil volume 2 (from A 934 B LI)

EV6 = pressure
The currently activated option is highlighted by a black background. To select a

different option, move the arrow and press the Menu button.
In the example (see Fig. 3-12) option 3 is initially activated.
X Press the UP or DOWN button.
ª A different pre-defined option (1 - 10) can be selected (e.g. if the working
attachment has been changed).
ª Your selection is confirmed.

ª The selected option is activated, and the symbol is highlighted by a black
background (in the example: option 1).
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
To exit the submenu:

ª In the main menu, the selected working tool is shown (e.g. "Option 1"), and the
selected pressure and flow combination is available.
ª The working tool is now operated at reduced oil pressure / reduced flow rate.
Fig. 3-13 Main screen, display of selected working tool
1 Selected option 2 The symbol "R" is displayed only, if the

(attachment) attachment is operated with pressure / flow
reduction.
Note!
On request, LIEBHERR and the customer service department will label the options
with the name of the associated tool, e.g. "hammer" or "grapple".
Menu: Operating hours and machine data

This menu consists of 4 pages and provides information regarding the operating
hours of the individual units, processes, operating modes and machine data.
X Repeatedly press the Menu button until the desired page is displayed.
Fig. 3-14 Engine operating hours menu
Page 1 indicates the operating hours of:

– Diesel engine in mode "P"
– Diesel engine in mode "E"
– Diesel engine in mode "F"
– Diesel engine in mode "L"
– Diesel engine at maximum nominal speed H
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
– Diesel engine at low idle speed L

– Diesel engine in manual speed adjustment mode
Fig. 3-15 Machine movement hours menu

– Attachment movements controlled by means of joysticks
– Travel movement controlled by means of the travel pedal in creeper and fast gear
– Swivelling movement of the slewing gear (no activation from model A 934)
– Activated additional equipment controlled with foot pedals
Fig. 3-16 Technical data
Page 4 provides information regarding machine data:

– typ, serie: Excavator model with type and serial number
– ver: Software version (machine and diesel engine)
– volt: Current operating voltage (V)
The "nom" and "hours" fields are not used in this machine.
To exit the menu:

ª The display returns to the operator's menu.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Menu: Status of hydraulic pumps and electrical inputs/outputs
Fig. 3-17 Pressure and flow reduction currents menu
X Repeatedly press the Menu button until the desired page is displayed.
Page 1 shows the signals of the activated flow and pressure reductions.
In the example shown here, the signals of one working tool are shown, which is
saved with the name "Option 1" (for the adjustment of the working tool settings, see
Tool Control menu).
For the consumer used here, an oil flow rate (EV1) is reduced to 80 %, while the
pressure (EV6) is reduced to 75 %.
If several reductions are activated simultaneously, the smallest value is relevant.
When a consumer with a set reduction is activated, the ® symbol is displayed on the
main screen (if enabled).
Fig. 3-18 Power control solenoid and fan speed currents menu
Page 2 shows the current of the power control solenoid.

Page 3 shows the current of the proportional valve EV5 for the control of the speed
of the hydrostatic fan drive.
Fig. 3-19 Slewing gear current
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Page 4 shows the current of the slewing gear control.
Fig. 3-20 Electrical inputs
Fig. 3-21 Electrical inputs
Pages 5 to 8 provide an overview of the status of the various electrical inputs.

" " indicates that the input is not activated.
" " indicates that the input is activated.
"NC" below the terminal designation indicates that the respective input is deactivated
via the software.
M4 / Time (or B19 / Time) refers to the set delay times for the interval function of the
windscreen wipers or the idle automatic.
To exit the menu:

Menu: errors (operating errors and electrical system errors)

Fig. 3-22 Errors menu
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
This menu offers 3 choices for selection:

– Select list Exxx to obtain a list of the machine errors detected by sensor devices.
– Select list E-elec. to obtain a list of the electrical wire faults of the LCD display
stored during operation.
– Select list S-Exxx to obtain a list of the machine errors displayed when the
service plug is connected.
To select the error type:

X Press the UP and/or DOWN buttons.
ª The preceding or next error type is highlighted in black.
ª The submenu highlighted in black is displayed.
ª When more than 6 error codes are shown, press the UP and DOWN buttons
to scroll through the list.
Machine errors list Exxx:
Fig. 3-23 Error list (left) and occurrence of errors (right) menu
X Select list Exxx.

ª The first page of the submenu is displayed.
The first screen shows all errors with the respective error code.
X Press the UP or DOWN button to select the desired error code.
ª The second page of the submenu is displayed.
The second page shows the operating hours and the duration of the first and last ten
occurrences of the selected error.
ª The first page of the submenu is displayed.
X Press the BACK button again to select a different error type. Alternatively, press
the UP or DOWN button to select a new error code.
s*: Error was announced by a buzzer signal and confirmed by the operator with
pressing the BACK button. The duration is indicated in seconds.
m*: Error was announced by a buzzer signal and confirmed by the operator with
pressing the BACK button. The duration is indicated in minutes.
Note!
Menu list Exxx shows only operating errors assigned the E5xx error code.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Wire fault list E-elec.:
Fig. 3-24 Occurrence of electrical faults (left) and fault statistics (right)
X Select list E-elec.

ª The submenu is displayed.
It contains a list of all electrical faults with codes.
The "Test" column shows the number of faults that have occurred since the last reset
of the list.
The figure in the "reset test at x Hrs" field (e. g. 12 Hrs) indicates the time at which
the "Test" column was last deleted.
ª Select a different fault type, if required.
Other error list S-Exxx:
Fig. 3-25 Service operation error list menu
This menu shows additional information when the service plug is connected to the
machine.
To exit the menu:

X Repeatedly press the Menu button until the operator's menu is displayed.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Menu: Time
Fig. 3-26 Adjusting the time settings
This menu is used to adjust the time settings. When the menu is called up, the right
digit of the time is highlighted.
X To adjust the time, press the UP or DOWN button.
ª The next figure to the left is highlighted.
X Repeat the above procedure to adjust all digits of the time display.
ª The new time is confirmed, and the operator's menu is displayed.
Menu: Stick cylinder shut-down (optional equipment)

This menu is available in machines equipped with an electronic stick cylinder shut-
down system.
When the boom is moved, it can reach great heights and outreaches. The stick with
attached load might collide with the operator's cab or impact on other objects.
There is even a risk of collision with the operator's cab or the object, which would
likely result in injury to the operator, and damage to the working attachment or the
attached load.
In order to assist the machine operator, the range of movement of the stick is limited
by the electronic stick cylinder shut-down system.
The movement range of the stick cylinder is determined by two shut-down points that
can be adjusted through the operator's menu. The shut-down points of the stick and
the boom settings determine the reach of the working attachment.
Danger!
While the settings are made in the "stick cylinder shut-down" menu, the stick can
be moved freely and without limits in all directions. Risk of accident!
X Proceed with great care when moving the stick during the adjustment.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Fig. 3-27 Shut-down points: Retracting stick (min), extending stick (max)
Safety distance (distance between the working attachment and the operator's cab or
objects in the vicinity of the machine): min. 1.5 m.
Adjust the stick cylinder shut-down function in such a way that there is a sufficient
safety distance, even if the working tool is oscillating or if shut-down is delayed.
Fig. 3-28 Menu: Stick cylinder shut-down
Note!
X When adjusting the shut-down points, observe the following:
The control system determines the stick position based on decimal measurements.
The menu does therefore not indicate angle values. The stick position is indicated
by a value (value) that is not directly related to a real measurement.
The value increases as the stick is extended and decreases as the stick is retracted.
Setting the shut-down point for retraction:

Fig. 3-29 Menu: Shut-down point for retraction
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
X Move the elevating operator's cab (optional equipment) to its most forward
extended position.
X Move the boom upwards to the stop.
X Retract the stick to the desired shut-down point.
X Press the UP or DOWN arrow button to select the shut-down point for retraction
(min. limit).
ª The teach min. position menu is displayed.
ª The shut-down point min. limit (in example: 85) and the position of the stick
act. value (in example: 93) are displayed.
ª The new value is saved (store min. value).
ª The shut-down point min. limit now corresponds to the position of the stick
act. value.
Setting the shut-down point for extension:
Fig. 3-30 Menu: Shut-down point for extension
X Extend the stick to the desired shut-down point.

X Press the UP or DOWN arrow button to select the shut-down point for extension
(max. limit).
ª The teach max. position menu is displayed.
ª The shut-down point max. limit (in example: 177) and the position of the stick
act. value (in example: 160) are displayed.
ª The new value is saved (store max. value).
ª The shut-down point max. limit corresponds now to the position of the stick
act. value.
Note!
The menu options teach min. position and teach max. position cease to be
displayed 15 seconds after the last actuation of a button. If the new shut-down
points are not confirmed within this time, the previously set settings remain valid.
To exit the menu:

copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Menu: automatic central lubrication system (optional equipment)

This menu is only available in machines that are equipped with an automatic central
lubrication system.
It allows for the adjustment of the automatic lubrication, based on the actual use of
the machine. The amount of applied grease is determined by the selected mode.
There are 3 different modes:
Mode Use Lubrication
H Heavy-duty use (Heavy duty) Large amount of

grease
N Normal use (Normal duty) Medium amount of

grease
L Light use (Light duty) Small amount of

grease
The currently selected mode is highlighted.
Fig. 3-31 Automatic central lubrication menu
Selecting mode
X Press the UP or DOWN button.
ª The selection is blacked out (H, N or L).
ª The arrow denotes the new mode selected.
To exit the menu:

Menu: Purge mode

This menu is only displayed when the diesel engine is shut down. It can be used to
start the diesel engine in purge mode.
This is necessary when the fuel tank has been driven empty, or if the fuel system has
been emptied.
First bleed the empty fuel system manually. Some air remains however in the fuel
high pressure system. This air can only escape when the diesel engine is started.
The purge mode assists this process. The fuel high pressure system is automatically
bled, so that the diesel engine starts better.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Control
Fig. 3-32 Purge menu

ª The purge mode is activated (purge = ON)
X Start the diesel engine. For detailed instructions, see chapter "Fuel system
maintenance".
3.2 Control
3.2.1 Entering and exiting the operator's cab
Caution!
Risk of injury when operator's cab is entered or exited without due regard to the
safety instructions!
X When entering and exiting the operator's cab, ensure that the safety lever is in
its top position.
X Always access and descend from the machine using the provided climbing aids.
X Ensure that your body is resting on at least 3 points: Hold on to the machine with
both hands when raising a foot, and stand on both feet when letting go with one
hand.
X Do not use operating elements as handles.
X Never jump from the machine.
Fig. 3-33 Overview of operator's cab options
A Elevating operator's cab, with catwalk
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Control
B Elevating operator's cab, without catwalk

C Operator's cab with elevation mechanism
3.2.1.1 Mounting, descending
Option A
Fig. 3-34 A: Elevating operator's cab, with catwalk
Operator's cab is fully lowered.

X Position the uppercarriage in travel direction (i.e. parallel to the undercarriage).
X Mount the machine/descend from the machine facing it.
Option B
Fig. 3-35 B: Elevating operator's cab
The access to the operator's cab B depends on the design of the undercarriage.
Operator's cab is fully lowered.
X Access ladder: If there is no foot step 2, swivel the uppercarriage by approx. 45 °
to the right and use the access ladder 1.
X Foot step: Position the uppercarriage above the oscillating axle in travel
direction (i.e. parallel to the undercarriage) and use the foot step 2.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Control
Option C
Fig. 3-36 C :Operator's cab with elevation mechanism
X Position the uppercarriage in travel direction (i.e. parallel to the undercarriage).

3.2.1.2 Accessing, exiting
Option A
Fig. 3-37 A: Operator's cab with catwalk
1 Door handle 3 Inside door handle 5 Railing

2 Locking mechanism 4 Lever of locking
mechanism
Entering cab:
X Press the lock at the door handle 1 and open the door.
X Always enter the cab facing the machine, and sit down on the operator seat.
X Close the door.
X If necessary, adjust the operator seat and steering column.
To keep the door open:

X Tilt up the railing 5 of the catwalk.
X Swivel the door back by 180° and secure it with the locking mechanism 2.
X Tilt up the railing 5 of the catwalk and secure it.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Control
Exiting cab:
X Shut down the machine and push the safety lever upwards.
X Push down the door handle 3 at the door lock.
X Open the door and exit the cab.
X Close the door.
Releasing door locking mechanism:

The door is secured with the locking mechanism 2.
X Tilt up the railing 5 of the catwalk.
X Move the lever 4 beside the operator's cab frame outwards.
ª The door is now released.
X Close the door.
X Tilt up the railing 5 of the catwalk and secure it.
Option B and C
Fig. 3-38 B and C: Operator's cab without catwalk
1 Door handle 2 Locking mechanism

3 Inside door handle 4 Lever of locking mechanism
Entering cab:
X Press the lock at the door 1 and open the door.
X If you wish to leave the door open, open it fully (swivel by 180° backwards) and
secure it with the locking mechanism 2.
X Always enter the cab facing the machine, and sit down on the operator seat.
X If necessary, adjust the operator seat and steering column.
Exiting cab:
X Shut down the machine and push the safety lever upwards.
X Push down the door handle 3 at the door lock.
X Open the door fully and secure it with the locking mechanism 2.
X Face the machine when descending from it.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Control
Releasing door locking mechanism:

The door is secured with the locking mechanism 2.
X Move the lever 4 beside the operator's cab frame outwards.
ª The door is now released.
X Close the door.
3.2.2 Adjusting vertical position of the operator's cab (optional

equipment)
The height of the operator's cab can be adjusted steplessly.
Danger!
Risk of collision of elevated operator's cab with obstacles!
There is a risk of injury, if the elevated cab's paths of travel are obstructed or
inclined. The stability of the machine might be compromised when the operator's
cab is lifted.
X Do not move the machine while the operator's cab is elevated, and if the paths
of travel are obstructed or inclined.
X Adjust the cab height only when the machine is standing still.
X During the adjusting procedure, ensure that no persons are standing in the
danger area of the machine.
Danger!
If the operator's cab is inadvertently lowered, there is a serious risk of injury or even
death.
X Familiarise yourself with the emergency operating devices of the cab so that you
can take appropriate measures, if the need arises.
X Ensure that no persons are standing in the danger area of the cab (i.e. under it).
X Keep a safe distance to moving parts while the operator's cab is being lowered.
Danger!
There is an increased risk of injury when repair and maintenance work is to be
carried out while the operator's cab is elevated.
X If at all possible, carry out such work when the operator's cab is lowered.
X If it is necessary to carry out work on the elevated cab, prop it up with suitable
supports.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Control
Fig. 3-39 Height adjustment of the operator's cab
The machine is in ready mode.

The engine is running.
The safety lever is moved down.
The servo control is active.
X Press the UP or DOWN button to lift a or lower b operator's cab.
3.2.3 Emergency lowering of the operator's cab

In the event of a failure of the diesel engine or the control system of the elevating
operator's cab, it can be lowered manually by releasing the operating pressure.
Emergency lowering of the operator's cab:
Fig. 3-40 Emergency lowering valve at cab base
X Move the lever 1 to position b.

ª The operator's cab is gradually lowered as long as the lever is held in position
b.
Emergency lowering from outside the operator's cab:
Danger!
Risk of injury from crushing when operator's cab is lowered!
X When lowering the operator's cab, ensure that no persons are standing in the
danger area of the lift frame and keep a safe distance from all moving parts.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Control
Fig. 3-41 Emergency lowering valve on lift frame
X Move the lever 1 to position b.

ª The operator's cab is gradually lowered as long as the lever is held in position
b.
Note!
While the lever is in position b, the operator's cab cannot be lifted.
X After lowering the cab, return the lever to position a.
3.2.4 Safety lever
Fig. 3-42 Safety lever
To prevent inadvertent movements of the machine, the left control console is

equipped with a safety lever.
Caution!
When entering or exiting the operator's cab, always ensure that the safety lever is
in its top position (arrow).
When the safety lever is tilted up, a number of machine functions are disabled or
otherwise modified:
– The servo control is disabled.
– The actuation of the pilot control unites (e. B. joysticks or pedals) does not result
in movement of the machine.
– The parking brake and the slewing gear brake are applied, and the oscillating axle
is locked. The respective indicator lights are on.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Control
– The brakes and the oscillating axle cannot be released.

By moving the safety lever to its bottom position, the initial switching statues of the
brakes and the oscillating axle are re-established, and the pilot control units are
enabled.
X Before commencing work with the machine while seated on the operator seat,
move the safety lever to its bottom position.
3.2.5 Operator seat
Danger!
The adjustment of the operator seat could result in an inadvertent actuation of
control elements, moving the machine or the attachment.
This can lead to injury to persons or damage to property.
X Do not adjust the operator seat while driving the machine.
X Park the machine and apply the parking brake.
X Move the safety lever up.
Fig. 3-43 Operator seat
1 Operator seat heating 2 Mechanical / pneumatic lumbar

support*
3 Backrest adjustment 4 Armrest height adjustment
5 Armrest adjusting wheel 6 Horizontal suspension*
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Control
7 Horizontal adjustment with control 8 Display for weight settings*

consoles
9 Manual/automatic adjustment for 10 Shock absorber*
body weight and seat height*
11 Horizontal adjustment 12 Seat depth
13 Seat inclination 14 Safety belt
15 Armrests 16 Headrest
* Model variant
Adjusting seat to body weight/seat height (in models with manual adjusting
mechanism):
X Sit down on the seat.
X Adjust the seat height/body weight by pulling or pushing the lever 9 to the stop.
X Check the display 8.
• green = settings correct
• yellow = correction required
X If necessary: Adjust the settings by pulling or pushing the lever 9 to the stop.
Adjusting seat to body weight (in models with automatic adjusting

mechanism)*:
X Before adjusting the body weight settings, set the shock absorber* to "soft".
X Sit down on the seat.
X Pull the lever 9 briefly upwards.
ª The seat is automatically adjusted to suit the body weight of the operator.
Adjusting seat height (in models with automatic adjusting mechanism)*:

X Before adjusting the height, set the shock absorber to "soft".
Caution!
Risk of damage to compressor.
X Do not run the compressor continuously for more than 1 minute.
X Adjust the seat height by pulling or pushing the lever 9 to the stop.
Adjusting seat depth:

X Lift the button 12.
X Sit on the seat and move it horizontally to the desired position.
X To adjust the angle of inclination of the seat, press the button 13.
ª Sit on the seat and move it to the desired angle.
Horizontal adjustment:
X Pull up the lever 11.

X Adjust the operator seat in horizontal direction.
X Release the lever. Ensure that the lever engages properly in the desired position
(audible click).
X Carry out the following check: After locking, it must be impossible to move the
operator seat to a different position.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Control
Horizontal adjustment with control consoles:

X Adjust the operator seat together with the control consoles in horizontal direction.
X Release the lever. Ensure that the lever engages properly in the desired position
(audible click).
operator seat to a different position.
Adjusting backrest:
X Sit on the seat and move the backrest to the desired position.
X Release the lever. Ensure that the locking lever engages in the desired position.
backrest to a different position.
Adjusting lumbar support (in models with mechanical adjusting mechanism):

X Adjust the height and curve of the lumbar pad by turning the hand wheel 2 at the
back of the seat.
Adjusting lumbar support (in models with pneumatic adjusting mechanism)*:

X Adjust the curve of the upper and lower section of the backrest upholstery by
pressing the two switches 2 at the rear of the seat.
Adjusting shock absorber*:

The shock absorption level can be adjusted to suit the actual road or terrain
conditions.
X Turn the handle 10 to the desired position and release it.
• Position 1 = hard
• Position 2 = medium
• Position 3 = soft
Adjusting horizontal cushioning*:

Under certain operating conditions, you can improve the operator comfort by
adjusting the horizontal cushioning mechanism. This helps reduce impact stress in
travel direction on the operator as these impacts are better cushioned by the seat.
X Move the handle 6 to the desired position.
• Position 1 = horizontal cushioning OFF
• Position 2 = horizontal cushioning ON
X After the handle has been moved to position 1, ensure that is engages properly
in this position: push the seat back until you hear an audible click.
Adjusting armrests:
X Turn the hand wheel 5 until the armrests are in the desired position.
If required, the height can be adjusted individually for each armrest:
X Remove the cover cap 4 from the seat covering.
X Loosen the hex (wrench size 13 mm).
X Set the armrest to the desired position.
X Tighten the hex nut (25 Nm).
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Control
X Replace the cover cap on the hex nut.
Adjusting headrest:
X Adjust the headrest 16 by pulling it from the engaging mechanism.
X Adjust the headrest angle by pushing it forward or back.
X To remove the headrest, move it to the upper stop and then pull it with force from
the seat.
Seat heating:
X Actuate the switch 1 to switch on the seat heating.
• Position 0 = seat heating OFF
• Position 1 = seat heating ON
* Model variant
3.2.6 Adjusting the steering column
Fig. 3-44 Steering column
By adjusting the steering column, the position of the steering wheel to the body can
be set.
X Press the release lever 2 down with the foot.
X Set the desired position by pulling or pushing the steering wheel.
X Take the foot off the release lever 2; the steering column is locked in the desired
position.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Control
3.2.7 Windscreen
Fig. 3-45 Windscreen
The windscreen can be placed into 2 positions.

– Position a: windscreen closed.
– Position b: windscreen is fully opened (attached to the roof of the operator's cab).
X Pull the latch 1 inwards and down.
ª The windscreen is released.
X Move the windscreen with the bracket 2, engage it in one of the windscreen
positions (a or b) and engage the latch 1.
3.2.8 Sun blind
Fig. 3-46 Sun blind for windscreen and cab roof

The operator's cab is equipped with two sun blinds, one for the windscreen and one
for the glass panel in the cab roof.
Windscreen
X Pull the sun blind down, holding it by the cross bar 1.
ª The sun blind can be individually adjusted.
X Press the switch 2 (red).
ª The sun blind is automatically rolled up.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Control
Cab roof
X Pull out the sun blind and engage it in the holders provided.
X To open the sun blind, remove it from the holders and let it roll up slowly.
3.2.9 Emergency exit through rear window
Fig. 3-47 Emergency exit through rear window
Pull the latch 1 at the inside of the rear window to remove the rubber insert 2.
X In the event of an emergency, pull out the rubber insert 2 along the entire
circumference of the panel and push out the window.
3.2.10 Inside lighting
Fig. 3-48 Inside lighting
The inside lighting is switched on/off with a rocker switch.

X Set the rocker switch to position 1.

ª The light is switched on.
X Set the rocker switch to position 0.
ª The light is switched off.
X Switch position 2 is not assigned a function.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Control
3.2.11 Fire extinguisher (optional equipment)*
Fig. 3-49 Fire extinguisher / first aid kit
The fire extinguisher is stored in a recess in the bottom right corner of the operator's
cab.
*Operator instructions
3.2.12 Windshield wiper
3.2.12.1 Windshield wiper

With the ignition turned on, the windshield wipers are activated by pressing the
switch S14.
X Press switch.
ª Intermittent function.
ª LED I in the switch lights up.
X Press switch again.
ª Continuous operation.
ª LED C in the switch lights up.
ª LED I in the switch turns off.
ª Windshield wiper is turned off.
ª LED C in the switch turns off.
Adjusting the interval time for the intermittent function
The interval time for the intermittent function can be set when the ignition is on by
pressing switch S14.
Press the switch until the windshield wiper is turned off (LED I in switch turns off)
X Press and hold switch.
ª LED I in the switch blinks.
X Release the switch when the desired interval time has been reached.
ª The interval time can be set to between 2 and 10 seconds.
3.2.12.2 Windshield washing system

With the ignition is turned on, press the button S11 to activate the electric windshield
washing system.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Control
X Press and hold button down.

ª Water will be sprayed onto the front windshield through nozzles.
ª The windshield wiper runs in continuous operation.
X Release the button.
ª The water flow stops.
ª The windshield wiper continues to run continuously for approx. 3 seconds.
3.2.12.3 Windshield washing fluid container
Fig. 3-50 Windshield washing fluid container
The container for the windshield washing fluid is located at the rear of the cab.
Open the cover (see arrow) to refill the container with commercially available
windshield washing fluid.
Quantity: see Lubrication Chart
3.2.12.4 Window wiper on the cab roof (option)
Fig. 3-51 Window wiper on cab roof

With the ignition turned on, press the switch S218 in the right control panel to activate
the windshield wiper on the cab roof.
X Press switch S218.
ª The windshield wiper on the cab roof runs continuously.
X Press switch S218.
ª The windshield wiper on the cab roof is turned off.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Control
3.2.13 Lighting
Fig. 3-52 Positions of lighting devices
1 Parking light/travel light lamp 2 Attachment headlight

3 Front roof light* 4 Beacon*
5 Rear roof light* 6 Rear light*
7 Tail light
* Optional equipment
Parking and travel light (dipped light)

The switch S22 is assigned several functions that are operated by repeat actuation:
– 1. Parking light on.
– 2. Travel light on.
– 3. Lighting off.
When the parking or travel light is on, the tail light is also on.
Attachment headlight, front roof light (optional equipment)

The switch S10 is assigned several functions that are operated by repeat actuation:
– 1. Attachment light on.
– 2. Attachment light off.
– 3. Attachment light and roof light on.
– 4. Attachment light and roof light off.
Beacon (optional equipment)

The beacon is switched on with the switch S41.
Rear roof light, rear light (optional equipment)

The rear roof light is switched on with the switch S275.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Control
X Press the switch.

ª Lights are on.
ª The indicator light in the switch is on.
X Press the switch again.
ª Lights are off.
ª The indicator light in the switch is off.
3.2.14 Radio mute mode (optional equipment)

The switch S422 enables the operator to switch the radio speakers to mute.
X Press the switch S422.
ª The speakers are switched to mute.
X Press the switch S422 again.
ª The speakers are switched to normal volume again.
3.2.15 Heating and air-conditioning system

The operator's cab is equipped with a heating and air-conditioning system as
standard. The operator's cab can be heated, air-conditioned and ventilated.
Fig. 3-53 Air conditioning control unit
Control keys
1 - A/C operation (cooling)
2 - Increase cab temperature / fan speed
3 - Reduce cab temperature / fan speed

4 - Control ON / OFF
5 - Fan speed manual / automatic
6 - REHEAT function
7 - Heating operation manual / automatic
8 - Fresh air operation / recirculated air mode
9 - Rear wall ventilation flap OPEN / SHUT
10 - Right control console ventilation flap OPEN / SHUT
11 - Windscreen and legroom ventilation flap OPEN / SHUT
12 - Windscreen ventilation flap OPEN / SHUT
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Control
Display screens
13 - Recirculated air
14 - REHEAT function
15 - Air conditioning (cooling)
16 - Rear wall ventilation flap OPEN
17 - Right control console ventilation flap OPEN
18 - Windscreen ventilation flap OPEN
19 - Legroom ventilation flap OPEN
20 - Automatic operation
21 - Fan speed indicator bar for manual operation
22 - Fan speed symbol for manual operation
23 - Heating operation symbol for manual operation
24 - Heating performance indicator bar for manual operation
25 - Specified value / error code
26 - Temperature unit (°)
A flashing error code F1-F5 will be displayed if the control unit identifies an error.
Note!
X In the event of an error, please contact the LIEBHERR customer service centre.
Note!
To avoid the starter and battery from overloading, only switch on the air-
conditioning system after starting the diesel engine.
X If the machine is to be used for a lengthy period of time without switching on the
air conditioning system, operate the compressor every 2 weeks by pressing
REHEAT key 6.
Switch on the control unit:
Fig. 3-54 Control unit self-test
X Switch on the system by pressing key 4.

ª The software version will be displayed for approximately 12 seconds while the
control unit performs its self-test.
The heating and air conditioning in the cab are in operation. Heating performance
and fan speed are automatically controlled when the AUTO (20) symbol is
displayed.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Control
Adjusting the cab temperature:
Fig. 3-55 Example: increase the temperature
The desired cab temperature is displayed on-screen.

X Press key 2 to increase the temperature.
X Press key 3 to reduce the temperature.
Example: Press key 2 five times to increase the cab temperature by 5 °C.
The set temperature value will remain stored until the next change is made.
To start cooling, switch on a/c operation (key 1).
Manually adjusting the heating performance:
Fig. 3-56 Manually adjusting the heating performance
X Press key 7 to manually adjust the heating performance.

ª Symbol 23 (manual heating operation) and symbol 24 (heating performance
indicator bar) are displayed, the text "AUTO" disappears.
ª Symbol 23 flashes for 5 seconds; during this time the heating performance
can be manually adjusted.
X Use keys 2 or 3 to increase/reduce heating performance.
X Press key 7 twice in quick succession to restart automatic mode.
ª Symbols 23 and 24 are no longer displayed
ª The text "AUTO" is displayed; automatic heating operation is activated.
Switching a/c operation on and off:

Fig. 3-57 A/C operation and REHEAT function
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Control
X Press key 1.
ª A/C operation is switched on, symbol 15 is displayed.
ª The compressor will now be switched on by the control unit as required. It
automatically controls the speed (rpm) of the heating and air conditioning unit.
X Press key 1 again.
ª A/C operation is switched off, symbol 15 is no longer displayed.
X Press REHEAT key 6 if you need to defog the cab.
ª Symbol 14 is displayed.
The REHEAT function automatically switches off again after 10 minutes.
Recirculated air and fresh air, fan speed:
Fig. 3-58 Adjust the air supply and fan speed
The heating and air conditioning system can be switched to either recirculated or
fresh air mode.
X Press key 8 to open / close the fresh air flap.
ª Symbol 13 indicates that the fresh air flap is closed.
ª Symbol 13 is no longer displayed when the fresh air flap is open.
Manually adjusting the fan speed:

X Press key 5 to manually set the fan speed.
ª Manual fan speed mode is activated, the text "AUTO" disappears.
ª Symbol 22 (manual fan operation) flashes for 5 seconds; during this time fan
performance can be manually adjusted.
X Use keys 2 or 3 to increase/reduce fan performance.
ª Symbol 21 (fan performance bar indicator) changes accordingly
X Press key 5 twice in quick succession to restart automatic mode.
ª Symbols 21 and 22 are no longer displayed.
ª The text "AUTO" is displayed; automatic fan speed operation is activated.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Control
Changing the air supply:
Fig. 3-59 Location of front air outlets (Fig. left) and outlets on rear cab wall (Fig.
right)
The air outlets are located on the seat bracket a, right control console b, windscreen
c and rear cab wall d. Opened ventilation flaps are indicated by an arrow on the
display.
To obtain optimum comfort:
X During heating operation, open the air outlets in the legroom area a, on right
control console b and (if required) for windscreen c.
X During a/c operation, open the air outlets in the rear cab wall d and right control
console b.
The best heating or air conditioning performance is achieved when using the
recirculated air function.
The air flow is regulated by pressing keys 9 - 12 and using the rotating and lockable
air outlets.
Fig. 3-60 Air outlet symbols
X Press key 9.
ª Air outlets d are opened.
X Press key 9 again to re-close the ventilation flaps.
ª Symbol 16 is no longer displayed.
ª Air outlets d are closed.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Control
Open / close ventilation flap on control console:

X Press key 10.
ª Air outlet b is opened.
ª Air outlet b is closed.
Open / close the ventilation flap for the windscreen and legroom:
X Press key 11.
ª Symbols 18 and 19 are displayed
ª Air outlets a and c are opened.
ª Symbols 18 and 19 are no longer displayed
ª Air outlets a and c are closed.
Open / close windscreen ventilation flap:

X Press key 12.
ª Air outlet c is opened.
ª Air outlets c are opened.
Switching the temperature display:

The displayed temperature can be switched from ° Celsius to ° Fahrenheit.
X Press and hold key 8.
X Press key 3
ª The temperature is displayed in ° Fahrenheit.
X Repeat this procedure to switch the temperature display to ° Celsius.
Auxiliary heater operation (option):
Fig. 3-61 Auxiliary heater operation
X Switch on the auxiliary heater

ª When the air conditioning system is switched on: the text SH (auxiliary heater)
is displayed for several seconds.

ª The air conditioning system switches itself off and cannot be switched on
again during auxiliary heater operation.
ª The air conditioning system is ready for operation again once the auxiliary
heater has been switched off and the run-on time has expired.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Operation
3.3 Operation
3.3.1 Safety instructions
3.3.1.1 Bringing the machine into service

– Before starting the machine, perform a thorough walkaround inspection.
– Visually check the machine for loose bolts, cracks, wear, leaks and damage.
– Never start or operate a damaged machine.
– Make sure to correct any problems immediately.
– Verify that all hoods, covers and doors are closed, however, the locks should
remain unlocked.
– Verify that all safety signs are in place.
– Make sure that all windows, as well as the inside and outside mirrors are clean.
Secure all doors and windows to prevent unintentional movement.
– Before operating the machine, adjust the operator’s seat, the mirror, the armrests
and the other items to ensure comfortable and safe working conditions.
– The noise protection devices on the machine must be in working order.
– Never operate the machine without the cab.
3.3.1.2 Starting the machine

– Before start up, check all indicator lights and instruments for proper function, bring
all controls into neutral position and insure that the safety lever is in the raised
position.
– Blow the horn briefly prior to starting the diesel engine, in order to warn persons
located near the machine.
– Only start the machine from the driver’s seat.
– Start the diesel engine according to the regulations in the operating instructions,
if you have not received any other instructions.
– Lower the safety lever and check all indicators, gauges, warning devices and
controls for their proper indication.
– Only operate the diesel engine in a well-ventilated area, if the area is enclosed. If
necessary, open doors and windows in the building to provide ample fresh air.
– Bring the engine and hydraulic oil to operating temperature. Low oil temperatures
cause a slow reaction of the controls.
– Check that all attachment functions are operating properly.
– Carefully take the machine to an open area and check all control functions.
3.3.1.3 Shutting down the machine

– Park the machine on level and stable ground whenever possible. Otherwise,
chock or block wheels when parking on a slope.

– Lower the attachment so that it rests on the ground.
– Move all control elements into the neutral position. Set the parking and slewing
gear brake.
– Switch off the diesel engine according to the operating instructions and move the
safety lever up, prior to leaving the driver’s seat.
– Lock the machine, as well as all hoods, covers and doors; remove all keys and
secure the machine against any unauthorized use.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Operation
3.3.1.4 Towing the machine

– Always observe the correct procedure: See chapter “Towing the machine” in this
operating manual.
– The machine may only be towed in exceptional circumstances, such as moving a
disabled machine from a hazardous location.
– Before pulling or towing the machine, check all cables, hooks and couplers for
safety and stability.
– Towing equipment must have sufficient tensile strength and must be attached to
the undercarriage at the designated tiedown attachment points.
– Never allow anyone to remain in the area of the towing devices.
– During the towing procedure, keep within the required transport position, the
permissible speed and distance.
– Proceed as outlined in the operating manual when putting the machine back into
service.
3.3.2 Starting machine
3.3.2.1 General instructions
Note!
When using the machine above a certain height above sea level and at low ambient
temperatures, the performance and the service life of the diesel engine with turbo
charger is considerably reduced.
Under such conditions, there is an increased risk of overheating of the coolant
circuit and the hydraulic oil.
To prevent damage to the diesel engine, the output of the engine is automatically in
line with the elevation above sea level and the ambient temperature.
Simultaneously observe the coolant circuit and the hydraulic oil cooling system.
3.3.2.2 Tasks to be completed prior to machine start
Caution!
A fire can only be extinguished, if it is accessible.
X Before starting the machine, open all locks of the hydraulic excavators panels.
ª In the event of a fire, these doors can than be opened without delay to
extinguish the fire.
Position of the locks: see chapter "Maintenance".
Caution!
When the tasks listed below are completed and the machine is already at operating
temperature, there is risk of injury from scalding by hot coolant or oil.
X Before completing the tasks described below, read the respective sections in
chapter "Maintenance".
Before starting the machine, carry out the following routine procedure:
– Check oil level in engine*.
– Check coolant level of diesel engine*.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Operation
– Check oil level in hydraulic tank*.

– Remove water from fuel system*.
– If necessary, remove ice and snow from the cooling air and combustion air intake
openings.
* For instructions on how to complete these tasks, refer to chapter "Maintenance".
3.3.2.3 Deactivating the electronic immobiliser (optional

equipment)
On request, the machine can be equipped with an electronic immobiliser.
Prior to start-up the electronic system checks whether the ignition key code is
correct. If this is the case, the control system is enabled.
The machine is delivered with two sets of keys (blue and red):
Fig. 3-62 Keys in different colours
1 Programmed ignition key (blue) 2 Master key (red)
Note!
The red master key cannot be used to start the machine. It is only used for the
programming and deprogramming of additional blue ignition keys.
It is very important that the red master key is kept in a safe place (e.g. machine
owner's office) and only the blue key is handed over to the machine operator.
X Start the machine with a blue programmed key.
Safety functions
The electronic immobiliser is automatically activated after five seconds, provided that
the diesel engine is shut down and the ignition key is removed.
If more than five keys with different codes are inserted into the ignition within a period
of one minute, the immobiliser remains activated for 15 minutes. During this period,
it is not possible to start the machine with any other key.
Manipulation protection
The electronic immobiliser cannot be deactivated by manual manipulation to the
machine.
Deprogramming keys
If a programmed key is lost, the remaining programmed keys must be
deprogrammed and reprogrammed.
For detailed information (functions, deletion of program, programming of keys,
troubleshooting), see the user manual of the manufacturer.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Operation
3.3.2.4 Switching on the electrical system
Switch on the main battery switch:
Fig. 3-63 Battery main switch
X Turn battery main switch to position 1 (ON).
Switching on the ignition:
Fig. 3-64 Ignition switch
0 Neutral position 1 Contact position

2 Ignition position P Parking position
Turn battery main switch to position 1 (ON).

X Turn the ignition key to contact position 1.
ª The ignition is switched on.
ª As soon as the system is switched on, it completes a self-test of the control
panel keyboard and the indicating instruments: All indicator lights, with the
exception of the two LEDs of the switch S22 (travel light) are briefly on.
ª The LIEBHERR logo is shown on the monitoring display.

X During the self-test, observe the indicating instruments.
Note!
If the system fails to complete a self-test of the control panel keyboard and the
indicating instruments, check whether the battery main switch is in the "ON"
position.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Operation
Service interval indication
Fig. 3-65 Service interval request
After the self-test is completed, the system indicates with a graphic sign whether a
service check is due. This icon is shown temporarily, replacing the operating hours
indicator.
The service check symbol disappears after about 8 seconds.
3.3.2.5 Starting the diesel engine
Note!
Incorrect starting can damage the diesel engine!
X Only operate the starter, if the diesel engine is off.
X Do not operate the starter for periods of more than 20 seconds.
X If the machine fails to start after 20 seconds of starter operation: Wait at least
1 minute until the next start attempt.
X Turn the ignition key to position 0 before starting the engine again.
X After three unsuccessful start attempts: identify the cause of the failure and
eliminate it.
Engine starting process:

X Turn ignition key to ignition position 2.
X As soon as the engine is running, release the ignition key.
ª The indicator lights H2 and H12 must be off (H23 is switched off after a short
delay).
ª A buzzer signal is audible while the engine oil pressure is built up.
Starting engine at low ambient temperatures:

Depending on the coolant and ambient temperature, the intake air is automatically
fed through a heating flange for pre-heating.
If the Pre-heating ON symbol is displayed, leave the ignition key in position 1 until
the Pre-heating END symbol appears. The motor can now be started.
X Leave the ignition key in position 1.
ª The Pre-heating ON symbol is displayed on the screen.
ª The symbol remains displayed on the main screen for approx. 20 seconds.
X After the Pre-heating END symbol is displayed (for 2 seconds), turn the ignition
key to the ignition position 2.
X As soon as the engine is running, release the ignition key.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Operation
Starting engine at ambient temperatures below -18 °C

If the machine is to be started at temperatures below -18 °C, we recommend
equipping the machine with one or several starter aids available from LIEBHERR
(see starting aids).
3.3.2.6 Warm-up phase for diesel engine and hydraulic system
Diesel engine
If the engine coolant is cold (temperature below 20 °C), the speed is automatically
set to step 3.
This process is continued until the engine coolant temperature reaches 20 °C, or for
maximum 3 minutes.
X Slowly increase the engine load until the second green LED (from the left) at the
indicator P2 is on.
Note!
The engine is damaged if it is operated for a prolonged time at idle speed.
X Shut down the diesel engine, if the machine is not operated.
Hydraulic system
If the hydraulic oil is cold (temperature below 8 °C), the pump performance is
automatically limited.
As soon as the hydraulic oil temperature rises to above 8 °C, the machine can be
operated at full power.
3.3.2.7 Power selection (MODE) and speed adjustment

Fig. 3-66 Speed adjustment and mode functions
The display P4 (LED chain) indicates the preselected engine speed. The chain
represents 10 speed steps.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Operation
Selecting engine power (mode):

By pressing the switch S86, you can select between 4 different modes. The active
mode is indicated by the letter below the LED.
– L: LIFT mode (speed step 5 - extremely sensitive lifting of loads)
– F: FINE mode (speed step 10 - grading work)
– E: ECO mode (speed step 8 - economic operation)
– P: POWER mode (speed step 10)
After the diesel engine is started, the speed preselection is set to step 1 (lower idle
speed of diesel engine). If preheating of the diesel engine is required, it is set to step
3.
X If necessary, allow the engine to heat up first.
X Actuate the mode switch S86.
ª The selected mode is applied together with the associated speed and power.
ª The respective LED is permanently on.
In modes E (maximum torque) and P, the diesel engine operates at maximum
power. In modes L and F, the hydraulic output is reduced.
The selected mode is stored when the engine is shut down, and is indicated by a
flashing LED above the switch at the next start-up.
Note!
The best combination of engine speed and hydraulic power can only be chosen by
means of the modes.
Changing the engine speed with the arrow keys might not have the desired result.
X Before starting work, select the mode suitable for the task in hand.
Adjusting engine speed with the arrow keys:

X Increase speed: Press switch S258.
ª Speed is increased by one step.
ª The speed indicator P4 changes accordingly (increasing).
X Reduce speed: Press switch S229.
ª The speed is reduced by one step.
ª The speed indicator P4 changes accordingly (decreasing).
A flashing LED above the switch S86 indicates an intermediate step in the selected
mode. This indicates that the engine speed does not correspond to the selected
mode.
X Before continuing with the work, adjust the mode.
3.3.2.8 To be observed after start-up
Danger!
Risk of asphyxiation from exhaust gases.

X In confined rooms, do not start the engine unless you have ensured sufficient
ventilation.
X Open doors and windows in the window to provide ample fresh air.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Operation
Caution!
Risk of injury, if function check is not carried out properly.
X Run the diesel engine until the engine and hydraulic oils have reached operating
temperature. At low oil temperature, the steering responds only slowly.
X Move the machine to an open space to test the function of the travel and the
slewing gear brake.
X Check the operating devices of the attachment to ensure that they work
properly.
3.3.3 Switching off the diesel engine
Caution!
Risk of damage to the turbo charger!
X Do not suddenly shut down the engine from full-load speed.
X First reduce the engine speed to lower idle speed by pressing the arrow key S229.
ª As a result only the LED to the very left in the indicator P4 remains on (engine
speed).
X Let the diesel engine run for minimum 30 seconds in idle mode.
X Turn the ignition key to position 0 to shut down the engine.
X Remove the ignition key.
3.3.4 Starting aids
Danger!
Risk of explosion when using starting aids containing ether in diesel motors with
pre-heating devices.
X Never use starting aids which contain ether.
3.3.4.1 Fuel preheating S26 (optional extra)

The fuel filter is electrically heated during fuel preheating. This will prevent the fuel
filter salting up at low temperatures.
Fuel preheating should be activated at least 5 minutes before starting in low
outdoor temperature conditions.
X Press switch S26 on the right control panel before starting. The ignition must be
switched on.
ª The fuel filter is heated electrically.

ª The indicator light in the switch illuminates.
3.3.4.2 Coolant / engine oil / hydraulic oil preheating (optional extra)

Coolant, motor oil and hydraulic oil may be electrically preheated or maintained at a
steady temperature (independent heating).
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Operation
The vehicle is fitted with an electrical cabinet containing the electrical connections to
operate and control the heating. It is located to the side of the operator cab. The
electrical heating is supplied from a stationary power connection.
This will considerably shorten the diesel engine cold running phase particularly at low
temperatures. This will protect the diesel engine and reduce fuel consumption.
Danger!
There is a fault current shock hazard, e. g. due to defective insulation, if the static
power supply is not fitted with a fault current circuit breaker !
If no fault current cirucit breaker is fitted, the circuit between human and equipment
is not interrupted when a fault current occurs. This may result in electric shocks.
X Preheating must be via a socket fitted with a residual current current breaker that
has a rated current less than 30 mA.
X Otherwise do not connect the preheating system!
Danger!
The use of unsuitable electrical cables may result in injury resulting from burning
cables!
Electrical cables with insufficient cross-section for the preheating current may
become too hot. This represents a fire hazard.
X Use connection cables with a minimum cross-section of 1.5 mm2.
X Extension cables must have at least the same cross-section (1.5 mm2) as the
connection cable.
X Fully unwind the cable if you are using a cable reel.
Caution!
The electrical connections are located to the side of the operator cab.
X Before driving off ensure that the connection cable is no longer attached to the
hydraulic excavator.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Operation
Fig. 3-67 Coolant / engine oil / hydraulic oil preheating
1 Coolant preheating indicator light 5 On / off rotary switch for preheating

hydraulic oil
2 Engine oil preheating indicator light 6 On / off rotary switch for preheating
engine oil
3 Fuse 7 Socket for power cable
4 Hydraulic oil preheating indicator 8 On / off rotary switch for preheating
light the coolant
X Plug the power cable into socket 7 in the electrical cabinet.

X Connect the power cable to the stationary connection (110 - 120 V / 220 -
240 V AC).
X Turn rotary switch 5 hydraulic oil-preheating to the "ON" position.
ª Hydraulic oil preheating has now been switched on.
ª Indicator light 4 illuminates.
X Turn rotary switch 8 coolant preheating to the "ON" position.
ª Coolant preheating is now switched on.
X Turn rotary switch 6 engine oil preheating to the "ON" position.
ª Engine oil preheating has now been switched on.
X After starting the engine, disconnect the power cable from the machine.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Operation
3.3.5 Jump start procedure
Danger!
When connecting to jump start batteries, old batteries can be subject to increased
gas formation.
X Wear safety glasses and protective gloves during the jump start procedure and
avoid open flames and creating any sparks in the vicinity of the discharged
vehicle battery. DANGER OF EXPLOSION!
X Only use jump start cables with a sufficient cross section. Always follow the
established jump starting procedure.
3.3.5.1 Connecting the batteries

X First connect the cable to the positive terminal (+) of the discharged battery and
then to the positive terminal (+) of the jump start battery.
X Connect the second cable to the negative terminal (-) of the discharged battery
and then to the negative terminal (-) of the jump start battery.
X Start the engine as described above.
Caution!
X Before removing the jump start cable, be sure to bring the Diesel engine of the
jump started machine into low idle.
X For safety reasons, turn on a large user, such as work headlights, uppercarriage
lighting etc. to avoid overvoltage. The electronics could otherwise be damaged.
3.3.5.2 Disconnecting the batteries

X First remove the cable from the negative terminal (-) of the jump start battery and
then from the negative terminal (-) of the discharged battery.
X Remove the second cable from the positive terminal (+) of the jump start battery
and then from the positive terminal (+) of the discharged battery.
X Check the electrical functions of the machine.
For battery care and maintenance, see the chapter "Battery care".
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Operation
3.3.6 Travelling operation

Always put on your safety belt before starting to travel.
The uppercarriage must be positioned in the travel position relative to the chassis
when travelling, i.e. steering axle (oscillating axle) to front, rigid axle to rear.
The uppercarriage and undercarriage must be bolted together using the locking
pin for on-road travelling.
Fig. 3-68 Control elements, travelling
1 Retainer 7 Travelling pedal

3 Joystick, right S30 Travel direction rocker switch
6 Brake pedal
X Release parking brake S16.

X Before moving off, use your foot to open retainer 1 on brake pedal 6.
3.3.6.1 Gear selection

The machine is equipped with a power shift 2-gear transmission with shift lock.
– 1. gear: low travel speed
– 2. gear: the maximum travel speed can be reached
2. gear is preselected
X Press switch S42.
ª 1. gear is selected.
ª Left LED in the switch illuminates.
ª The first gear is automatically selected when the speed drops to a sufficiently
low value.
X Press switch S42 again.
ª 2. gear will be selected immediately.
ª Left LED in the switch goes out.
3.3.6.2 Creeper gear
Note!
The creeper gear should be selected when stationary or during slow travelling in
order to prevent the machine braking in a jerky manner.
The creeper gear can be selected before or during the journey to obtain better
tractive power on gradients and difficult terrain.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Operation
X Press switch S21.

ª Creeper gear is activated.
ª LED 1 in the switch illuminates.
ª Creeper gear is deactivated.
ª LED 1 in the switch goes out.
3.3.6.3 Travelling movement

Select the travel direction using rocker switch S30 on right joystick 3. Continuously
variable speed regulation is possible using travelling pedal 7.
Danger!
X Before reversing, check that you can safely enter the area behind you.
X When you have completed the travelling movement, move the travelling
direction switch to the 0 position.
The travel and steering directions are reversed if the uppercarriage is rotated 180°
to the undercarriage.
Only change the direction of travel when the machine is stationary.
Travelling forwards:
X Push rocker switch S30 down a.
ª The symbol for travelling forwards appears on screen.
X Slowly press down travelling pedal 7.
Reversing:
X Push rocker switch S30 up b.
ª The symbol for reversing appears on screen.
X Slowly press down travelling pedal 7.
3.3.6.4 Driving on gradients
Caution!
Locking the operating brake does not guarantee that the machine is safely shut
down when on a gradient (posible loss of pressure due to leakage).
X When leaving the operator's cab and / or shutting down the machine, engage
parking brake S16.
X Push the safety lever up.
The machine is equipped with an automatic brake valve that prevents the hydraulic
travel drive from overspeeding.
Danger!
X Before driving on gradients, switch off the sensor controlled low-idle automatic
S20.
X Drive on gradients with the diesel engine at maximum speed.

X Regulate the speed using the travelling pedal.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Operation
Driving on gradients steeper than 10 %
Caution!
The machine may move too quickly in second gear at gradients in excess of 10 %.
X Only drive in 1st gear on gradients steeper than 10 %.
X Stop before driving onto the gradient and engage first gear.
3.3.7 Travel warning device (option)
Fig. 3-69 Travel warning device
X Actuate the travelling pedal 7.

ª The travel warning device turns on automatically.
ª An acoustical signal (warning tone) will be emitted.
Deactivating the travel warning device:

X Actuate the rocker switch S55 in left joystick 4.
ª The travel warning device is turned off.
Note!
The travel warning device can only be turned off 10 seconds after starting to travel.
If the accelerator pedal is actuated again, the travel warning device is reactivated.
3.3.8 Drive deactivation (optional extra)

If the machine is equipped with an adjustable-height cab, it is possible to have a drive
deactivation device fitted.
This device means that when the cab is raised:
– driving motions are not possible.
– the driving direction switch S30 does not function.
– the symbols "Drive forwards" and "Drive in reverse" do not appear on screen.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Operation
3.3.9 Oscillating axle locking device
Fig. 3-70 Oscillating axle locking device
The oscillating axle can be operated locked (rigid) or unlocked (oscillating). The
relevant selection is chosen with the switch S75.
S75 Function Application
0 Oscillating axle unlocked Travel operation without load, on-

road travel
1 Oscillating axle locked Working and moving machine with

attached load
A Automatic oscillating axle locking; Working, travel operation without

the oscillating axle is automatically load
locked when the working brake is
applied.
Preconditions: S35 is switched on.
Tab. 3-1 Functions of the oscillating axle
Danger!
When the automatic oscillating axle locking function (switch S75 in position A) is on
and the working brake is released, or the servo steering S35 is switched off, the
oscillating axle is released.
This results in a reduced stability of the machine. When a load is taken up and the
uppercarriage is swivelled, the machine might topple over, resulting in injury and
damage to equipment.
X To move the machine with load (e.g. filled digging took, suspended load),
proceed as follows: Before taking up the load, permanently lock the oscillating
axle (set switch S75 to position 1).
X Never switch off the servo steering system S35 when the automatic oscillating
axle locking mechanism is activated (switch S75 in position A).
Locking oscillating axle:

X Turn the switch S75 to position 1
ª The symbol of the oscillating axle locking device is shown on the screen.
ª The oscillating axle is permanently locked.
ª The machine's stability is enhanced.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Operation
Releasing oscillating axle:

ª The symbol of the oscillating axle locking device disappears from the screen.
ª The oscillating axle is permanently unlocked.
ª The machine's stability is reduced.
Switching on the automatic oscillating axle locking mechanism:

The servo steering system S35 must be switched on and remain activated during
the operation of the automatic oscillating axle locking mechanism.
X Turn the switch S75 to position A
ª The symbol of the automatic oscillating axle locking mechanism is shown on
the screen.
ª When the working brake is applied, the oscillating axle is automatically locked
in its current position. When the working brake is released, the oscillating axle
is unlocked.
Note!
To make best use of the oscillating axle, set it according to the actual task:
X Lock the oscillating axle when working with the machine.
X Lock the oscillating axle before travelling with an attached load.
X Release the oscillating axle before travelling without load and before on-road
travel.
Full floating axle lock as a function of the upper carriage position
Danger!
The full floating axle automatically unlocks when it is swung back to the longitudinal
axis and if either switch S75 is in position "0" or the brake pedal is not pressed when
in position "A". The hydraulic excavator could tip over and cause injury.
The full floating axle is locked if the upper carriage is swung out by ca. 30° from the
longitudinal axis regardless of the position of switch S75. This is independent of
whether the front or rear axle is swung out
3.3.10 Support
Fig. 3-71 Support
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Operation
The machine is fitted with a 4-point claw support 1.

The claw support can be extended to include an independent control function
(optional extra).
3.3.10.1 Engage the claw support
Fig. 3-72 Engage the claw support
The support is operated using control lever 5.

X To extend the support, push control lever 5 forwards a.
X To retract the support, pull control lever 5 backwards b.
3.3.10.2 Independent claw control (optional extra)
Fig. 3-73 Independent claw control
Select independent claw control using switches S204 - S207 on the right control
panel.
– S204 = Claw, front left
– S205 = Claw, front right
– S206 = Claw, rear left
– S207 = Claw, rear right
X Press the relevant switch S204 - S207.
ª The light in the corresponding switch illuminates.

X Use control lever 5 to lower or raise the selected claws.
3.3.10.3 Claw monitoring (optional extra)

The Claw monitoring symbol is displayed on the main screen whenever the claws are
not fully retracted.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Working with the machine
3.4 Working with the machine
3.4.1 Safety Instructions
3.4.1.1 Working with the machine

– Before starting to work, familiarize yourself with the specific conditions of the job
site and any local regulations. These include: the obstacles in the working or
movement area, the load carrying capacity of the ground and required safeguards
for the job site to protect machines and personnel from public highway traffic.
– Always keep an adequate safety distance to overhangs, edges, embankments
and an unsecured substrate.
– Be particularly cautious in conditions of reduced visibility and changing ground
conditions.
– Always locate any underground utilities before you dig. Observe the required
clearance distances to any underground utilities.
– Familiarize yourself with the location of power lines and use caution when working
near them. Observe the required clearance distances to any power lines.
– In the case of contact with a power line:
• do not move the machine or its attachment,
• do not leave the operator’s platform,
• warn people in the vicinity not to approach or touch the machine,
• have the power turned off.
– Before moving the machine, always ensure that the attachments are safely
secured.
– When traveling on public roads, observe all traffic regulations, insure that your
equipment has all required lighting and marking, and observe any applicable load
limitations.
– Always turn on the lights in conditions of poor visibility or darkness.
– Do not permit any passengers on the machine (except on two way excavators).
– Operate the machine only when seated and with the seat belt fastened.
– Report any problems or needed repairs and make sure that all required repairs
are carried out immediately.
– Insure that the intended work area is clear of all personnel before beginning work.
– Before starting to work, always check the brake system as outlined in the
operating manual.
– Never leave the operator’s seat as long as the machine is still moving.
– Never leave the machine unattended while the diesel engine is running.
– Know the loads to be handled and be aware of any stability limitations these loads
may create.
– The maximum approved passable incline / traverse slope of the machine
depends on the attached equipment as well as the substrate.
– For travel, move the uppercarriage parallel to the undercarriage and hold the load
as close as possible to the ground.
EXCEPTION: see WHEN LOADING AND UNLOADING
– Adjust the travel speed to suit local conditions.
– Avoid working movements which could cause the machine to tip over.
– If possible, always work downhill or uphill, never sideways on a slope.
– Travel downhill at the permitted speed or you could lose control over the machine.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
– Travel down grades at the appropriate speed to maintain control of the machine.
Shift to a lower gear to allow the engine to control the maximum speed of the
machine.
– When loading a truck, make sure that the truck driver leaves the cab, even if a
rock protection is present.
– Always use the safety devices intended for their specific use for demolition work,
clearings, hoisting operations, etc.
– For terrain which is difficult to gain an overview of and whenever necessary, ask
for assistance of a guide. Have only one person signal you.
– Only permit experienced personnel to secure loads and signal the machine
operator. The guide must position himself within view of the operator or be in
voice contact with him.
– Depending on the attachment combination, there can be a danger of collision
between the working tool and the operator’s cab, the cab protection or the boom
cylinders. To avoid damage, utmost attention is required when the bucket teeth
enter this range.
3.4.1.2 Use in material handling applications, specifically when

travelling with raised loads and attachments
– Material handling applications, especially using a grapple, may require travel with
suspended loads. Doing this will shift the machine centre of gravity and reduce
stability.
The following practices and precautions should be observed:
• Match your travel behaviour to the changed machine characteristics and
surrounding conditions.
• Reduce the travel speed to avoid sudden braking or steering manoeuvres.
• Avoid sudden speed changes, such as braking, acceleration, changes in travel
direction.
• Turn the uppercarriage only if the undercarriage is not travelling.
• Turn the uppercarriage only after taking on the load.
• Move the machine only after you have taken on the load, lifted it and turned the
uppercarriage in travel position.
• If so required to the job site conditions, ensure, that you have appropriate
windscreen protection.
The protective screen (FOPS) must be installed if there is a danger of falling
objects from overhead.
• Do not exceed the grapple rated load. Know the density and weight of materials
being handled.
– The working sequences when working with machines with grapples require a
properly instructed and trained operator.
– The work application is only permitted after the machine operator has received
sufficient training and practical experience.
3.4.1.3 Application of machines with tower elevation

– Due to the tower elevation, the centre of gravity of the machine will shift upward
in vertical direction. The travel and work behaviour of the machine will thereby be
strongly influenced, for example reduction of dynamic stability.
– Due to the elevated centre of gravity, the machine must be aligned in horizontal
direction before starting to work. In horizontal direction, the centre of gravity of the
uppercarriage is above the centre of the undercarriage, which improves stability.
– The machine can rock despite levelling and tip over!
For that reason, the following rules must be strictly observed:
When driving the machine:
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
• Driving with loads is not permitted.

• Swing the uppercarriage parallel to the undercarriage (transport position).
• Pull the attachment as close as possible to the machine.
• Only then may the outriggers be retracted and the machine be driven.
• Check the roadway to ensure that the ground is solid and even! Potholes and
uneven road surfaces endanger the stability of the machine.
• Match your travel behaviour to the changed machine characteristics (higher
centre of gravity) and surrounding conditions.
• Reduce the travel speed to avoid sudden braking or steering manoeuvres.
• Avoid sudden speed changes, such as braking, acceleration, changes in travel
direction.
• Travel up or down grades perpendicular (at right angles) to the slope.
• Special care must be taken when driving through narrow passages - drive
slowly!
In material handling operation:
• Wheel model: Before moving (turning) the uppercarriage from transport
position, the machine must be supported on outriggers and horizontally aligned.
• Make sure to check the placement surface of the outriggers (load carrying
capacity of ground). Sinking of an outrigger below ground level would result in
devastating consequences!
• Carry out all movements with increased caution.
• When swinging a load, first bring the attachment as low and close to the
machine as practical. Note: be aware of the hazard of grapple swing when
moving a load toward the operator cab.
• Avoid abrupt slow down or acceleration of the attachment or uppercarriage.
• Never lift a heavier load than stated in the load chart.
3.4.1.4 Additional notes for machines with fixed cab raiser

– To enter and exit the machine, park the machine on level ground. Position the
uppercarriage to the undercarriage in such a way that the steps and ladders are
aligned.
– When entering or leaving the machine, always face the machine and use the
three points of contact with the machine.
– When you can reach the door handle with your free hand, open the door first
before climbing higher. Note that factors such as wind, can make it more difficult
to open the door. For that reason, always guide the door by hand when opening
the door. Make sure that the door is properly latched open.
– Continue to climb up and immediately sit on the operator’s seat in the cab. Then
close the door and fasten the safety belt.
– Proceed with the same care when exiting and climbing down as when entering
and climbing up the machine.
– Park the machine only on firm and level ground. Position the uppercarriage to the
undercarriage in such a way that the steps and ladders are aligned.
– Release the safety belt. When exiting, face the machine and use the three-point
support. Climb down until you can close the door safely. Always guide the door
by hand when closing the door.
– Finally climb down to the ground.
3.4.1.5 Protection from vibrations

– The vibration impact on mobile construction machinery is usually the result of the
manner of utilization. Especially the following parameters have a significant
influence:
• Terrain conditions: Unevenness and potholes;
• Operating techniques: Speed, steering, braking, control of operating elements
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
of the machine during travel as well as working.

– The machine operator determines the vibration impact to a great part, since he
himself selects the speed, the gear ratio, the working manner and the travel route.
This results in a wide range of various vibration impacts for the same machine
type.
The full body vibration impact for the machine operator can be reduced if the
following recommendations are observed:
– Select the appropriate machine, equipment parts and auxiliary devices for the
corresponding tasks.
– Keep the seat in good order and adjust it as follows:
• The seat adjustment and the suspension should be made according to the
weight and the size of the operator.
• Check the suspension and the adjustment mechanism regularly and make sure
that the characteristics of the seat remain as specified by the seat
manufacturer.
– Check the maintenance condition of the machine, especially regarding: Tire
pressure, brakes, steering, mechanical connections, etc.
– Do not steer, brake, accelerate and shift or move and load the attachment of the
machine in a jerky manner.
– Match the machine speed to the travel route to avoid vibration impacts.
• Decrease the speed when driving on pathless terrain;
• Drive around obstacles and avoid very impassable terrain.
– Keep the quality of the terrain where the machine is working and travelling in good
order:
• Remove large rocks and obstacles;
• Fill furrows and holes;
• To establish and retain suitable terrain conditions, keep machines available and
allow for sufficient time.
– Travel longer distances (i.e. on public roads) with suitable (medium) speed.
– For machines, which are frequently used for travel, consider use of auxiliary ride
control systems, and also monitor speed to minimize buildup of "pitching" vehicle
movement.
3.4.2 Sensor controlled low idle automatic

This device automatically reduces the engine RPM to low idle after several seconds
if no hydraulic functions are actuated by the joystick or the pedals. This saves fuel
and reduces noise. Touching the joystick or operating the pedals resets the engine
RPM to its original setting.
Actuate the sensor controlled low idle automatic by pressing switch S20.
X Press switch.
ª Sensor controlled low idle automatic is activated.
ª LED in the switch lights up.

ª Sensor controlled low idle automatic is deactivated.
ª LED in the switch turns off.
Note!
The sensor controlled low idle automatic is turned off if the magnetic system is
activated via switch S46 and the servo control S35 is turned off.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
To set the reset time to low idle after the joysticks have been released:
X Press and hold switch.
ª LED in the switch blinks.
The desired time span is reached.
X Release the switch.
ª LED in the switch lights up.
ª The sensor controlled low idle automatic is activated.
In each case, when a hydraulic function is actuated, the engine RPM which was
previously set using the electric throttle control function will be reset automatically.
Caution!
The sensor controlled low idle automatic must be turned off when starting the Diesel
engine and when travelling downhill. The LED in the switch may not light up.
3.4.3 Working position
Fig. 3-74 Working position
1 Brake pedal (operating brake) S30 Travel direction switch

S16 Switch / parking brake S75 Switch / oscillating axle locking
mechanism
Placing the machine in working position:
Caution!
If the parking brake is applied during work, the drive might become damaged. A
buzzer sound indicates that the parking brake is applied during operation.
X For braking during work, use the brake pedal of the operating brake.
X Set the travel direction switch S30 to its neutral position 0.

X Press the brake pedal 1 to the stop and ensure that the retainer (see arrow) is
engaged.
X Release the parking brake S16.
X Lock the oscillating axle by turning the switch S75 to position I.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Fig. 3-75 Working position. The machine is supported.
As a rule, support the machine before starting work.
3.4.4 Operating working attachment
Fig. 3-76 Operating working attachment
Caution!
The machine is equipped with PCSA controls as standard.
On request, the machine can be fitted with a different control system (e.g.
LIEBHERR control). For such machines, observe the instructions in the respective
separate operating manual.
The left joystick (1) controls the stick and swivelling movements:
– Movement in direction a and b: Stick is extended or retracted.
– Movement in direction c and d: Uppercarriage is swivelled to the left or right.
The right joystick (2) controls the boom and grapple movements:
– Movement in direction e and f: Grapple is closed or opened.
– Movement in direction g and h: Boom is lifted or lowered.
Moving the stick:

The stick is moved by operating the left joystick 1.
X Pulling the joystick backward a:
ª Stick moves in direction a
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
X Pushing the joystick forward b.

ª Stick moves in direction b
Moving the boom:

The boom is moved by operating the right joystick 2.
X Pulling the joystick backward g:
ª The boom is lifted.
X Pushing the joystick forward h:
ª Boom is lowered.
Operating the grapple:
Danger
Risk of accident!
X It is strictly forbidden to guide the attachment tool by hand.
X Moving the joystick to the left e:

ª Grapple is closed.
X Moving the joystick to the right f:
ª Grapple is opened.
Operating tilting system (optional equipment)
Fig. 3-77 Operating tilting system
The tilting system of the industrial stick is operated with the right joystick 2.
X Moving the joystick to the left e:
ª The working tool is tilted inwards.
X Moving the joystick to the right f:
ª The working tool is tilted outwards.
Combined movements:
Diagonal movement of a joystick results in a combination of the associated working
movements. Operators can thus complete different attachment movements

simultaneously.
3.4.5 Swivelling the uppercarriage

The uppercarriage can be swivelled, if the slewing gear brake is released (LED in
switch S17 is off).
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
The uppercarriage is swivelled by operating the left joystick 1.

X Move the joystick to the left c:
ª The uppercarriage is swivelled to the left.
X Move the joystick to the right d:
ª The uppercarriage is swivelled to the right.
3.4.6 Halting the uppercarriage

The uppercarriage can be hydraulically slowed down in its movement and halted.
The mechanical slewing gear brake enables the operator to secure the halted
uppercarriage in any desired position.
Hydraulic braking:
X Move the left joystick 1 to its neutral position:
ª The uppercarriage is slowed down hydraulically.
X Move the left joystick 1 in the opposite direction:
ª The uppercarriage is stopped with the maximum hydraulic force.
Mechanical slewing gear brake:
Caution!
The mechanical slewing gear brake can be damaged, if it is applied during a
swivelling movement.
X Therefore apply the slewing gear brake only when the uppercarriage is
stationary.
X Press the switch S17:

ª The slewing gear brake is applied.
ª The LED in the switch is on.
X Press the switch S17 again:
ª The slewing gear brake is released.
ª The LED in the switch is off.
Checking the mechanical slewing gear brake:

Ensure that the uppercarriage is stationary.
ª The slewing gear brake is applied.
X Move the left joystick 1 to the right and then to the left stop.
ª The uppercarriage must not swivel.
ª The slewing gear brake is working properly.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Positioning slewing gear brake (optional equipment):
Fig. 3-78 Positioning slewing gear brake
The positioning slewing gear brake is used for the progressive and precise slowing
down of the uppercarriage.
Note!
Frequent use of the positioning slewing gear brake results in increased wear.
X Do not use the positioning slewing gear brake as an operating brake, but only
for special halting and parking manoeuvres of the slewing gear.
X The uppercarriage should normally be slowed down hydraulically.
X Operate the pedal 1.

ª The uppercarriage is slowed down in its movement.
3.4.7 Lowering the working attachment when diesel engine is shut

off
Fig. 3-79 Lowering attachment when the diesel engine is off
In the event of an emergency, the attachment can be lowered even if the diesel
engine is not running.
X Turn the ignition key to contact position 1.
ª The symbol of the oscillating axle locking device ("locked") is shown on the
screen.
ª The oscillating axle is permanently locked.
X Operate the joysticks or pedals until the attachment is fully lowered.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Note
The attachment can be lowered with the residual pressure in the control oil unit.
This reserve is however limited and allows only for a limited number of operations
of the pilot control units.
X Therefore use the joysticks only to lower the attachment and do not attempt to
complete other movements.
3.4.8 Electronic stick cylinder shut-down function (optional

equipment)
3.4.8.1 Function and purpose

When the boom is moved, it can reach great heights and outreaches. The stick with
attached load might collide with the operator's cab or impact on other objects.
attached load.
by the electronic stick cylinder shut-down system.
The movement range of the stick cylinder is determined by two shut-down points that
can be adjusted through the operator's menu. The shut-down points of the stick and
the boom settings determine the reach of the working attachment.
3.4.8.2 Use of stick cylinder shut-down function

The stick cylinder shut-down function remains permanently on and cannot be
switched off during machine operation. If the stick is to be moved beyond a shut-
down point, the stick cylinder shut-down function can be overridden.
Danger!
The stick cylinder shut-down function is an auxiliary tool designed to assist the
machine operator!
For functional reasons, the stick cannot be brought to a sudden stop. The faster it
is moved, the longer its braking distance. The machine might vibrate or swing! Risk
of accident!
X Please note that the machine operator is responsible for the correct adjustment
of the relevant settings!
X Adjust the stick cylinder shut-down function in such a way that there is a
sufficient safety distance, even if the working tool is oscillating or if shut-down is
delayed.
X Avoid fast movements of the stick when it is moved near the shut-down limits.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Fig. 3-80 Shut-down points: Retracting stick (min), extending stick (max)
The following operating statuses are shown on the main screen:
Symbol Description

Shut-down point reached when stick is being retracted.

The shut-down point for retracting is overridden and the stick can be retracted without
restrictions.

Shut-down point reached when stick is being extended.

The shut-down point for extending is overridden and the stick can be extended without
restrictions.
Stick cylinder shut-down, fault

If two symbols are shown at the same time, there is a fault in the system.
Possible causes:
– Incorrect shut-down point settings, or settings of the two shut-down points identical.
Remedy: Readjust the settings for stick cylinder shut-down. For detailed instructions,
see chapter "Operator's menu", submenu "stick cylinder shut-down".
– Electrical fault.
Contact the LIEBHERR customer service department. In the event of an electrical
failure, you have the option to override the stick cylinder shut-down function with
"emergency operation". For detailed instructions, see chapter "Malfunctions,
emergency operation".
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.4.8.3 Overriding stick cylinder shut-down function
Danger!
When the function is overridden, the stick can be moved freely and without limits in
all directions. Risk of accident!
X When overriding the stick cylinder shut-down function, operate the machine with
extreme caution.
X Press the button S403.

ª The stick cylinder shut-down function is overridden. The buzzer sounds.
ª For the next 10 seconds, the stick can be moved without restrictions.
ª After the 10 seconds have lapsed, the stick can only be moved in one direction
to return it to the permissible working range.
X Carefully move the stick into the permissible working range.
ª The buzzer is automatically switched off as soon as the stick is again within
the permissible working range.
3.4.8.4 Adjusting the stick cylinder shut-down function

For detailed instructions, see chapter "Operator's menu", submenu "stick cylinder
shut-down".
3.4.9 Mechanical stick cylinder shut-down function
3.4.9.1 Function and purpose

When the boom is moved, it can reach great heights and outreaches. There is a risk
that the stick with attached load might come very close to the operator's cab.
attached load.
by the mechanical stick cylinder shut-down system.
3.4.9.2 Use of stick cylinder shut-down function

The stick cylinder shut-down function remains permanently on and cannot be
switched off during machine operation. If the stick is to be moved beyond a shut-
down point, the stick cylinder shut-down function can be overridden.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Danger!
The stick cylinder shut-down function is an auxiliary tool designed to assist the
machine operator!
For functional reasons, the stick cannot be brought to a sudden stop. The faster it
is moved, the longer its braking distance. The machine might vibrate or swing! Risk
of accident!
X Please note that the machine operator is responsible for the correct adjustment
of the relevant settings!
X Adjust the stick cylinder shut-down function in such a way that there is a
sufficient safety distance, even if the working tool is oscillating or if shut-down is
delayed.
X Avoid fast movements of the stick when it is moved near the shut-down limits.
3.4.9.3 Overriding stick cylinder shut-down function
Danger!
Risk of injury and damage to equipment!
While the stick cylinder shut-off function is overridden, there is a risk that the
attachment might collide with the operator's cab.
X When overriding the stick cylinder shut-down function, operate the machine with
extreme caution.
After the stick shut-down function has stopped the movement of the stick:
The stick cylinder shut-down function can be overridden by pressing the
switch S216.
ª The indicator light in the switch is on.
ª The stick cylinder shut-down function is overridden.
X Carefully move the stick beyond the shut-down point into the danger range.
3.4.9.4 Adjusting the limit switches

Fig. 3-81 Elevating operator's cab
Safety distance (distance between working attachment and operator's cab): min. 1.5
m.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Adjust the stick cylinder shut-down function in such a way that there is a sufficient
safety distance, even if the working tool is oscillating or if shut-down is delayed.
X Move the elevating operator's cab (optional equipment) to its most forward
extended position.
Fig. 3-82 Stick cylinder shut-down point
X Move the boom upwards to the stop.

X Retract the stick all the way to the desired shut-down point (MIN).
X Switch off the diesel engine and push the safety lever upwards.
Fig. 3-83 Adjusting the limit switch
X Loosen the screws 1.

X Move the connecting link 2 until the outer edge enters the stress field of the limit
switch 3.
X Tighten the screws 1.

X Test the stick cylinder shut-down function.
X If required, readjust the settings and test the function again.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.4.10 Adjustment of attachment tool

The machine can operate a range of attachment tool (additional consumers) with
various pressure and flow rate settings. The respective selections are made in the
operator's menu (see "Tool Control" menu).
Caution!
If an incorrect operating mode is chosen, the attachment tool might be damaged or
its functions might be restricted.
X Make sure that you have all the necessary information regarding the technical
data of the attachment tool.
X Use the attachment tool exclusively with the prescribed settings (Tool Control).
X In the operator's menu, select the pressure and flow settings required for the
attachment tool you wish to operate (see chapter "Tool Control").
3.4.11 Operating the attachment tool (by pedals, push buttons)
Danger!
The working attachment can cause serious or even fatal injury to persons.
X Ensure that no persons are standing inside the danger zone of the machine.
Danger!
If a large or wide attachment tool (e.g. grapple) is swivelled towards the operator's
cab, it might collide with the cab or even break through it, causing danger to the
machine operator.
X Always keep a safe distance between the moving attachment tool and the
operator's cab.
3.4.11.1 Working functions

Fig. 3-84 Operating attachment tool by pedals
The working function of the attachment tool is controlled by pedals.
Example: hydraulic hammer

X Press the foot pedal k down.
ª The hydraulic hammer is operated.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Example: sorting grapple, scrap shears

X Press the foot pedal k down.
ª The attachment tool closes.
X Press the foot pedal m down.
ª The attachment tool opens.
3.4.11.2 Rotating and adjusting
Fig. 3-85 Press the push button at the joystick to rotate and adjust the attachment
tool
1 Rotator (e.g. for rotating grapple)

2 Lock bolts of a hydraulic quick-change adapter system
3 Swivelling ditch cleaning bucket
A Actuation at left joystick (standard equipment)
B Actuation at right joystick (optional equipment)
C Actuation at left and right joystick (optional equipment)
R/L Push button/direction of movement
Press the push buttons at the joystick to turn the attachment tool or to adjust it. The
buttons are located at the right or left joystick (depending on machine equipment).
The rotating function corresponds to the "rotate grapple" function used for grapples
and other attachment tools.
ª The auxiliary function (grapple rotator) is activated.

X Press and hold the button L.
ª The attachment tool turns (swivels) to the left.
ª The lock bolts are extended.
X Press and hold the button R.
ª The attachment tool turns (swivels) to the right.
ª The lock bolts are retracted.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.4.12 Changeover of control (optional equipment)
Fig. 3-86 Changeover of control
Depending on the selected mode, the attachment tool and the tilting system are
operated by the pedals (movement m and k) or with the joystick (movement e and f).
By changing over the control, the functions of the pedals are assigned to the joystick
and vice versa.
To change from one control mode to the other, turn the key switch S405 in the right
control console.
X Turn the key switch S405 to position 1.
ª The indicator light H322 is on.
ª Control changeover is activated.
X Turn the key switch S405 back to position 0.
ª The indicator light H322 is off.
ª Control changeover is deactivated.
Function Changeover
off (0) on (1)

Tilting system e+f m+k
Attachment tool m+k e+f
X Operate the attachment tool and the tilting system according to the selected
control mode.
3.4.13 Operating attachment tool (mini joystick control, optional

equipment)
Danger!
The working attachment can cause serious or even fatal injury to persons.
X Ensure that no persons are standing inside the danger zone of the machine.
Danger!
If a large or wide attachment tool (e.g. grapple) is swivelled towards the operator's
cab, it might collide with the cab or even break through it, causing danger to the
machine operator.
X Always keep a safe distance between the moving attachment tool and the
operator's cab.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.4.13.1 Working functions
Fig. 3-87 Mini joystick, operating attachment tool
The working functions of the attachment tool are controlled by means of a mini
joystick located on the right joystick.
The further the mini joystick is moved in a particular direction, the faster the
attachment tool is moved.
In this control mode, it is not necessary to activate the attachment tool with a
separate switch as these functions are automatically activated when the servo
control is switched on.
Example: hydraulic hammer

X Push the mini joystick to the left 1.
ª The hydraulic hammer is operated.
Example: sorting grapple, scrap shears

X Push the mini joystick to the left 1.
ª The attachment tool closes.
X Push the mini joystick to the right 2.
ª The attachment tool opens. LHB/en/Edition: 07 / 2011
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.4.13.2 Rotating and adjusting
Fig. 3-88 Rotation and adjustment of attachment tool by means of mini joystick
1 Rotator (e.g. for rotating grapple)

2 Lock bolts of a hydraulic quick-change adapter system
3 Swivelling ditch cleaning bucket
L/R Direction of movement
The mini joystick on the left joystick is used to rotate or change the attachment tool.
The rotating function corresponds to the "rotate grapple" function used for grapples
and other attachment tools.
The further the mini joystick is moved in a particular direction, the faster the
attachment tool is moved.
In this control mode, it is not necessary to activate the attachment tool with a
separate switch. as these functions are automatically activated when the servo
control is switched on.
X Push mini joystick to the left L.
ª The attachment tool turns (swivels) to the left.
X Push the mini joystick to the right R.
ª The attachment tool turns (swivels) to the right.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.4.14 Changeover of joystick control (optional equipment)
Fig. 3-89 Changeover of control
Depending on the selected mode, the attachment tool is operated with the mini
joystick (movement 1 and 2) or with the joystick (movement e and f).
To change from one control mode to the other, turn the key switch S405 in the right
control console.
X Turn the key switch S405 to position 1.
ª Control changeover is activated.
X Turn the key switch S405 back to position 0.
ª The indicator light H322 is off.
ª Control changeover is deactivated.
If the control is changed over, the tilting system is disabled.
Function Changeover
off (0) on (1)

Tilting system e+f -
Attachment tool 1+2 e+f
X Operate the attachment tool according to the current control mode.
3.4.15 Magnetic system (option)

With a magnetic system, optional equipment such as magnets for transferring scrap
can be operated. The magnetic system is turned on by pressing switch S46 on the
right control panel and is operated electronically using a button in the joystick.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Installation and removal of attachment parts
Fig. 3-90 Operating the magnetic system
X Press switch S46.

ª The magnetic system function is turned on.
ª The engine RPM P4 increases to level 8.
ª The sensor controlled low idle automatic S20 no longer functions.
Danger!
The magnet can loose its load in the event of a loss of current.
X Always ensure that no one is standing beneath the load.
X Do not press push button S6L or switch S55 unintentionally.
Control in the right joystick:

X Press the left push button S6L.
ª The magnet is activated.
X Press the left push button S6L again.
ª The magnet is deactivated.
Control in left joystick (American version):

X Push switch S55 up.
ª The magnet is activated.
X Push switch S55 down .
ª The magnet is deactivated.
3.5 Installation and removal of attachment parts
3.5.1 Safety Instructions

3.5.1.1 Installation and removal of attachment parts

– Equipment and attachment parts made by other manufacturers or those which do
not have LIEBHERR’s general approval for installation may not be installed on the
machine without prior written approval by LIEBHERR.
LIEBHERR must be provided with the required technical documentation
necessary for this purpose.
– Set the machine on a level and stable ground prior to any work with attachments.
– Lock the uppercarriage with the locking pin to the undercarriage.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
– Do not position yourself under a raised attachment that has not been adequately
and securely supported.
– Never place yourself under a machine while it is elevated.
– Remove hydraulic system pressure before working on any attachments (as
described in this operating manual).
– Do not attempt to lift heavy parts. Use suitable lifting devices with sufficient load
carrying capacity.
– Insure any lifting system or lifting device that is used is in good repair and
adequately rated for the component or machine to be supported. Always wear
work gloves when handling wire cables.
– When working on the equipment: Switch off the diesel engine, remove the key
and turn the safety lever upward.
– During repairs: Make sure that the hydraulic lines are properly attached and that
all fittings and connections are properly tightened.
– As soon as an attachment part is removed and supported, cover or cap the
openings in the hydraulic circuit to prevent dirt infiltration. Permit only authorized
persons near the machine or the lifting device.
3.5.1.2 Removal and installation of attachment pins

– Never use your fingers to align pin bores. If possible, always use a hydraulic pin
pulling device to push out the pins on the attachment.
– If pins must be removed with a sledge hammer, use a punch and a guide tube
held by another person.
– To drive out a pin, install the impact screw from the tool box in the threaded bore
of the pin and hit the screw only.
– For the installation of a pin retained with castle nut and cotter pin, drive the pin in
first to the stop, then install the castle nut by hand until contact and tighten it only
to the point where the cotter pin can be installed.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5.2 Installation and removal of digging tool
Fig. 3-91 Installation and removal of digging tools
The following is a description of the installation and removal of digging tools. Digging
tools include backhoe bucket, ditch cleaning buckets or ripper.
3.5.2.1 Removing the digging tool

X Position the attachment in such a way that the entire bottom part of the digging
tool is laying on the ground.
X Unscrew the locking plate 5 and remove the locking plate 6 and knock out pin 3
and pin 4.
X If necessary, raise the attachment slightly when knocking out pin 4 to relieve it.
3.5.2.2 Installing a new digging tool

X Position the digging tool to be installed in such a way that its entire flat bottom is
laying on the ground.

X Start the engine and move the attachment until the bucket stick bearing and the
bearing points 1 of the digging tool are aligned.
X Guide in pin 4 and secure it with plate 6.
X Extend the bucket cylinder slowly until the bore hole in the connecting link 7 is
located precisely between the bearing points 2.
X Guide in pin 3 and secure it with plate 5.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
X Grease all lube points on pins 3 and 4 until clean grease emerges on the
corresponding bearing points.
3.5.2.3 Bucket cylinder operation

Two hydraulic lines on the stick are used either for bucket cylinder operation or
grapple operation.
The lines are switchable via a valve block 15:
– a - Bucket cylinder operation (for digging tools)
– b - Grapple operation (for grapple, scrap cutter etc.)
X Turn the both square head bolts on valve block 15 in such a way that the markings
are positioned transverse to the travel direction (position a, bucket cylinder
operation).
Note!
If the machine is equipped with a hydraulic quick change adapter and LIKUFIX, it
is not necessary to switch between bucket cylinder operation and grapple
operation. There is no valve block 15.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5.3 Attachment of grapple to bucket stick
Fig. 3-92 Attaching grapple to bucket stick
Danger!
Risk of injury
X Ensure that the machine operator follows the instructions of the instructor when
moving the equipment.
Two workers are required to attach or remove the grapple.
3.5.3.1 Attaching grapple

Before attaching a clamshell grab or multiple grab, ensure that the necessary
hydraulic lines for grapple operation are mounted to the bucket stick.
The grapple must be in a stable position (grabs fully opened).
X If necessary, dismantle the digging bucket.
X Move the attachment in order to position the bucket stick between the bearing
points of the grapple suspension 1.
X Insert the bolts 2 and secure them with the plate 3.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Caution!
The hydraulic lines are under pressure.
X Before connecting the hydraulic lines, depressurise them using the joystick
(switch off diesel engine, turn ignition key to contact position, operate the
joystick and press the buttons of the "Rotate grapple" function).

X Connect the hydraulic hoses 4 and 5 (for the supply of the grab cylinders) to the
pipelines.
X For grapples with hydraulic rotator, also connect the hydraulic hoses 6 and 7 to
the pipelines for this auxiliary equipment.
3.5.3.2 Attachment of connecting link
Fig. 3-93 Securing of connecting link
After the grapple has been removed, secure the connecting link 1. There are various
ways to do this (depending on the machine equipment).
X Fully retract the bucket tilt cylinder 6.
X Attach the holder 5 to the change lever 2.
X Insert the securing device 3 in the connecting link 1 and mount it to the holder 5.
X Insert securing plugs 4 on both sides.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5.3.3 Changeover to grapple operation
Fig. 3-94 Valve block for tilt cylinder operation / grapple operation
Two hydraulic lines on the bucket stick are used for the operation of the tilt cylinder
or the grapple.
The lines are switchable by means of a valve block:
– a - Tilt cylinder operation (for digging buckets)
– b - Grapple operation (for grapples, scrap shears, etc.)
Note
If the machine is equipped with a quick-change adapter and LIKUFIX, there is no
need for this changeover. The valve block is therefore omitted.
X Turn the two square head screws on the valve block until the marks are aligned
in the direction of travel (position b, grapple operation).
X Complete all working movements several times without load (opening and closing
grapple, moving grapple to the right and left) in order to let any trapped air escape
from the hydraulic circuits.
3.5.3.4 Removing grapple

X If necessary, remove the securing device 3 from the connecting link.
X Fully open the grabs and place the grapple in a vertical position on level ground.
Caution!
X Before disconnecting the hydraulic lines, depressurise them using the joystick

X Disconnect the hydraulic hoses from the pipelines on the bucket stick.
X Immediately seal open lines to prevent dirt from entering the system.
X Prop up the grapple to ensure that it cannot topple over.
X Unscrew the plate 3 and carefully drive out the bolt 2. To do this, you might have
to start the diesel engine and lift the attachment slightly from the ground.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5.4 Attachment of grapple to industrial stick
Fig. 3-95 Attaching grapple to industrial stick
Danger!
Risk of injury!
X Ensure that the machine operator follows the hand signal instructions of the
instructor when moving the equipment.
Two workers are required to attach or remove the grapple.
3.5.4.1 Attaching grapple

Before attaching a clamshell grab or multiple grab, ensure that the necessary
hydraulic lines for grapple operation are mounted on the stick.
The grapple must be in a stable position (grabs fully opened).
X Move the attachment in order to position the industrial stick between the bearing
points of the grapple suspension 1.
X Insert the bolts 2 and secure them with the plate 3.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Caution!

X Connect the hydraulic hoses 4 and 5 (for the supply of the grab cylinders) to the
pipelines.
X For grapples with hydraulic rotator, also connect the hydraulic hoses 6 and 7 to
the pipelines for this auxiliary equipment.
X Complete all working movements several times without load (opening and closing
grapple, moving grapple to the right and left) in order to let any trapped air escape
from the hydraulic circuits.
3.5.4.2 Removing grapple

X Fully open the grabs and place the grapple in a vertical position on level ground.
Caution!

X Disconnect the hydraulic hoses from the pipelines on the stick.
X Immediately seal open lines to prevent dirt from entering the system.
X Prop up the grapple to ensure that it cannot topple over.
X Unscrew the plate 3 and carefully drive out the bolt 2. To do this, you might have
to start the diesel engine and lift the attachment slightly from the ground.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5.5 Multi-coupling system (optional equipment)
3.5.5.1 Overview
Fig. 3-96 Overview
1 Stick 2 Coupling
3 Hand lever 4 Locking mechanism
5 Securing mechanism 6 Protective cover
7 Coupling plate of working tool 8 Multi-function lever
9 Pressure release device
The multi-coupling system allows you to connect and disconnect several hydraulic
lines at the same time. The working tool can thus be quickly connected to the stick.
Fig. 3-97 Securing mechanism
A safety pin retains the locking lever, thus preventing inadvertent opening of the
coupling. The coupling is properly secured when the safety pin is engaged. The
locking lever is only released by the safety pin after the pressure has been fully
released. The coupling can then be opened.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5.5.2 Pressure release device
Fig. 3-98 Pressure release device of the coupling
Caution!
The hydraulic lines are under pressure! The hand lever could thus be moved back
with force, causing injury to the operator.
X Before connecting/disconnecting the hydraulic lines, depressurise them using
the joystick (switch off diesel engine, turn ignition key to contact position,
operate the joystick and press the buttons of the "Rotate grapple" function).
X Open the pressure release device of the coupling.
The pressure release device of the coupling is operated with the multi-function lever
from the toolbox.
X Attach the multi-function lever and turn it as follows:
A = Pressure release device closed (operation)
B = Pressure release device open (opening/closing coupling)
3.5.5.3 Working tool
Fig. 3-99 Positioning grapple
When opening or closing the coupling, ensure that the working tool is in a stable
position. The grapple must be positioned between the machine and the stick (see
Fig. 3-99). This allows for better access to the coupling.
X Before connecting the coupling, attach the working tool to the machine (see
respective chapter).
X Remove the working tool from the machine only when the coupling has been
opened.
X Check the coupling parts for dirt and clean them if necessary with a clean oil-
soaked cloth.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
X After connection with the coupling, test the working tool functions.
3.5.5.4 Opening coupling
Fig. 3-100 Opening pressure release device, releasing locking mechanism and
moving hand lever down
X Complete pressure release from the machine (joystick).

X Attach the multi-function lever and open the pressure release device of the
coupling.
X Pull the locking mechanism upwards and move the hand lever down.
ª The coupling is opened.
X Pull out the coupling plate (or protective cover).
3.5.5.5 Closing coupling
Fig. 3-101 Inserting the coupling plate, moving hand lever up and closing pressure
release device
X Fully insert the coupling plate (or protective cover) in the coupling to the stop.
X Move the hand lever up.

ª The coupling is closed, and the lines are connected.
X Ensure that the safety pin is engaged.
X Close the pressure release device of the coupling.
X Remove the multi-function lever.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5.6 Industrial stick with mechanical quick-change adapter

(optional equipment)
The industrial stick with mechanical quick-change adapter allows for the fast and
easy exchange of working tools.
3.5.6.1 Safety information

– First familiarise yourself with the functions and operation of the quick-change
adapter (without attached working tools).
– Before locking or releasing the quick-change adapter, tilt the safety lever
upwards.
– When attaching and removing working tools, ensure that no persons are located
in the working area of the tool.
– During mounting and removing, move the working tool only at minimum speed,
and only if absolutely necessary.
– Position the working tool as little above the ground as is necessary before starting
the locking or release procedure, in order to avoid dangerous movements.
– If required, use a pedestal or working platform to reach the locking bolts and
connections. Do not stand on the working tool.
– Check the locking screw every day to ensure that it is properly tightened.
– The quick-change adapter is equipped with an integrated safety load hook for the
safe attachment of lifting tackle, such as cables or chains. To use lifting tackle,
you must use a suspension system with a safety load hook.
– Switch on the magnet system (optional equipment) while attaching or removing
the working tool.
3.5.6.2 Positioning option
Fig. 3-102 Example: Load hook in frame (bearing block)
Working tools that are prone to tilting or cannot be placed on the ground must be
secured. For attachment and removal use suitable equipment (e.g. frames, etc.).
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5.6.3 Overview
Fig. 3-103 Industrial stick with mechanical quick-change adapter
1 Locking bolt (extended) 2 Locking screw

3 Crank 4 Load hook
5 Stick 6 Suspension at the working tool
3.5.6.4 Releasing and locking
Fig. 3-104 Releasing and locking
X Turn the locking screw anticlockwise and remove it (A).

X Insert the crank into the locking bolt and turn it anticlockwise until both locking
bolts are inserted to the stop (B).
ª The quick-change adapter is released.
X Remove or attach the working tool.
X Insert the crank into the locking bolt and turn it clockwise until both locking bolts
are screwed out to the stop (C).

ª The quick-change adapter is locked.
X Turn the locking screw clockwise (D).
ª The quick-change adapter is secured.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5.6.5 Attaching working tool

The working tool must be securely positioned on the ground or secured in a
frame.
X Switch off the magnet system (if installed).
Fig. 3-105 Releasing and attaching working tool
X Screw out the locking screw.

X Release the quick-change adapter.
X Move the industrial stick in such a way that the load hook can be engaged at the
bolts of the suspension.
X Lift the attachment a little of the ground so that it is suspended freely.
ª The suspension is centred in the quick-change adapter.
Danger!
Prior to locking, there is no secured connection between the working tool and the
quick-change adapter. The working tool can therefore become dislodged, causing
serious injury.
X Approach the quick-change adapter with great care.
X Tilt the safety lever upwards in order to secure the working tool against
inadvertent movement.
Fig. 3-106 Locking
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
X Lock the quick-change adapter.

ª When properly mounted, the working tool is secured with the pins.
X Screw in the locking screw.
X If installed: Loosen the locking screw 1 (optional equipment) at the suspension
(unless the locking screw is loosened, the working tool cannot be moved freely).
Caution!
joystick).
X Connect all hydraulic or electrical lines (e.g. for the attachment of a grapple).
X The safe mounting of the working tool must be checked with a proper visual
inspection.
Danger!
An improperly locking quick-change adapter might inadvertently become released
during operation!
X Ensure that the locking bolts are secured with locking screw.
X Check the locking screw every day to ensure that it is properly tightened.
3.5.6.6 Dismantling working tool
Fig. 3-107 Releasing
X Lift the working tool a little of the ground so that it is suspended freely.
X If in place: Tighten the locking screw 1 (optional equipment) at the suspension
(without tightening the screw, the suspension would tilt to the side during removal,
so that it would be difficult to take it up at the next attachment).
Caution!
joystick).
X Disconnect all hydraulic or electrical lines to the working tool (e.g. for the removal
of a grapple).
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Danger!
Risk of injury!
After the working tool is released, it is fully disconnected from the machine. There
is a risk that the working tool becomes inadvertently dislodged.
X Ensure that the working tool cannot be moved by a third party while you carry
out this task.
X Position the working tool as little above the ground as is necessary before
starting the release procedure, in order to avoid dangerous movements.
X Screw out locking screw.

Fig. 3-108 Disconnecting working tool
X Place the working tool on the ground or on a frame.

X Move the industrial stick in such a way that the load hook is disengaged from the
bolt of the suspension.
X Move the attachment away from the working tool.
3.5.7 Industrial stick with hydraulic quick-change adapter

The industrial stick with hydraulic quick-change adapter allows for the fast and easy
exchange of attachment tools.

adapter (without attached tool).
– When attaching and removing attachment tools, ensure that no persons are
standing in the working area of the attachment.
– During mounting and removing, move the attachment tool only at minimum
speed, and only if absolutely necessary.
– If the buzzer and the "quick-change adapter" icon are on and you are NOT
carrying out an intended locking or release procedure, immediately shut down the
machine. If these indicating elements are not on when you are carrying out an
intended locking or release procedure, immediately stop the procedure.
This can occur if a lock bolt has inadvertently become dislodged, or if a
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
mechanical, hydraulic or electrical fault occurs. Only resume operation after the
defective part has been repaired or replaced.
– The quick-change adapter is equipped with an integrated safety load hook for the
– While attaching or removing attachment tools, ensure that the magnet system
(optional equipment) is switched off.
3.5.7.2 Disconnecting option
Fig. 3-109 Example: load hook in frame (bearing block)
Attachment tools that are prone to tilting or cannot be placed on the ground must be
secured. For attachment and removal, use suitable equipment (e.g. frames, etc.).
3.5.7.3 Overview
Fig. 3-110 Industrial stick with hydraulic quick-change adapter
A Industrial stick B Suspension device of attachment

tool
1 Lock bolt 2 Half shell at suspension tackle
3.5.7.4 Operation and function control

To operate the quick-change adapter, you must simultaneously actuate two control
elements (two-hand operation). With one hand, start the quick-change adapter. Use
the other hand to control the movement of the lock bolts.
During release, the "quick-change adapter" icon is displayed on the screen. This
icon, together with a buzzer warning sound, indicates that the quick-change adapter
is not locked.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Releasing and locking of adapter by means of push buttons (standard

equipment):
Fig. 3-111 Releasing and locking of adapter by means of push buttons*
* In machines with optional equipment, the quick-change adapter can be controlled by operating
the left or right joystick.
This is only possible, if the auxiliary function is activated (switch 19, LED on).
X Press and hold the button S47.
ª The quick-change adapter is activated.
ª A buzzer sound is emitted.
ª The "quick-change adapter" icon appears on the screen.
ª The "quick-change adapter" icon on the screen disappears.
Locking and releasing quick-change adapter with the mini joystick (optional
equipment):
Fig. 3-112 Locking and releasing quick-change adapter with the mini joystick
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
The mini joystick on the left joystick is used to operate the lock bolts.
X Push the mini joystick to the right R and hold it there.
X Push the mini joystick to the left L and hold it there.
3.5.7.5 Attaching tools

The attachment tool must be safely positioned on the ground or secured in a
frame.
The attachment tool must be in such a position that the openings of the half shells
face upwards or away from the machine.
X Switch off the magnet system (optional equipment).
Fig. 3-113 Releasing adapter and attaching tool

X Release all buttons.
X Move the industrial stick in such a way that the front side is inserted between the
half shells of the suspension tackle.
ª If positioned correctly, the lock bolts are aligned with the bores of the grapple
suspension.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Fig. 3-114 Locking

X If in place: Loosen the locking screw 1 (optional equipment) at the suspension
(unless the locking screw is loosened, the attachment tool cannot be moved
freely).
Caution!
The hydraulic lines are under pressure!
joystick).
X Connect the hydraulic or electrical lines as required (e.g. for the attachment of a
grapple).
X Check the attachment tool for proper fixture by carrying out a visual inspection.
3.5.7.6 Removing attachment tool

The attachment tool must be in a stable position.
If required, a support structure (frame) must be used.
Danger!
After the attachment tool is released, it is not any more secured to the machine. The
attachment tool might thus become dislodged and cause serious injury.
X Before releasing the quick-change adapter, place the attachment tool on the
ground.

X Fully open the jaws of grapples.

X Place the attachment tool without load on the ground or in a suitable frame.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Fig. 3-115 Tightening the locking screw, disconnecting the lines and releasing
quick-change adapter
X If in place: Tighten the locking screws 1 (optional equipment) at the suspension

system.
ª The tightened locking screw ensures that the suspension system cannot tilt to
the side while the tool is being attached.
Caution!
X Before disconnecting the hydraulic lines, depressurise them using the joysticks
joysticks).
X Disconnect all hydraulic or electrical lines to the attachment tool (e.g. for the
removal of a grapple).
Fig. 3-116 Disconnecting attachment tool

X Move the industrial stick in such a way that the front side is disengaged from the
half shells.
X Attach a different tool.
- alternatively -
Lock the quick-change adapter without attaching a tool to switch off the buzzer.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5.7.7 Acknowledging buzzer signal (warning signal)

After the working tool has been removed, the buzzer (warning signal) sounds as long
as the system is not locked.
If the overload warning system is switched on, the warning buzzer can be
acknowledged.
If no working tool is to be mounted, it is useful to deactivate the warning signal. This
is also recommended to ensure that another buzzer sound (i.e. from the overload
warning system) is actually audible.
ª The buzzer is switched off.
ª The "quick-change adapter" icon remains displayed.
Note!
The acoustic warning signal is automatically reactivated when the system is locked
again.
X In order to activate the warning buzzer, lock the system once.
ª The buzzer and warning sound are on at the next release process.
3.5.8 LIKUFIX MH 40 quick-coupling system (optional equipment)

The LIKUFIX MH 40 quick-coupling system allows for the fast and efficient exchange
of attachment tools without having to leave the operator's cab. Hydraulic and
electrical connections are thereby automatically disconnected and connected.

– First familiarise yourself with the functions and operation of the quick-coupling
system (without attached tools).
– When attaching and removing attachment tools, ensure that no persons are
standing in the working area of the attachment.
– The quick-coupling system is equipped with an integrated safety load hook for the
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5.8.2 Disconnecting option
Fig. 3-117 Example: load hook in frame (bearing block)
Attachment tools that are prone to tilting or cannot be placed on the ground must be
secured. For attachment and removal, use suitable equipment (e.g. frames, etc.).
3.5.8.3 Overview
Fig. 3-118 LIKUFIX MH 40 quick-coupling system
A Top section (at attachment) B Bottom section (at attachment tool)

1 Lock bolt 2 Check pin
3 LIKUFIX at machine 4 LIKUFIX at attachment tool
5 Guide bolt 6 Protective cover / top section
7 Protective cover / bottom section

To operate the quick-coupling system, you must simultaneously actuate two control
elements (two-hand operation). With one hand, start the quick-coupling system. Use
the other hand to control the movement of the lock bolts.
The check pin (see Fig. 3-118) is an auxiliary tool that indicates the position of the
lock bolts.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
– Check pin visible (extended): The quick-coupling system is released.

– Check pin retracted: The quick-coupling system is locked.
is not locked.
Releasing and locking of coupling system by means of push buttons (standard

equipment):
Fig. 3-119 Releasing and locking of coupling system by means of push buttons*
* In machines with optional equipment, the quick-coupling system can be controlled by operating
ª The quick-coupling system is activated.
X Press and hold the button R until the check pins are fully extended.
ª The check pins are visible.
ª The quick-coupling system is released.
X Press and hold the button L until the check pins are fully retracted.
ª The check pins are retracted.
ª The quick-coupling system is locked.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Locking and releasing coupling with the mini joystick (optional equipment):
Fig. 3-120 Locking and releasing coupling with the mini joystick
ª The quick-coupling system is activated.
X Push the mini joystick to the right R and hold it in that position until the check pins
are fully extended.
ª The check pins are visible.
ª The quick-coupling system is released.
X Push the mini joystick to the left L and hold it in that position until the check pins
are fully retracted.
ª The check pins are retracted.
ª The quick-coupling system is locked.

The attachment tool must be safely positioned on the ground or secured in a
frame.
Fig. 3-121 Releasing, lowering top section
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
X Release the quick-coupling system.

X If necessary, adjust the position.
X Slowly lower the top section and place it carefully on the bottom section.
X Continue lowering the top section until the guide bolts are fully inserted in the
bores provided.
Fig. 3-122 Locking
X Lock the quick-coupling system.


If required, a support structure (frame) must be used.
Danger!
After the attachment tool is released, the upper and bottom sections are not any
more secured to each other. The attachment tool might thus become dislodged and
cause serious injury.
X Before releasing the quick-coupling system, place the attachment tool on the
ground.

X Fully open the jaws of grapples.
X Place the attachment tool without load on the ground or in a suitable frame.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Fig. 3-123 Releasing, lifting top section
X Release the quick-coupling system.

X Slowly lift the top section.
- alternatively -
To switch off the buzzer, lock the quick-coupling system without attaching a tool.

acknowledged.
Note!
again.
3.5.9 Hydraulic quick-change adapter (optional equipment)

The hydraulic quick-change adapter allows for the fast and efficient exchange of
attachment tools without having to leave the operator's cab.
When operated in conjunction with the LIKUFIX quick-coupling system (optional
equipment), the connecting lines are automatically connected and disconnected.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS

adapter (without attached tools).
– When attaching and removing tools, ensure that no persons are standing in the
working area of the attachment.
– Position the attachment tool as little above the ground as is necessary before
starting the locking or release procedure, in order to avoid dangerous
movements.
– Check the attachment tool every day to ensure that it is properly secured. In
addition to the above check, carry out a dummy run with the attachment tool: Tilt
the attachment tool in and out (without load), lifting it only as far as this is
necessary to check proper connection (e.g. pin in bolt eye).
– The lifting capacity of the quick-change adapter or the integrated load lift hook
might be greater or smaller than that of the basic machine. Always observe the
load capacity values of the machine.
3.5.9.2 Overview
Fig. 3-124 Hydraulic quick-change adapter
1 Lock bolt (extended) 2 Mounting hook for attachment tool

3 Load lift hook

To operate the quick-change adapter, you must simultaneously actuate two control
elements (two-hand operation). With one hand, activate the quick-change adapter.
Use the other hand to control the movement of the lock bolts.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
is not locked.
Releasing and locking of quick-change adapter by means of push buttons

(standard equipment):
Fig. 3-125 Releasing and locking of adapter by means of push buttons*
* In machines with optional equipment, the quick-change adapter can be controlled by operating
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Locking and releasing attachments with the mini joystick (optional

equipment):
Fig. 3-126 Locking and releasing quick-change adapter with the mini joystick:
X Push the mini joystick to the right R and hold it there.
X Push the mini joystick to the left L and hold it there.
Fig. 3-127 Positioning attachment

The attachment tool must be placed on the ground in a stable position.

X Position the stick and the attachment tool.
X Fully retract the bucket tilt cylinder.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Fig. 3-128 Taking up attachment tool, step 1
X Position the quick-change adapter in such a way that the attachment tool can be
taken up with the mounting hooks.
Fig. 3-129 Taking up attachment tool, step 2
X Lift the attachment tool a little from the ground and fully extend the bucket tilt
cylinder until the bearing plate of the attachment tool touches the stop of the
quick-change adapter.
The bores of the quick-change adapter and the attachment tool must be properly
aligned.
Danger!
Risk of injury!
X Position the attachment tool as little above the ground as is necessary before
starting the locking procedure, in order to avoid dangerous movements.

Caution!
joystick).
copyright by
MJFCIFSS

If the working tool cannot be placed in an upright position, it must be removed in
a lying position.
Caution!
X Before disconnecting the hydraulic lines, depressurise them using the joysticks
joysticks).
X Disconnect all hydraulic or electrical lines from the attachment tool (e.g. for the
removal of a grapple).
X Fully extract the bucket tilt cylinder.
X Place the attachment tool in a slightly elevated position from the ground.
Fig. 3-130 Aligning attachment tool for release
Danger!
Risk of injury!
X Position the attachment tool as little above the ground as is necessary before

Fig. 3-131 Placing the attachment tool on the ground
X Slowly retract the bucket tilt cylinder and lower the attachment tool to the ground.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS

- alternatively -
X Lock the quick-change adapter without attaching a tool to switch off the buzzer.
3.5.10 Hydraulic quick-change adapter with LIKUFIX (optional

equipment)
The LIKUFIX quick-coupling system allows for the fast and efficient exchange of
working tools without having to leave the operator's cab. Hydraulic and electrical
connections are thereby automatically disconnected and connected.
Fig. 3-132 Quick-change adapter with LIKUFIX
1 Protective cover of quick change 2 Protective cover of working tool

adapter
3 LIKUFIX hydraulic coupling at quick- 4 LIKUFIX hydraulic coupling at
change adapter working tool
For mounting and dismantling instructions, see chapter "Hydraulic quick-change

adapter". Please observe the following additional instructions:
X Before attaching the device, remove the protective covers.
X Always keep the hydraulic couplings clean.
X Before connecting the tool, check the connections for dirt. If necessary, clean all
coupling parts and sealing surfaces with a clean cloth and oil.
X When connecting or disconnecting the hydraulic coupling, proceed slowly and
with the necessary care.
X Tilt the quick change adapter at the attachment so that the coupling plates can
easily be connected due to the weight of the working tool.
X After completion of the work, and especially before transport, mount the
protective covers.
Note!
If the hydraulic coupling cannot be easily connected to each by their own weight,
check whether a foreign object (stone, etc.) is jammed between the parts. If this is
the case, clean the coupling parts to prevent damage through subsequent coupling.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS

acknowledged.
Note!
again.
3.5.11 Mechanical quick-change adapter (optional equipment)

The mechanical quick-change adapter allows for the fast and easy exchange of
working tools.

adapter (without attached working tools).
– Before locking or releasing the quick-change adapter, tilt the safety lever
upwards.
– Ensure that the working tool cannot be moved by a third party while you carry out
this task.
– When attaching and removing working tools, ensure that no persons are located
in the working area of the tool.
– During mounting and removing, move the working tool only at minimum speed,
and only if absolutely necessary.
– Position the working tool as little above the ground as is necessary before starting
the locking or release procedure, in order to avoid dangerous movements.
– If required, use a pedestal or working platform to reach the locking bolts and
connections. Do not stand on the working tool.
– Check the locking screw every day to ensure that it is properly tightened. In
addition to the above check, carry out a dummy run with the working tool: Tilt the
working tool in and out (without load), lifting it only as far as this is necessary to
check proper connection (e.g. pin in bolt eye).
– The lifting capacity of the quick-change adapter or the integrated load lift hook
might be greater or smaller than that of the basic machine. Always observe the
load capacity values of the machine.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5.11.2 Overview
Fig. 3-133 Mechanical quick-change adapter
1 Locking bolt (extended) 2 Locking screw

3 Crank 4 Mounting hook for working tool
5 Load lift hook
3.5.11.3 Releasing and locking
Fig. 3-134 Releasing and locking
X Turn the locking screw anticlockwise and remove it (A).

X Insert the crank into the locking bolt and turn it anticlockwise until both locking
bolts are inserted to the stop (B).
X Remove or attach the working tool.

X Insert the crank into the locking bolt and turn it clockwise until both locking bolts
are screwed out to the stop (C).
X Turn the locking screw clockwise (D).
ª The quick-change adapter is secured.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5.11.4 Attaching working tool
Fig. 3-135 Positioning attachment
The working tool must be placed on the ground in a stable position.

X Position the stick and the working tool.
X Fully retract the bucket tilt cylinder.
Fig. 3-136 Taking up working tool, step 1
X Position the quick-change adapter in such a way that the working tool can be
taken up with the mounting hooks.
Fig. 3-137 Taking up working tool, step 2

X Lift the working tool a little from the ground and fully extend the bucket tilt cylinder
until the bearing plate of the working tool touches the stop of the quick-change
adapter.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
The bores of the quick-change adapter and the working tool must be properly
aligned.
Danger!
Prior to locking, there is no secured connection between the working tool and the
quick-change adapter. The working tool might become dislodged and cause
serious injury.
starting the locking procedure, in order to avoid dangerous movements.

X Screw in the locking screw.
Caution!
joystick).
X The safe mounting of the working tool must be checked with a proper visual
inspection.
3.5.11.5 Dismantling working tool

The working tool must be in a stable position.
If the working tool (e.g. grapple) cannot be placed in an upright position, it must
be removed in a horizontal position.
Caution!
joystick).
X Disconnect all hydraulic or electrical lines to the working tool (e.g. for the removal
of a grapple).
X Fully extract the bucket tilt cylinder.
X Place the working tool in a slightly elevated position from the ground.
Fig. 3-138 Aligning working tool for release
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
General working methods
Danger!
Risk of injury!
After the working tool is released, it is fully disconnected from the machine. The
working tool might become dislodged and cause serious injury.

Fig. 3-139 Placing the working tool on the ground
X Slowly retract the bucket tilt cylinder and lower the working tool to the ground.
X Move the attachment away from the working tool.
3.6 General working methods
3.6.1 Tips for the proper operation of the machine preventing

damage and wear
In order to prolong the service life of the machine and to prevent avoidable damage,
observe the following instructions:
– Do not use the machine for work where its attachment is used to hammer against
a hard material to remove it. Repeated impact of the working attachment against
hard materials results in damage to the steel structure and the machine
components.
– Under certain circumstances, where a particular type of boom, stick and working
tool are combined, there is a risk that the tool collides with the operator's cab. This
can result in damage to the operator's cab, and the operator might suffer injury.
– The use of the slewing gear for drilling material is not permitted.
– Do not lift the machine by propping it up with the attachment. If this happens by
accident, slowly lower the machine back onto the ground. Do not lower the
machine quickly onto the ground, and do not attempt to dampen this movement
with the hydraulics, as this can damage the machine.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Caution!
Incorrect operation of the attachment (e.g. backhoe bucket, concrete crusher, scrap
shear, hydraulic hammer, swivelling rotator, stick extension) might result in an
excessive load of the attachment.
The load on the attachment is greatest
– when the hydraulic cylinders are fully retracted (in end position)
– when the hydraulic cylinders are fully extended (in end position)
– when the attachment is fully extended
There is a risk of damage to parts of the equipment, to the hydraulic cylinders and
to the machine.
X Do not fully extend or retract the hydraulic cylinders.
X When the hydraulic cylinders are near the end positions (limit range), move them
only slowly and with great caution.
X When swivelling the attachment, maintain a minimum distance of 10° to the end
position to the tilt cylinder.
Fig. 3-140 Permissible working range for hydraulic cylinders
1 Possible swivel range 2 Permissible working range with 10 °

distance to end position
3 Limit range 4 Boom or stick
5 Hydraulic cylinder
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.6.2 Preparation
Fig. 3-141 Safe working: observe machine range and danger zones
Danger!
Risk to life and limb when the machine is swivelled.
X Ensure that no persons are standing inside the danger area r of the machine.
Caution!
Risk of injury during work.
X Always wear safety footwear. If required by the nature of the work to be carried
out, wear hard hat and protective goggles.
X Always wear the safety belt.
X Before starting work, operate the horn to warn other workers.
X Position the transport vehicle and the machine in such a way that the machine
operator can properly supervise the transfer of the load.
X If possible, position the machine at a higher point than the transport vehicle, in
order to avoid unnecessary lifting of the load.
X Lock the oscillating axle.
X Extend the supports until the wheels are fully lifted from the ground.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.6.3 Working with grapples
Danger!
Risk to life and limb or damage to the machine by swinging grapple:
– The grapple can collide with and damage the operator's cab and injure the
operator.
– The grapple can also injure other persons.
– A swinging grapple can also affect the stability of the machine.
X Prevent the grapple from swinging near the operator's cab.
X Ensure that the stick is in a position where the grapple cannot collide with the
machine when the excavator travels or when the brakes are applied.
X Move the joystick slowly and smoothly to prevent swinging of the grapple.
X Ensure that the moving grapple cannot collide with persons.
X Do not lift heavy loads with a fully extended boom and stick. Do not move loads
to the far right or left.
X Observe the load lift chart showing the permissible lift loads that can be attached
to the end of the stick, depending on its actual extension.
3.6.4 Excavating and moving material with grapples

Put the machine into its working position.
Fig. 3-142 Clamshell bucket: align stick, close jaws, lift excavated material
Align stick (1):

X Open the claws fully.
X Lower the stick vertically to excavated area.
Closing jaws (2):
Danger!
When being closed, the clamshell bucket might lift the machine. As a result, the
machine might inadvertently roll away.
X Avoid situations where the machine could become unstable by lifting the
equipment sufficiently before closing the grapple.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
X Close the jaws.

X Lift the stick only slightly in order to relieve the pressure on the ground.
To lift excavated material (3):

X Close the jaws.
X Lift the boom.
X Move the machine to the unloading area (e.g. transport vehicle).
Fig. 3-143 Releasing excavated material
X Swivel the stick as far possible in order to prevent any risk from the slewing
bucket.
X Open the jaws and release the excavated material.
3.6.5 Loading operation
Danger!
There is always a risk that the hydraulic excavator might topple over! Subsiding of
the supports could have disastrous consequences!
X Always inspect the bearing surface of the supports (load-bearing capacity of the
ground).
X All machine movements must be controlled with particular care.
X Observe the load lift chart showing the permissible lift loads that can be attached
to the end of the stick, depending on its actual extension.
Fig. 3-144 Taking up the load
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Note!
Maximum lifting capacity is given, when the load is taken up as closely as possible
near the undercarriage.
Fig. 3-145 Loading operation
X Carefully lift the load.

X Keep the load as close as possible to the undercarriage, while keeping a sufficient
safety distance to the operator's cab (swinging grapple!). Keep the load as near
as possible to the ground when moving.
X Swivel the attachment carefully across the loading platform of the transport
vehicle or across the unloading area.
X Place the load on the platform (open the grapple).
Danger!
Risk to life and limb from suspended loads that become dislodged during loading
onto the transport vehicle.
X Do not overload the transport vehicle and ensure that the load cannot fall from
the platform.
X While loading the vehicle, ensure that no persons are in the danger area of the
excavator or in the transport vehicle.
X Never swivel the equipment over the driver's cab.
Caution!
Especially when moving timber, it might be necessary to move the machine while
the loaded attachment is lifted. In this case, the centre of gravity of the machine is
shifted vertically and thus higher than normal. The travel behaviour of the machine
is greatly affected by this.

X Observe the instructions in chapter "Safe use of machine for goods handling".
3.6.6 Load lifting operation

Load lifting operation includes all manoeuvres where loads attached to the machine
with lifting tackle (cables, chains, etc.) are lifted, transferred and lowered, whereby
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
the load must be attached manually to the machine. Loading operations thus also
include lifting and lowering of pipelines, shaft rings and vessels.
Danger!
The machine may only be used for lifting operations, if it is equipped with the
necessary safety devices and when these devices are in proper working order.
According to the European standard EN 474-5, machines used to lift loads must be
equipped with the following safety devices:
– Lifting tackle that allows for the safe attachment of a load (optional
equipment)
An example of a safe lifting tackle are lift hooks that are attached to the machine
instead of the digging bucket. Load lift hooks may be replaced with safety hooks
welded to the digging bucket.
– Overload warning system (optional equipment)
If the actual load reaches or even exceeds the permissible load according to the
load lift chart, the overload warning system must generate a visual and audible
alarm signal to the machine operator.
– Pipe fracture safety valve at the boom cylinders
The pipe fracture safety valve must conform to the requirements laid down in ISO
8643.
– Load lift chart in the operator's cab
If one or more of the above requirements is not met, the machine may not be
used for load lifting operations.
3.6.7 Use of quick-change adapter for load lifting operation
Fig. 3-146 Lifting operation with load hook
1 Load lift hook 2 Lifting tackle

3 Hook for working tool (not suitable for load lifting operation)
A Permissible swivelling range
The quick-change adapter is equipped with two integrated load lift hooks for lifting
operation.
The maximum lifting capacity of the individual load lift hooks is indicated at the quick-
change adapter. The load capacity might be below or above that of the basic
machine. Always observe the load capacity values of the machine.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Load-lifting work can be carried out with or without an attached working tool. If a
working tool is mounted and the machine is used to lift loads, we recommend fully
retracting the locking pins. This prevents that the lifting tackle is deflected by the
locking pins, as this could cause damage.
Danger!
If a load is lifted incorrectly, it might become dislodged, which in turn could result in
serious accidents.
X To lift loads, always use the load hooks 1 and never the hook for the working
tool.
X Adjust the quick-change adapter position so that the load hook 1 opens upwards
and is within the permissible swivel range A.
X Attach the load to the load hook according to the instructions in chapter "lifting
operation".
3.6.8 Overload warning system (optional equipment)
3.6.8.1 General
The overload warning system warns the machine operator with a visual signal on the
screen and an acoustic signal (buzzer sound) when the permissible maximum load
is reached.
The overload warning system therefore helps prevent dangerous situations where
the permissible load moment is inadvertently exceeded. In the event of a warning
signal, reduce the extension of the attachment or lower the load to the ground without
increasing the extension.
Even if the overload warning system is used, it remains the responsibility of the
machine operator to ensure that only loads of a known weight that is below the
maximum permissible load of the machine are lifted. Also observe the applicable
statutory accident prevention regulations.
The permissible maximum load depends on the machine equipment (undercarriage,
attachments) and is shown on the load table in the operator's cab.
When the machine is standing on firm and level ground and the oscillating axle is
locked, the uppercarriage can be swivelled by 360°.
The load lift values in the table correspond to max. 75 % of the tip load or 87 % of the
hydraulic lifting power according to ISO 10567.
If the overload warning system is defective, it is prohibited to lift loads. The system
must be repaired by a specialist technician.
The overload warning system must be tested prior to the commissioning of the
machine and then every year by a specialist technician, in accordance with the
testing and setting installations in the service manual.
Note!
The load values might vary, depending on the attached tools and attachments.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Note!
The overload warning system must be tested prior to the commissioning of the
machine and then every year by a specialist technician, in accordance with the
testing and setting installations in the service manual.
3.6.8.2 Operating principle

The overload warning system consists of a pressure switch connected to the piston
side of the boom cylinders.
If the hydraulic pressure in the boom cylinders reaches the limit value, the pressure
switch generates a signal. A warning symbol is displayed on the screen and an
audible warning signal (buzzer) is emitted.
The limit value is set within the range of the stability factors.
3.6.8.3 Start-up
Danger!
The overload warning system does not disable the machine when the permissible
load moment is exceeded. The operator is only informed that the limit value is
exceeded.
X When the overload warning system has been triggered, do not exceed the load
or outreach.

ª The overload warning system is activated.
3.6.8.4 Functional test

Before each shift, the machine operator must check whether the overload warning
system is working properly:
X Lift the boom and extend the boom cylinders to the stop.
X Continue moving the joystick in direction "lifting boom".
ª The warning symbol must now appear on the screen.
ª The buzzer must sound.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Parking and exiting machine
3.7 Parking and exiting machine
Fig. 3-147 Parking
1 Brake pedal (operating brake) S30 Travel direction switch

S16 Switch / parking brake
Before exiting the machine, apply the parking brake and release the operating brake.
X Set the travel direction switch S30 to its neutral position 0.
ª The parking brake S16 is applied.
X Switch off the diesel engine.
X To release the operating brake 1: Release the retainer (see arrow), using your
foot.
3.8 Transport
3.8.1 Safety instructions

– Insure that the transporting vehicle or truck trailer is rated for the intended
machine weight and size.
– Park the machine on a level surface and chock the track chains and/or wheels.
– During transport, remove parts of the attachment that create an over width or
length condition, if necessary.
– Clean the undercarriage. The undercarriage must be swept clean, meaning, the
chains / wheels must be free of snow, ice and sludge prior to driving onto the
transporting vehicle.
– Align the machine precisely with the loading ramp.
– Attach the manual lever for sensitive driving (crawler excavator) to the driving
pedals.
– Have another person guide and signal the operator.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Transport
– On wheel models equipped with an uppercarriage locking mechanism, the

uppercarriage must be secured to the undercarriage with the locking pin after
loading onto the trailer.
– Secure the machine and any loose components with tiedowns in accordance with
any applicable national regulations.
– Release all pressure lines (as described in this operating manual), remove the
ignition key and pull the safety lever up prior to leaving the machine.
– Close all cab and panel doors.
– Verify that no one remains on the machine during the transport.
– Investigate the travel route, specifically in reference to limits for width, height and
weight prior to the transport.
– Pay special attention when driving under electrical lines and bridges and when
passing through tunnels.
– Use the same care for unloading as for loading.
3.8.2 Transporting the machine on a low loader
3.8.2.1 Preparations
Before driving onto the low loader, make the following arrangements:
X Have the wheel chocks ready.
X Remove ice, snow and mud from the tires, ramp and loading area before driving
up the ramp.
X If necessary detach the stick and attachment.
The angle should not be too great if the transportation vehicle will be driven up a
ramp or similar. Gradient W <= 10º.
Fig. 3-148 Loading ramp
3.8.2.2 Loading the machine onto the low loader

X If necessary detach the trailer for loading.
X Precisely align the machine with the low loader and drive up.
Note
Note
Have a signaller provide the necessary signals.

X Re-connect the trailer and raise the low bed.

X Lower the boom
X Press switch S16.
ª Parking brake is engaged.
ª LED in switch illuminates.
X Shout down the engine.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Transport
X Turn the ignition key to the on position and relieve the pressure lines by carefully
moving the joystick several times.
X Remove the ignition key and push the safety lever up.
X Close and lock all doors, covers and panels on the machine.
X Fold in the mirror.
To secure the machine:
Fig. 3-149 Securing the machine
The machine must be secured against slipping before starting the journey.
Danger!
Serious accidents can occur if the machine is allowed to slip on the low loader.
X Secure the machine against slipping.
X Use wheel chocks and a tension cable or tension chains for this purpose
X Diagonally secure the machine using tension cables or chains at the points
identified by the information sign “Lashing point” (see Fig. 3-149).
X Secure tension cables and tension chains to the low loader (dependent on
model).
Transport route:
Danger!
Danger
Driving beneath obstacles which are too low can cause serious accidents.
X Drive under obstacles, particularly electrical lines, with increased caution.
X Find out about the route before starting the journey.

copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Transport
3.8.3 Loading the machine with a crane
Danger!
The load could slip or fall if incorrectly loaded.
X Only permit experienced personnel to secure loads and signal the crane driver.
X The signaller must be in eye or voice contact with the operator.
X Ensure that the lifting tackle is sufficiently long.
X Only use cargo loading gear which is sufficiently dimensioned or which has been
specially developed by LIEBHERR for this purpose.
Fig. 3-150 Lifting the machine
X Lower the boom.

X Press switch S16.
ª Parking brake is engaged.
ª LED in switch illuminates.
X Turn the ignition key to the on position and relieve the pressure lines by carefully
moving the joystick several times.
X Remove the ignition key and push the safety lever up.
X Close and lock all doors, covers and panels on the machine.
X Fold in the mirror.
X Attach the loading gear to the points marked with the information sign "Lifting
point".
Danger!
Standing under a raised machine is not permitted!
X Use the crane to carefully raise and load the machine.

X Strictly follow the operator's manual when re-commissioning the machine.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Transport
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
4 Malfunctions
Malfunctions are indicated by indicator lights or icons on the monitoring display. In

certain cases, an acoustic warning signal is issued. Additional information that
facilitates the elimination of the problem is provided by error codes.
Malfunctions are frequently caused by incorrect operation of the machine or improper
maintenance.
X Each time you encounter a malfunction, read the relevant chapter in the
operator’s manual.
X Identify the cause of the malfunction and eliminate it or have it eliminated.
Note!
If you are unable to identify the cause of the malfunction, contact the LIEBHERR
service department.
X Do not carry out any work for which you are not qualified.
X When contacting the LIEBHERR service department, describe the malfunction
and all associated circumstances in as much detail as possible.
X Quote the machine type, the serial number and the year of manufacture of your
equipment.
4.1 Error code list
General error codes

Error code Effect Cause Remedy
E 002 Engine oil pressure not monitored Pressure switch, short circuit, earth Check engine oil level, contact
contact or wire break LIEBHERR customer service

E 003
E 004 Coolant temperature not monitored Water level sensor, short circuit, Check coolant level, contact
E 005 earth contact or wire break LIEBHERR customer service
E 006
E 007 Coolant temperature not monitored Temperature sensor, short circuit, Check cooler for dirt, contact
E 009 earth contact or wire break LIEBHERR customer service
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Malfunctions Operating manual
Error code list
General error codes

E 010 Hydraulic oil level not monitored Hydraulic oil level sensor, short Check hydraulic oil level, contact
circuit, earth contact or wire break LIEBHERR customer service
E 011
E 012
E 013 Hydraulic oil temperature not Hydraulic oil temperature sensor, Check cooler for dirt, contact
monitored short circuit, earth contact or wire LIEBHERR customer service
E 014
break
E 015
E 016 Pump distribution gear (if installed): Temperature sensor, short circuit, Contact LIEBHERR customer
gear oil temperature not monitored earth contact or wire break service
E 017
E 018
E 022 Diesel engine speed not monitored; Speed sensor, short circuit, earth Switch diesel engine and hydraulic
diesel engine speed cannot be contact or wire break pump to emergency mode, contact
E 023
changed through keyboard; reduced LIEBHERR customer service
E 024 hydraulic power
E 027 Insufficient hydraulic power Cable defect at the amplifier for the Switch hydraulic pump to emergency
performance regulation of the mode, contact LIEBHERR customer
hydraulic pump service
E 033 Maximum fan speed Fan control, cable defective Contact LIEBHERR customer
service
E 036 Flow reduction for hydraulic Cable defect at the amplifier for the Do not operate flow-reduced
attachments is not working properly flow regulation of the hydraulic pump attachments, contact LIEBHERR
customer service
E 039 Flow reduction for hydraulic Cable defect at the amplifier for the Do not operate flow-reduced
attachments is not working properly flow regulation of the second attachments, contact LIEBHERR
hydraulic pump customer service
E 042 Slewing gear fine control not working Cable defect at valve Contact LIEBHERR customer
Monitoring of hydraulic oil cooling Cable defect at valve service
does not work
No power reduction at slewing gear Cable defect at valve
Performance regulation of hydraulic Cable defect at valve
pump not working properly
E 045 Insufficient pressure for attachment Tool Control, cable defect at Contact LIEBHERR customer
pressure control valve service
E 046 Engine speed cannot be adjusted Speed-adjustment servo motor faulty Switch diesel engine to emergency
through the keyboard mode, contact LIEBHERR customer
service
E 053 Stick cannot be moved Angle sensor, short circuit, earth Contact LIEBHERR customer
E 054 contact or wire break service
E 056 Fine control of slewing gear not Pressure sensor, earth contact or Check pressure switch at the left pilot
responding wire break control unit, contact LIEBHERR
E 057
customer service
E 058
E 063 Engine power reduced Temperature sensor of intercooling Check wiring, contact LIEBHERR
air, earth contact or short to plus customer service
E 065
E 070 not assigned
E 072 No information re. intercooling air Intercooling pressure sensor, short Check wiring, contact LIEBHERR
available circuit or wire break customer service
E 073
E 074 Diesel engine cannot be started Starter, earth contact or wire break Check wiring, contact LIEBHERR
customer service
E 075
E 078 - PLD hardware failure Contact LIEBHERR customer
E 079 PLD software failure service
E 081 In the event of a failure of both speed Speed sensor Speed1 Contact LIEBHERR customer
sensors, the engine cannot be service
E 082 Speed sensor Speed2
started
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Operating manual Malfunctions
Error code list
General error codes

E 084 Failure of pre-heating and after- Cold-starting aid, short circuit, Check engine control unit, heating
heating function malfunction or wire beak flange, cable harness, contact
E 085
LIEBHERR customer service
E 086
E 087 - Speed difference between Speed1 Contact LIEBHERR customer
and Speed2 service
E 088 Engine power reduced Fault in ambient air pressure sensor Check wiring and sensor
E 089 Machine cannot be started Cable defect, water in fuel filter Check cabling between engine
control unit and sensor, remove
water from fuel filter
E 090 Fuel temperature is not transmitted, Fuel temperature sensor, earth Check cabling between engine
engine performance is reduced contact, wire break or short to plus control unit and sensor
E 091
E 098 - Fault in cable connection D+ to PLD Check alternator and alternator
electronics wiring, contact LIEBHERR customer
E 099 Alternator defective service
E 100 - Speed signal Speed1 Check speed transducer and cabling

of engine control unit, contact
E 101 Speed signal Speed2
E 102 Engine cannot be started Crank shaft synchronisation failed Switch ignition on and off, check
speed transducer, contact
E 103 - Speed sensor of cam shaft defective Check wiring to speed transducer,
E 104 No speed signal from cam shaft check speed sensor, contact
E 105 Engine cannot be started Cam shaft synchronisation failed Check speed sensor, contact
E 109 - CAN1 hardware failure Check cabling, plugs and CAN
assemblies, contact LIEBHERR
E 110 No CAN1 data (timeout)
customer service
E 111 - Injector A1 defective Check cabling, plugs and engine
control unit, contact LIEBHERR
E 112 - Injector A1 BIP fault
customer service
E 113 - Injector A2 defective
E 115 - Injector A3 BIP defective
E 117 - Injector A4 BIP defective
E 119 - Injector B1 BIP defective Check cabling, plugs and engine
control unit, contact LIEBHERR
E 120 - Injector B1 BIP fault
customer service
E 121 - Injector B2 BIP defective

E 127 - Bank1 parameters missing Contact LIEBHERR customer
E 128 - Bank2 parameters missing service
E 135 - 5V reference 1 defective Contact LIEBHERR customer

service
E 136 - 5V reference 2 defective
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Error code list
General error codes

E 302 Input through keyboard not possible No code plug Contact LIEBHERR customer
service
E 303 Engine speed cannot be adjusted No CAN bus connection between Switch diesel engine and hydraulic
through the keyboard, hydraulic keyboard and control system pump to emergency mode, contact
performance is reduced LIEBHERR customer service
E 305 Malfunctions, e.g. of travel brake, No CAN bus connection between Switch controls to emergency mode,
slewing gear brake, servo control keyboard and ESP01 printed circuit contact LIEBHERR customer service
board (message is also displayed, if
ESP01 is not ready for operation)
E 306 Malfunctions, e.g. in travel direction No CAN bus connection between Contact LIEBHERR customer
switch, gear shifting system, keyboard and ESP02 printed circuit service
oscillating axle locking mechanism, board (message is also displayed, if
accessory kits ESP02 is not ready for operation)
E 307 Speed adjustment not possible No CAN bus connection between Contact LIEBHERR customer
keyboard and PLD diesel engine service
regulating unit (message is also
displayed, if PLD regulator is not
ready for operation)
E 308 No or incorrect display No CAN bus connection of keyboard Contact LIEBHERR customer
to display, or keyboard defective service
E 309 Software incompatibility between
keyboard and display
E311 Main screen is blank No CAN bus connection to control Contact LIEBHERR customer
system service
E 314 Diesel engine switches to Timeout of PLD Contact LIEBHERR customer
emergency mode service
E 319 Engine speed cannot be adjusted Hardware coding does not match Switch diesel engine and hydraulic
through the keyboard, hydraulic software coding pump to emergency mode, contact
performance reduced LIEBHERR customer service
E 321 No known machine type received
from keyboard
E 322 Unknown hardware coding
E 442 Failure of idle automatic at left Handle sensor, short circuit, earth Deactivate idle automatic, contact
joystick, diesel engine remains at contact or wire break LIEBHERR customer service
E 443
lower speed
E 445 Failure of idle automatic at right Handle sensor, short circuit, earth Deactivate idle automatic, contact
E 446 joystick, engine remains at lower contact or wire break LIEBHERR customer service
speed
E 450 Engine speed reduction at lowering Pressure sensor, short circuit, earth Contact LIEBHERR customer
of attachment (pressure-less contact or wire break service.
lowering)
E 454 Possible incorrect actuation of Slewing gear speed sensor, slewing Contact LIEBHERR customer
slewing gear brake gear, short circuit, earth contact or service
E 455
wire break
E 456 Incorrect fuel level indication Fuel sensor, short circuit, earth Visual check of fuel level, contact
contact or wire break LIEBHERR customer service
E 458
E 905 Stroke limitation fails to work Failure of angle sensor of boom Do not execute any work that
requires stroke limitation; if
E 906 Stroke limitation fails to work Failure of basic boom angle sensor
necessary, switch stroke limitation to
E 907 Stroke limitation fails to work Failure of stick angle sensor emergency mode; contact
E 911 Control system failure Fault in EEPROM record Contact LIEBHERR customer
service
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Error code list
General error codes

E 914 Boom cylinder cannot be moved No release signal for boom cylinder Do not execute any work that
to control system requires stroke limitation; if
necessary, switch stroke limitation to
E 916 Boom cylinder cannot be moved No release signal for boom cylinder
preliminary shut-down to control emergency mode; contact
system
E 917 Boom regulating cylinder cannot be No release signal for boom
moved regulating cylinder to control system
E 918 Boom regulating cylinder cannot be No release signal for boom
moved regulating cylinder to control system
E 919 Stick cylinder cannot be moved No release signal for stick cylinder to
control system
E 929 Working attachment cannot be Stroke limitation, failure in power
operated supply to sensor
The faults and errors listed below are indicated by symbols on the screen or by
indicator lights. The respective error codes are not shown in the EC field of the
operator menu. The only way to read them is the list-S-Exxx menu.
Error codes combined with symbols / indicator lights

Error code Symbol * Effect Cause What you can do
E 501 Indicator light H2 on, Oil pressure of diesel engine too Set the diesel engine to low idle
acoustic warning signal low speed and switch it off after 30
seconds.
E 502 Symbol is displayed, Coolant level too low Set the diesel engine to low idle
acoustic warning signal speed and switch it off after 30
seconds; locate leak and seal it.
E 503 Symbol and P2 are on at the Coolant overheating Set the diesel engine to low idle
same time, acoustic warning speed and switch it off after 30
signal seconds; check radiator for dirt;
check coolant level; contact
LIEBHERR customer service.
E 504 Symbol is displayed, Hydraulic oil level too low Set the diesel engine to low idle
seconds; locate leak and seal it; add
hydraulic oil.
E 505 Symbol is displayed, Hydraulic oil overheating Set the diesel engine to low idle
seconds; check radiator for dirt;
contact LIEBHERR customer
service.
E 506 Symbol is displayed, Oil temperature in pump Set the diesel engine to low idle
acoustic warning signal distribution gear too high speed and switch it off after 30
seconds; check hydraulic oil cooler
for dirt; contact LIEBHERR customer
service.
E 509 Indicator light H24 on, Flow indication of steering Contact LIEBHERR customer
acoustic warning signal system: no hydraulic oil or service.
steering pump defective
E 510 Indicator light H23 on, Accumulator pressure of working Load pressure accumulator while
acoustic warning signal brake too low (< 100 bar) diesel engine is on. If problem
persists: contact LIEBHERR
customer service.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Error code list

E 511 Symbol is displayed. Overvoltage at control keyboard Contact LIEBHERR customer

service.
E 512 Problems at start-up of Battery voltage too low, Contact LIEBHERR customer
hydraulic excavator; symbol undervoltage at PLD service.
is displayed
E 513 Control system shuts down Battery voltage too high, Contact LIEBHERR customer
hydraulic excavator; battery overvoltage at PLD service.
gasses, symbol is displayed
E 514 Central lubrication system Signal to frequency valve Perform interim lubrication, contact
E 515 lubrication control without continues after the set LIEBHERR customer service.
function, symbol is displayed monitoring time has lapsed.
E 516 Diesel engine cannot be Emergency-stop EDC error, Contact LIEBHERR customer
started, or engine shut-down engine control has detected an service.
internal error
E 517 Diesel engine shuts down; Injector fault Contact LIEBHERR customer
symbol is displayed service.
E 518 Diesel engine shuts down; Start synchronisation error Contact LIEBHERR customer
symbol is displayed service.
E 519 Symbol is displayed, Engine speed: warning threshold Contact LIEBHERR customer
acoustic warning signal exceeded service.
E 520 Diesel engine shuts down; Engine speed: safety threshold Contact LIEBHERR customer
symbol is displayed, exceeded service.
acoustic warning signal
E 521 Diesel engine shuts down; Both speed transducers Contact LIEBHERR customer
symbol is displayed defective service.
E 522 Diesel engine shuts down; Low lubricant pressure (safety Contact LIEBHERR customer
symbol is displayed, threshold exceeded) service.
acoustic warning signal
E 523 Symbol is displayed, Coolant overheating Let machine cool down, e.g. in F
acoustic warning signal (7>seconds); safety threshold mode; check radiator for dirt; check
exceeded coolant level; contact LIEBHERR
customer service.
E 524 Symbol is displayed, Intercooling air overheating Check radiator for dirt, contact
acoustic warning signal (7>seconds); safety threshold LIEBHERR customer service.
exceeded
E 525 Symbol is displayed, Engine fault in emergency mode Set the diesel engine to low idle
seconds. Contact LIEBHERR
customer service.
E 526 Symbol is displayed, Fuel temperature: warning Check radiator for dirt. Contact
acoustic warning signal threshold exceeded LIEBHERR customer service.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Error code list

E 527 Symbol is displayed, Fuel temperature: safety Set the diesel engine to low idle
acoustic warning signal threshold exceeded speed and switch it off after 30
customer service.
E 528 Symbol is displayed Water in fuel filter Remove the water from the fuel filter.
E 530 Diesel engine shuts down; Internal error in engine control Attempt restart; if not successful,
symbol is displayed, unit contact LIEBHERR customer
acoustic warning signal service.
E 532 Symbol is displayed Fuel pressure: warning threshold Check fuel filter, tank; contact
exceeded LIEBHERR customer service.
E 533 Symbol is displayed Fuel pressure: safety threshold Set the diesel engine to low idle
exceeded speed and switch it off after 30
customer service.
E 534 Symbol is displayed. Fuel pressure: warning threshold Contact LIEBHERR customer
exceeded service.
E 535 Symbol is displayed Fuel pressure: safety threshold Contact LIEBHERR customer
exceeded service.
E 536 Symbol is displayed Fuel pressure Rail 1; warning Contact LIEBHERR customer
threshold exceeded service.
E 537 Symbol is displayed Fuel pressure Rail 1; safety Contact LIEBHERR customer
E 538 Symbol is displayed Fuel pressure Rail 2; warning Contact LIEBHERR customer
E 539 Symbol is displayed Fuel pressure Rail 2; safety Contact LIEBHERR customer
E 597 Engine power reduced; Intercooling air temperature: Let machine cool down, e.g. in F
symbol displayed, acoustic warning threshold exceeded mode; check radiator for dirt; contact
warning signal LIEBHERR customer service.
* screen symbol or indicator light

In machines equipped with a hydraulic quick-change adapter (optional equipment),

an additional warning symbol is shown in the SY field:
Quick-change adapter symbol
This symbol, together with a buzzer warning sound, indicates that the quick-change
adapter is not properly locked.
If the symbol is displayed, immediately halt operation, unless you wish to release the
adapter. If the symbol is not displayed while the quick-change adapter is being
released, also immediately stop the procedure.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Faults and remedies
The alarm signals can be triggered if a locking pin has inadvertently become
dislodged, or by mechanical or hydraulic damage. The alarm signals might also be
caused by defects in the electrical system (e.g. at the proximity switch or buzzer).
Only resume operation after the defective part has been repaired or replaced.
4.2 Faults and remedies
4.2.1 Diesel engine and fuel system
Faults / errors Cause Solution

Starter does not turn over Faulty main fuse Replace fuse
Battery connections loose or Clean and tighten loose
corroded connections
Battery voltage too low Charge or replace battery
Starter circuit interrupted or Consult customer service centre
corroded contacts
Faulty starter Consult customer service centre
Starter turns over slowly Battery voltage too low Charge or replace battery
Battery connections loose or Clean and tighten loose
corroded connections
Ambient temperature too low Observe measures for winter
operation
Diesel engine does not start Fuel tank almost or completely Fill tank and bleed fuel system
empty
Low pressure in tank Remove tank lid
Fuel filter dirty Clean or change filter and bleed fuel
system, drain fuel / clean tank
Ambient temperature below 0°C For operation under specific climatic
conditions, see operating manual
Faulty heating flange (at low Check and (if necessary) replace
temperatures) heating flange
Starter does not pull through Check line connections, overhaul
starter
Batteries are empty Charge / replace
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Faults and remedies

Engine starts but then stops Fuel tank empty (low pressure in Fill tank and bleed fuel system
immediately or runs irregularly tank)
Fuel filter dirty Clean or change filter and bleed fuel
system (tank)
Particularly in winter: engine oil Use engine oil suitable for the
used is too viscous ambient temperature
Dry-air filter dirty Clean or change main filter element
Air in fuel system Bleeding the fuel system
Breather on fuel tank blocked Clean
Fuel line, pre-cleaner or strainer in Clean and bleed fuel system
fuel tank blocked
Fuel line bent Check line and repair if required
Diesel engine emitting grey or black Dry-air filter dirty Clean or change filter
smoke Injection nozzles stuck or do not Consult LIEBHERR customer
spray service centre
Faulty turbocharger Consult LIEBHERR customer
service centre
Diesel engine continually emitting Water in combustion chamber Consult LIEBHERR customer
white smoke (steam) service centre
Injection too late Consult LIEBHERR customer
service centre
Faulty heating flange (at low Check and (if necessary) replace
temperatures) heating flange
Exhaust gases are blue Oil level too high Correct oil level
Lubricating oil in combustion Consult LIEBHERR customer
chamber service centre
Faulty crankcase breather Consult LIEBHERR customer
service centre
Diesel engine is knocking Combustion problems Consult LIEBHERR customer
service centre
Diesel engine knocking Excessive valve play Consult LIEBHERR customer
service centre
Injection nozzles damaged or coked Consult LIEBHERR customer
service centre
Damaged bearings Consult LIEBHERR customer
service centre
Piston rings worn or broken Consult LIEBHERR customer
service centre
Diesel engine does not reach full Throttle control not set to maximum Set throttle control to maximum
rpm value value

Injection system is set incorrectly Consult LIEBHERR customer
service centre
Dry-air filter dirty Clean or replace filter
Poor fuel supply Clean or change fuel filter, check
lines, drain water from tank
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Faults and remedies

Poor diesel engine performance Faulty fuel system (blocked, Visually check for leaks, change
leaking) filter; contact LIEBHERR customer
service centre
Charging pressure too low Visual check for loose clamps, faulty
seals and hoses; clean air filter
Charging air temperature too high Clean charging air cooler; consult
(reduced performance due to LIEBHERR customer service centre
engine control unit)
Coolant temperature too high Check coolant level; check cooler
(reduced performance due to for dirt and (if necessary) clean;
engine control unit) check fan and thermostat; consult
LIEBHERR customer service centre
Fuel temperature too high (reduced Consult LIEBHERR customer
performance due to engine control service centre
unit)
Injection nozzles stuck or do not Consult LIEBHERR customer
spray service centre
Diesel engine - compression too low Consult LIEBHERR customer
service centre
Fault in electronics Consult LIEBHERR customer
service centre
Diesel engine becoming too hot Insufficient coolant Fill with coolant, check for leaks
Coolant pump defective Repair
Thermostats do not work Change thermostats
Cooler contaminated Clean cooler
Faulty coolant temperature Consult customer service centre
transducer
Diesel engine has insufficient oil Oil level too low Correct the oil level
pressure Oil pressure display faulty Change oil pressure switch
Note!
Immediately shout down diesel
engine
Diesel engine consuming too much External leak on diesel engine Retighten screws, replace seals if
oil required
Oil in coolant or coolant in oil Consult customer service centre
Unusual noises / exhaust system Exhaust system leaking Check exhaust system / repair
becoming noisier
4.2.2 Hydraulic system


Unusual noises / hydraulic pumps Shutoff valve on hydraulic tank Open stop cock
becoming noisier closed
Note! Hydraulic pumps sucking in air Check oil level in hydraulic tank,
Immediately shout down diesel check intake lines for leaks
engine
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Faults and remedies

Modes E and P showing lack of No performance setting via Unplug cable to connection Y50,
power proportional solenoid valve Y50 remove cotter pin, move lever to
emergency setting
Hydraulic oil temperature too high Cooler contaminated Clean cooler
Fan or fan control defective Rectify fault / consult LIEBHERR
customer service centre
Hydraulic oil level too low Oil loss Repair leaks, replace hoses, refill oil
via return filter
Cannot drive Safety lever is pushed up Push the safety lever down
No preselected travel direction Use the travel selection switch on
the right joystick to determine the
travel direction
Parking brake pressure switch Consult LIEBHERR customer
defective service centre
Parking brake not released Release parking brake using switch
Parking brake will not release Servo pressure present:
despite switch being operated Actuate emergency function Y6
Servo pressure not present:
Consult LIEBHERR customer
service centre
Operating brake engaged Release operating brake
Slewing gear not functioning No servo control Push the safety lever down
Switch on servo control
Swing gear brake activated Push the safety lever down
Release swing gear brake
No working movement No servo control Push the safety lever down
Switch on servo control
No servo pressure present Consult LIEBHERR customer
service centre
No high pump pressure present Consult LIEBHERR customer
service centre
4.2.3 Travelling

Device does not move either Safety lever is pushed up Push the safety lever down.
forwards or backwards Parking brake has been engaged Release parking brake using switch
using switch S16 S16.
No preselected travel direction Preselect travel direction using

Lock operating brake using brake switch S30.
pedal and retainer Release operating brake by opening
the retainer. Consult customer
service centre.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Faults and remedies

Machine moves too slowly Incorrect gear ratio set via switch Select a different ratio using switch
S42. S42.
Creeper gear activated using switch Deactivate creeper gear using
S21. Travelling pedal cannot be switch S21 .
fully engaged. Clean cab floor.
Super-Finish (if present) activated Deactivate Super-Finish (if present)
using switch S354. using switch S354. Switch off
Emergency control activated. emergency control and establish
normal operating conditions.
Consult LIEBHERR Customer
Services.
4.2.4 Brakes

Accumulator charge pressure Steering pump fault Consult LIEBHERR customer
warning Brake accumulator defective service centre
4.2.5 Electrical system

Battery charge indicator light does V-belt for alternator loose or torn Tension or replace V-belt
not go out Alternator defective Replace alternator
Batteries do not charge or charge Batteries defective Replace batteries
poorly Battery connections dirty / oxidised Clean battery connections
Cable loose or damaged Connect or replace cable
Indicator light or display instrument Glow bulb burnt out, display Replace defective part
not functioning or functioning instrument defective
incorrectly
Some or all functions on instrument Plug connection disconnected or Correctly fit or change plug
panel have failed damaged, ground cable interrupted, connector, rectify short circuit,
short circuit - fuse defective replace fuse or close circuit breaker
Diesel engine speed adjustment via Sensor controlled low idle automatic Touch the joystick or deactivate
control panel (mode and arrow switch S20 is activated sensor controlled low idle automatic
keys) not functioning switch S20.
Excavator electronics for throttle Switch to emergency throttle
control does not function control S71 and S72. Consult
No signal from speed sensor B12

centre.
Sensor controlled low idle automatic permanent sensor signal Consult customer service centre
not functioning, speed does not Switch S20 is deactivated Activate switch S20
reduce
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Fuses and relays

Servo control cannot be activated Excavator electrics faulty Switch on emergency operation
using switch using switch S73 in the right control
Parking brake cannot be released console
using switch Caution: Servo circuit and brake
circuit can only be switched off using
Swing gear brake cannot be the safety lever. Keyboard not
released using switch functioning. Consult LIEBHERR
customer service centre.
4.2.6 Heating and air conditioning system

Heating does not produce any warm Shutoff valves for coolant line on Open shutoff valve
air diesel engine closed
Engine not at operating temperature Bring engine up to operating
temperature
Heating fan does not operate No power supply Check fuse and wiring / repair
Blower motor defective Change blower motor
Only low air flow in operator's cab Outside air filter / recirculated air Clean air intake openings, replace
filter dirty ambient air filter
Air vent closed Open air vent
4.2.7 Working attachment

Cylinder gives way under load Piston seal in cylinder damaged Overhaul cylinder
Excessive bearing play on Bearing positions worn out Replace bearing parts
attachment
Attachment cannot be turned / Auxiliary function has not been Release auxiliary function using
rotated / actuated released switch S19
Lines are not connected Connect lines
4.3 Fuses and relays

Danger!
Incorrect or bridged fuses do not provide the protection required for the protection
of the machine operator and the electrical equipment.
X Use only original fuses.
X Never bridge electrical fuses.
X If necessary, order replacement fuses from LIEBHERR.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Fuses and relays
X Before exchanging a fuse or relay, set the battery main switch to position 0 (OFF).
4.3.1 Fuse box E50
Fig. 4-1 Fuse box E50
The E50 fuse box is located behind the left side door above the batteries.
X Remove the lid of the fuse box and replace it after the fuse has been replaced.
F19 100 A Pre-heating
F20 50 A Main fuse
F22 7.5 A Warning light system
F31 7.5 A Heating and a/c system terminal 15
F33 7.5 A Refuelling pump*
F34 Reserve
F35 Reserve
F36 20 A Refuelling pump*
F36-2 15 A Stroke limitation / stick cylinder shut-down*
F37 20 A Heating and a/c system terminal 30
F109 50 A Optional equipment and auxiliary headlight*
F110 50 A Engine control terminal 30
F115 7.5 A Emergency operation terminal 15
F116 7.5 A Engine control terminal 30
F117 7.5 A Engine control terminal 15
F122 7.5 A Engine control, preheating monitoring
F133 7.5 A Elevating operator's cab*
F253 25 A Attachment light
K66-1 Stroke limitation / stick cylinder shut-down*

K66-2 Stroke limitation / stick cylinder shut-down*
K127 Relay of emergency operation / speed control
K128 Relay of starting engine emergency operation
K288 Main relay terminal 15
K302 Relay of pre-heating
K415 Relay of attachment light
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Fuses and relays
4.3.2 ESP02 printed circuit board
Fig. 4-2 Fuses and ESP02 relay board
The ESP02 board is located in the left control console and is accessible when the
operator's cab door is open.
X Remove the cover of the control console and replace it after the fuse has been
replaced.
F1 2A Left parking and tail light
F2 2A Right parking and tail light
F3 7.5 A Reserve
F4 15 A Servo control and safety lever for kits

F5 15 A Special functions SF2, SF3 and SF4*, reserve
F6 15 A Special function SF1*, 1st gear, oscillating axle locking, brake light
F7 15 A Headlight
F8 7.5 A Parking brake, servo control, creeper gear
F9 7.5 A Windscreen wiper
F10 7.5 A Pre-heating, windscreen washer system, beacon*, rotating grapple*
F11 15 A Reserve
F12 15 A Reserve
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Emergency operation
F13 15 A Excavator control

F14 15 A Emergency control
F15 7.5 A Brake pressure switch
F16 7.5 A Indicators
F17 15 A Reserve
F18 15 A Reserve
F19 7.5 A Cigarette lighter
F20 15 A Reserve
F21 15 A Ignition lock, terminal 30
F22 7.5 A Cab lighting, horn
F23 7.5 A Travel light, right
F24 7.5 A Travel light, left
F250 2A Automatic cut-out for keyboard terminal 15
F251 2A Automatic cut-out for keyboard terminal 30
K330 Relay / central lubrication system*
K332 Relay / left and right travel light
4.4 Emergency operation
4.4.1 Purpose
The emergency operation function is an auxiliary function that enables operators to
restore machine functions that have failed. Depending on the situation, this auxiliary
function might need to be activated, for example to remove a machine quickly from
the construction site after a fault occurred.
When in emergency mode, various functions are directly controlled, so that the
control and operating elements that are faulty are bypassed. The function is intended
exclusively for temporary use in the event of an emergency and is not a substitute for
proper repair.
The options available in emergency mode depend on the type and extent of the
malfunction or fault. The following emergency mode functions are available:
Emergency operation Purpose
Control Short-term continuation of operation until repair can

be performed (it is always recommended to carry out
Gear shifting repairs without delay)
Hydraulic pump Moving the machine away from the construction site
or a dangerous position (immediate repair is required)
Shut-down systems, restrictions (functions
that limit the range of movement of the

machine)
Disengaging transmission Towing the machine to the workshop
For instructions on how to operate the machine in emergency mode, see next
chapter.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Emergency operation
Danger!
In emergency mode, certain safety functions of the control system are disabled.
This can lead to accidents or damage to the machine.
X Use emergency mode only for the intended purpose.
X Inform all persons involved in the operation and maintenance of the machine
that it is in emergency mode.
X Immediately switch off the emergency mode when it is no longer required.
X Have the machine repaired as quickly as possible.
4.4.2 Identifying solenoid valve

For the emergency operation of functions, it is under certain circumstances
necessary to interfere directly in the control of the machine and to switch solenoid
valves manually.
The solenoid valves are numbered. The number (Y...) is found on the connecting
cable of the solenoid valve and in the respective figure.
4.4.3 Emergency mode control

In the event of a failure of the control electronics, certain machine components might
not work properly.
Depending on the type and extent of the malfunction, it might be possible to re-
establish proper operating conditions for the machine components:
The emergency control feature includes three functions:
– Emergency operation of diesel engine
– Emergency speed adjustment
– Emergency operation of control devices
These functions may be combined with each other.
The control panel for emergency control is located in the rear section of the right
control console.
Fig. 4-3 Control panel in the right control console
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Emergency operation
Fig. 4-4 Control panel for emergency control
S71 Switch / emergency start / S72 Switch / speed adjustment

emergency operation of diesel
engine
S73 Switch / emergency operation H11 Indicator light / emergency
operation
H60 Indicator light / diesel engine
failure
4.4.3.1 Emergency operation of diesel engine

In normal operating mode, the electronic devices of the diesel engine communicate
with the control electronics of the machine. In the event of a malfunction or failure, it
might not be possible to start the diesel engine or to control it properly. In such a
case, the diesel engine must be started in emergency mode.
X Press the switch S71 to the right.
X Start the diesel engine with the ignition key.
ª The symbol n-min/MANU is shown at the display.
ª The diesel engine runs in emergency mode.
Switching back to normal operating mode is only possible after the diesel engine has
been switched off and restarted again.
Note!
H
In emergency mode, communication between the diesel engine and the control
electronics of the machine might be impaired. Error messages from the diesel
engine might not be displayed. In addition, the following safety functions are
disabled:
– Automatic shut-down of the diesel engine in the event of insufficient engine oil
pressure
– Automatic shut-down of the diesel engine in the event of excessive coolant or
intercooling air temperature
Engine malfunctions are indicated as follows:

– The indicator light H60 at the emergency control unit is on.
– Acoustic warning signal
– Error code E 525
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Emergency operation
X If an engine failure is indicated in diesel engine emergency mode, or if the

operating status is outside the permissible range (e.g. overheating), immediately
shut down the diesel engine.
X Do not operate the diesel engine in emergency mode for longer than is necessary
in order to bring the machine to the repair workshop.
4.4.3.2 Emergency speed adjustment

The emergency speed adjustment caters for the following failures:
– Power selection (mode) with switch S86
– Speed adjustment by means of arrow buttons S228 and S229
If the diesel engine is in emergency mode, the engine speed can be adjusted by the
switch S72. The operator can set the engine to an upper or a lower emergency
speed.
X Push the switch to left (tortoise icon): lower emergency speed
X Push the switch to right (hare icon): upper emergency speed
Note!
If the diesel engine has been automatically switched to emergency mode, the
current engine speed is maintained.
4.4.3.3 Emergency operation of control devices

The emergency operation of the control devices caters for the failure of the following
functions:
– Servo control
– Parking brake, slewing gear brake
Danger!
In emergency mode, the servo control system, the parking brake and the slewing
gear brake cannot be operated with the normal switches and buttons, but only with
the safety lever.
In emergency mode, the machine might make unexpected movements when the
safety lever is pushed down (instant release of slewing gear brake and parking
brake). There is thus an increased risk of accidents!
X Therefore, use emergency operation for control devices only when absolutely
necessary.
X Use the function only to complete the manoeuvres necessary to remove the
machine from the danger zone.
Fig. 4-5 Emergency control screen

X Press the switch S73 to the right.
ª Emergency control mode is now activated.
ª The emergency mode symbols are shown in the screen (see Fig. 4-5).
ª The servo control, the parking brake and the slewing gear brake can be
operated with the safety lever.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Emergency operation
X Move the safety lever down.

ª The parking brake and the slewing gear brake are released.
ª Servo control is activated.
4.4.4 Emergency operation of hydraulic pump

In the event of a failure in the pump control, the performance of the hydraulic pumps
is automatically reduced to a minimum.
For such a situation, the excavator is equipped with an emergency operation function
for the hydraulic pump.
It overrides the control electronics so that the hydraulic pump can be operated at a
reduced output rate.
Fig. 4-6 Control oil unit, hydraulic pump emergency operation

X Disconnect the plug 1 from the proportional solenoid valve Y50.
X Remove the cotter pin 2.
X Move the lever 3 into a horizontal position (emergency position).
ª The hydraulic pump is switched to emergency operation.
X Start the diesel engine.
4.4.5 Emergency operation of electric stick cylinder shut-down

function
Danger!
In emergency mode, the stick can be moved freely and without limits in all
directions. Risk of accident!
X When moving the stick cylinder in emergency mode, proceed with extreme
caution.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Emergency operation
Fig. 4-7 Stick cylinder shut-down, solenoid valves
The solenoid valves of the electronic stick shut-down function are located at the rear
of the control valve and can be operated manually (emergency operation).
X Turn in the T-handles of the solenoid valves Y212 and Y233.
ª The electronic stick cylinder shut-down system is disabled.
ª The stick can be moved without restrictions.
4.4.6 Emergency gear shifting

If the parking brake cannot be released, this might be due to a fault at the solenoid
valve responsible for gear shifting.
If this is the case, activate emergency operation for gear shifting to release the
parking brake. The respective solenoid valve can be operated manually.
Fig. 4-8 Solenoid valve of the gear shifting system

X Turn in the T-handle at the solenoid valve Y6.

ª The machine is set to second gear and the parking brake is released.
ª The machine can now be moved.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Emergency operation
4.4.7 Towing the machine

Towing the machine is a dangerous manoeuvre, and the responsibility for any
damage in connection with towing rests with the operator.
The machine may only be towed in exceptional situations, e.g. if the machine must
be moved for safety reasons or if it must be repaired at the workshop.
Injuries to persons or damage to equipment caused by towing of the machine are not
covered by the manufacturer's warranty.
Note!
The travel drive can be damaged, if the machine is towed over a certain distance
without disengaging the transmission.
X If possible, disengage the transmission before towing the machine (see 4.4.8).
X Adhere to the maximum distance and speed for towing.
Danger!
Risk of injury! Risk of damage to property!
X To tow the machine, use a suitably dimensioned rod.
X Never use a cable or rope.
X Secure the towing rod to the towing hitch at the undercarriage.

When towing the machine, adhere to the following limits:
– Towing speed: maximum 5 km/h
– Towing distance - at released parking brake: few metres (to remove the machine
from a dangerous position).
– Towing distance – with disengaged transmission: maximum 5 km
4.4.8 Disengaging transmission (emergency release)
Danger!
When the transmission is disengaged, the parking brake is disabled. The machine
might roll away, if another brake (working brake) is disabled.
When the diesel engine is off and the transmission is disengaged, all brakes
(working brake, parking brake) are disabled. The machine might roll away, and the
steering is stiff so that its operation requires some force.
X Before disengaging the transmission, secure the machine against rolling off
(with towing rod or chocks).
The transmission can be disengaged by pressing in grease. The respective adapter

for connection to the transmission is found in the tool box.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Emergency operation
Emergency release:
Fig. 4-9 Transmission
Fig. 4-10 Pressing in grease with the adapter
1 Emergency release connection 2 Bleeder

3 Pressure-relief valve A Grease gun
B Adapter
X Attach the adapter B to the grease gun A.

X Engage the adapter at the connection 1.
X Press in grease until it escapes at the pressure-relief valve 3.
ª The transmission is disengaged.
ª The machine can now be towed.
When the diesel engine is on and no other malfunctions are apparent, the machine
can be stopped with the working brake (foot pedal) and steered with the servo
steering.
If the diesel engine is not running: all brakes of the machine are disabled!
?Caution!
The transmission might be damaged, if it is disengaged for a prolonged period of
time while the machine is in motion.
X Do not put the machine into gear and do not press the gas pedal while the
transmission is disengaged.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Emergency operation
Deactivating emergency release:

X Loosen the bleeder 2 using a wrench and open it until grease escapes.
X Release the parking brake while the working brake (pedal) remains applied.
X Repeatedly shift gear.
X Leave the bleeder open until no grease escapes.
X Close and tighten the bleeder 2.
ª The transmission is re-engaged.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
5 Maintenance
5.1 Safety instructions
5.1.1 General safety instructions

– Maintenance and repairs may only be carried out by trained expert technicians.
– Always note the frequency intervals for inspections as contained in this operating
manual.
– Insure that an adequately equipped workshop is available to perform these tasks,
and note the designated qualifications of the personnel responsible for each
inspection.
– The maintenance and inspection schedule sets out precisely who should, or is
allowed to carry out which jobs.
The machine operator (and his staff) are allowed to carry out certain jobs, but
other jobs must be carried out only by qualified and trained staff.
– Spare parts must meet the technical requirements set forth by the manufacturer.
This is always ensured with original spare parts. Spare parts that do not meet the
technical requirements of the manufacturer might impair the safety and proper
operation of the machine.
– Wear task-appropriate personal protective equipment at all times. Example: In
addition to a protective helmet and safety boots, for certain jobs protective
goggles and gloves are also necessary.
– Keep unauthorized personnel away from the machine during maintenance.
– Secure a wide-ranging area for maintenance, as necessary.
– Inform the operator before starting to carry out special tasks and maintenance
work. Make sure he knows the person who is in charge of the work.
– Perform all maintenance operations on the machine on a level and stable ground
with the working equipment lowered and the diesel engine turned off, unless
described otherwise in the operating manual.
– Hang a well visible warning label “do not switch on“ onto the ignition during
maintenance operations, especially when working under the machine. Remove
the ignition key and set the main battery switch to position 0.
– Re-torque all bolts at the completion of the maintenance procedure to the
required torque specification.
– If the dismantling of safety equipment is necessary, the safety equipment must be
re-attached and inspected directly upon conclusion of the operations.
5.1.2 Checking for cracks

– Machines are subject to different loads, depending on application, job site,

duration of use and conditions of use. The different load conditions result in
different service lives for various machines components. This could lead to cracks
and loose connections, particularly on load-bearing parts. This applies particularly
to machines used in material handling or industrial applications or for machines
with special equipment, such as demolition excavators. To ensure that operating
safety is maintained, the machine must be checked regularly for cracks, loose
connections or other visible damage.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Maintenance Operating manual
Safety instructions
– To check for cracks, it is necessary to keep the machine clean and to clean it
regularly.
– The inspection must be carried out according to the inspection and maintenance
schedule.
– It is advisable to carry out these inspections with the machine supported, on firm
and level ground.
– Specific attention should be given to the following:
• The steel structure undercarriage with axle and gear mounting, support, lower
slewing ring seating with tower and slewing ring.
• The steel structure uppercarriage with bearing block for boom and boom
cylinder, upper slewing ring seating, cab bearing, mounting of slewing gear and
counterweight.
• Steel structure of working attachments, e. g. boom, stick, quick change adapter,
digging tool and grapple.
• Hydraulic cylinder, axles, steering, pins and pin connections, steps, ladders and
mounting elements.
– Check for cracks visually. If a crack is suspected or is in areas which are not easily
visible, such as the slewing ring seating, then the dye penetration procedure
should be used to check for cracks.
– Any damage found must be fixed immediately. Welding on load-bearing parts of
earth moving machines, material handling and transport units may only be made
by certified welders in accordance with acceptable welding practices. Contact
LIEBHERR Service to discuss suitable measures.
5.1.3 Welding
– Welding, cutting and grinding should only be done with the specific approval of
LIEBHERR. Prior to any welding, cutting or grinding, clean the machine and
surrounding area to remove dust and flammable materials.
– Insure adequate ventilation.
5.1.4 Fuels, lubricants and process chemicals

– When handling oils, greases and other chemical substances, always observe the
applicable safety regulations for the corresponding product.
– Ensure safe and environmentally friendly disposal of operating and service fluids
as well as exchange parts.
– Handle hot operating and service fluids carefully (danger of burning and
scalding).
5.1.5 Repair
– Do not attempt to lift heavy parts. Use lifting devices with sufficient load carrying
capacity. When replacing parts or large sub-assemblies, use appropriate and
functioning lifting devices and adequate load carrying capacity to insure safe
movement during installation. Never stand or work under suspended loads.
– Always wear work gloves when handling wire ropes.
– Only permit experienced personnel to secure loads and signal the crane operator.
The guide must position himself within view of the operator or be in voice contact
with him.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Operating manual Maintenance
Safety instructions
– When working overhead, use appropriate safe access ladders and working
platforms.
Do not use parts of the machine as climbing devices, if they are not designed for
this purpose.
Wear a harness when working at great heights.
Keep handles, steps, railings, platforms, and ladders free of dirt, ice and snow.
– When working on the attachment (for example when replacing teeth), make sure
the machine is properly supported. Never use metal-on-metal support.
– Never stand underneath a machine that has been raised with the aid of work
equipment unless it has been properly and securely supported.
– Always support the machine in such a ways that any shifting weight will not
endanger the stability of the machine and avoid metal to metal contact.
– Work on travel gears, brake and steering systems may only be carried out by
specially trained expert personnel.
– If the machine must be repaired on an incline, block the track chains with chocks
and secure the uppercarriage to the undercarriage with the locking pin.
– Only qualified, specially trained personnel may work on the hydraulic system.
– Do not check for hydraulic leaks with your hand. Use cardboard or similar material
to detect leaks. Wear work gloves.
– Do not loosen any lines or bolts before lowering the equipment, turning off the
diesel engine and relieving the hydraulic system. After the diesel engine has been
turned off, you must move all pilot controls (right handed joystick and pedals) into
all directions to reduce the control pressure and the dynamic pressure in the work
cycles. Then release the pressure in the tank, as described in this operating
manual.
5.1.6 Electrical system

– Check the electrical system regularly.
All defects, such as loose connections, burnt out fuses and bulbs, burnt or
damaged wires or cables must be repaired immediately by an electrician or
specially trained personnel.
– Only use original fuses with the correct amperage.
– Only qualified technicians should attempt troubleshooting or repairs on high
voltage systems.
– DO NOT work on energized attachments.
– When working on mid and high voltage components, shut off the voltage and
connect the supply cable to the ground to discharge any stored energy.
– Check all disconnected parts if they are truly free of current, ground them and
short circuit them. Insulate adjacent, current carrying parts.
– Disconnect the battery before working on the electrical system or before carrying
out any arc welding work on the machine.
5.1.7 Pressure accumulator

– Pressure accumulators contain stored energy and operate at high pressures.
Only specially trained personnel may work on pressure accumulators.
– Do not operate damaged pressure accumulators.
– You must reduce the pressure in the hydraulic system as described in this
operating manual prior to working on a hydraulic accumulator.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Safety instructions
– Do not weld or solder on the pressure accumulator and do not carry out any
mechanical work on them.
– Fill the pressure accumulator only with nitrogen.
– The accumulator housing can become hot during operation, there is a danger of
burning.
– New pressure accumulators must be charged to the required pressure for the
application before use.
– The operating data (minimum and maximum pressure) is marked permanently on
the pressure accumulators. Make sure that the marking remains visible.
5.1.8 Hydraulic hoses and lines

– Hydraulic lines and hoses may never be repaired!
– All hoses, lines and fittings must be checked every two weeks for leaks and visible
damage. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Remember that
escaping high pressure oil can penetrate skin. Escaping oil can also cause fires.
– Even if hoses are properly stored and used, they undergo a natural aging
process. For that reason, their service life is limited.
• Improper storage, mechanical damage and impermissible use are the most
frequent causes of failure.
• Using hoses and lines close to the limit ranges of permitted use can shorten the
service life (for example in high temperatures, frequent work cycles, extremely
high impulse frequencies, multi shift operation).
– Hoses and lines must be replaced when the following conditions are found during
inspection:
• Damage to the outer layer as far as the intermediate layer (e.g. chafing, cuts
and cracks);
• Brittleness of the outer layer (hose material cracking);
• Deformations, which differ from the natural shape of the hose or hose line, when
under pressure or not under pressure, or in bends (e.g. separation of layers,
blisters or bubbles);
• Leaks;
• Failure to follow installation instructions;
• Damage or deformation of hose fittings, which reduce the strength of the fitting
or the hose / fitting connection;
• Hose slipping out of the fitting;
• Corrosion on the fittings, which reduces function and strength;
– When replacing hoses and lines, observe the following:
• Use only original spare parts.
• Route and install hoses and lines properly, observe correct connection points.
• Always ensure that the hoses and lines are free of torsion when routing. On high
pressure hoses, always attach the screws of half clamps or full flange on both
ends of hose first and then tighten.
• When using high pressure hoses and lines with a bent fitting, always tighten the
end with the bent fitting first when tightening the flanges, then the end with the
straight fitting.
• Any existing mounting clamps in the centre of the hose may only be installed
and tightened thereafter.
• Check daily to ensure that all clamps, covers and protective devices are
properly mounted. This prevents vibration and damage during operation.
• Route the hoses and lines in such a way that chafing with other hoses or other
structures is prevented.
• A minimum distance of approximately ½ of the outer hose diameter to the other
parts is recommended. The distance should not be less than 10 to 15 mm (1/2
inch).
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Maintenance access doors
• When replacing hoses and lines on movable parts (e.g. from boom to stick),
check for hose interference and kinking over the complete range of motion.
5.1.9 Cab protection (FOPS)

For certain machine applications LIEBHERR offers optional cab protection systems
of various designs. These systems consist of a full length FOPS (falling objects
protective structure) or a top guard and front guard to protect the operator's cab and
windscreen area from falling objects (for example rocks or debris).
The full length FOPS wraps around the operator's cab, is mounted to the
uppercarriage and is a stand-alone system.
The top and front guards are either bolted individually or in combination to the cab
structure. In that case the operator's cab is also part of the cab protection system and
is subject to the following instructions.
– Never operate a machine if one of these protections is damaged in any way.
– Damages may occur due to:
• structural modifications or repairs (for example welding, cutting or drilling)
• deformation after an accident
• falling objects
– Structural modifications or repairs of any kind are prohibited without the
expressed, written approval of LIEBHERR.
5.2 Maintenance access doors
5.2.1 Overview of access doors

Fig. 5-1 Access doors on the machine
The machine has 5 access doors for maintenance. Some of the doors are secured
by means of lockable handles or fittings. The locks integrated in the handles must be
unlocked before commencing work.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Maintenance access doors
Caution!
Access doors can close accidentally and trap the machine operator or maintenance
personnel.
X When you have opened the access doors, lock them using the retainer.
No. Access doors Access to:
1 Centre hood – Diesel engine

– Radiator
2 Right hood – Diesel engine

– Control oil unit
3 Side door, left – Radiator

– Electric cabinet E50
– Batteries
4 Side door, front left – Toolbox

– Stowing compartment
– Battery main switch
5 Side door, right – Dry air filter

– Control oil unit
– Hydraulic pump
Tab. 5-1 Access doors
5.2.2 Door locking mechanism
Fig. 5-2 Door locking mechanism
X To prevent the access doors from moving unintentionally (e.g. due to wind), open
them fully and allow the door locking mechanism (see arrow) to latch.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Cleaning machine
5.2.3 Engine hood locking mechanism
Fig. 5-3 Engine hood locking mechanism
X Release lock 1, open and push back the engine hood.

X Secure the engine hood using mechanical retainer 2.
Caution!
The engine hood is by means of two gas pressure springs. These hold the engine
hood open. The holding force of older gas pressure springs may diminish and could
cause the engine hood to be lowered in an uncontrolled fashion.
X Always additionally secure the engine hood using mechanical retainer 2.
5.3 Cleaning machine
The machine should be cleaned before carrying out any maintenance or repair work.
In particular, the connections and screws should be cleaned of oil, fuel and residue
of cleaning agents.
Note!
High-pressure water jet cleaners (steam cleaners) can damage the coating.
X Do not use high-pressure water jet cleaners during the first two months after
commissioning (or after recoating).
X Observe the prescribed safety distances.
Before cleaning the machine:

Before cleaning the machine with water or with a steam cleaner (high-pressure water
jet cleaner), carry out the following tasks to protect the equipment against penetrating
water.
X Lubricate all bearing points, bolt connections and the slewing ring; if necessary,
use the central lubrication system to do this.
X Cover or seal all openings that must be protected against penetrating water for
safety reasons (particularly at risk of damage are electric motors, electric
components, switch cabinets, plug connections, measuring sensors and air
filters).
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Care for rubber components
Cleaning:
X Use flint-free cleaning cloths.
X Do not use aggressive detergents or flammable liquids.
X When cleaning the engine compartment, ensure that the temperature sensor of
the fire alarm and extinguishing systems (if installed) are not accidentally brought
into contact with the hot cleaning solution,
After cleaning:
X Remove all seals and covers.
X Check all fuel, engine oil and hydraulic lines for leakage, loose connections,
chaffing and damage.
X Repair any defects without delay.
X Lubricate all bearing points, pin connections and the slewing ring to remove any
water that might have been penetrated.
X If required, renew the preservation layer (anti-corrosion protection) on
components and surfaces.
5.4 Care for rubber components
The service life of rubber seals can be prolonged by treating them with a rubber care
product.
Clean and regularly treat the rubber seals on doors and panelling elements with a
care product. This helps prevent premature wear and protects the rubber seals
during the cold season.
Recommended care products: Silicone, talcum powder, deer tallow
5.5 Tyres
Repairs to the wheel, including the removal of the tyres from the rims, must be carried
out by qualified specialists with suitable tools.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Tyres
5.5.1 Checking tyre pressure
Fig. 5-4 Checking tyre pressure, safety distance
Danger!
Risk of injury from exploding tyres!
If the tyre inflation device is used incorrectly or without the necessary care, there is
a risk of serious injury or even death due to:
– Bursting tyres caused by excessive inflation.
– Blasting out of the lip seal.
X Flat tyres may not be inflated, but must be repaired in a specialist workshop.
X When inflating the tyres, use a suitably long inflation hose with self-adhesive
pinch valve.
X Ensure that no persons are standing in the danger zone when the tyre is inflated.
X Do not mount tyres of different size.
The tyre pressure affects the operating behaviour of the machine. The pressure must
therefore be regularly checked and adjusted, if necessary.
Ensure that the machine is standing in a safe position and is secured against
rolling away (chocks).
X For nominal values, refer to the table below.
X Attach measuring device and adjust the tyre pressure, if necessary.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Tyres
Type Manufacturer / Size bar

A 934 C Litronic (1006) Mitas NB 59 / 11.00-20 9,0
Bridgestone Fast Grip / 11.00-20 7,0
Michelin XZM / 11.00-20 10,0
Nokian Armor Gard / 12.00-20 PR18 9,5
Nokian Armor Gard / 12.00-20 PR20 10,0
Mitas NB 59 / 12.00-20 9,0
Michelin XZM / 12.00-20 10,0
A 934 C HD Litronic Michelin XKA / 20.5-25 8,0
(1007) Michelin XHA / 20.5-25 5,0
Bridgestone VKT / 20.5-25 6,5
Bridgestone VLT / 20.5-25 6,5
Bridgestone VMT / 20.5-25 6,5
Bridgestone VUT / 20.5-25 6,5
Tab. 5-2 Tyre pressures
5.5.2 Foam tyres
Note!
The foaming of tyres changes their rolling behaviour! This can in turn affect the
operating behaviour of the machine.
Use only foamed tyres supplied by LIEBHERR.
5.5.3 Checking wheel lugs for proper fit

Tightening torque for wheel lugs: 650 Nm
Danger!
Loose or incorrectly tightened wheel lugs might cause wheels to become loose and
even fall off, causing serious injury.
X After each wheel change or loosening of the wheel lugs:
Tighten the wheel lugs with the correct torque and re-check the torque
subsequently three times – after 50, 100 and 250 operating hours.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Fuels, lubricants and process chemicals
Ensure that the machine is standing in a safe position and is secured against
rolling away (chocks).
Ensure that a torque spanner of the required range is available.
Fig. 5-5 Tightening wheel lug
X Check the wheel lugs on each wheel and retighten them, if necessary.
5.6 Fuels, lubricants and process chemicals
5.6.1 General information

Observe the instructions for lubricants and process chemicals. Lubricate the
machine and change the oils at the prescribed intervals. For more information, see
lubrication chart and inspection and maintenance schedule.
Keep workplaces for these activities clean. This enhances the service life and
reliability of the machine.
X All work on the machine must be carried out while it is standing on firm and level
ground.
X Switch off the diesel engine, remove the ignition key and set the battery main
switch to position 0 (OFF).
X Clean lubricating nipples before adding grease.
X Clean all filling points and the area around them before opening the caps and
screws.
X The oil should be changed while it is at operating temperature.
X After each oil change or refilling, check the fill level in the respective unit (the
specified fill levels are guide values).
X Collect old oil and chemicals in suitable containers and dispose of them according
to the applicable statutory regulations.
5.6.2 Filling volumes, lubricating chart

5.6.2.1 Recommended lubricants
Designation Recommended lubricant Symbol Volume [litre]*
Diesel engine Liebherr Motoroil 10W-40 29.0

Liebherr Motoroil 10W-40 low ash
Liebherr Motoroil 5W-30
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Designation Recommended lubricant Symbol Volume [litre]*
Hydraulic system Liebherr Hydraulic Basic 68 630 / 400 / 350

(system capacity / oil change volume / tank Liebherr Hydraulic Basic 100
capacity) Liebherr Hydraulic HVI
Liebherr Hydraulic Plus
Liebherr Hydraulic Plus Arctic
Slewing gear mechanism Liebherr Gear Basic 90 LS 7.0
Pump distributor gear Liebherr Gear Basic 90 LS 3.1
Transmission Liebherr Motoroil 10W-40 3.3
Steering axle Liebherr Gear Basic 90 LS 26.5 (type 1006)

30.5 (type 1007)
Wheel hubs of the steering axle Liebherr Gear Basic 90 LS 3.0 each (type 1006)
4.0 each (type 1007)
Rigid axle Liebherr Gear Basic 90 LS 19.0 (type 1006)

22.0 (type 1007)
Wheel hubs of the steering axle Liebherr Gear Basic 90 LS 3.0 each (type 1006)
4.0 each (type 1007)
Central lubrication system, lubrication points Liebherr Universalfett 9900 -

on machine and attachment tools
Hinges, joints, locks Engine oil - -
* = guide values
5.6.2.2 Recommended fuels and chemicals
Designation Recommended fuel Symbol Volume (litre)*
Fuel tank Conventional diesel fuel 580
Coolant Liebherr Antifreeze Mix 40.0

Liebherr Antifreeze Concentrate
Windscreen washer system Conventional windscreen cleaning agent or denatured - 3.0

alcohol
* = guide values
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
5.6.2.3 Lubrication chart

Fig. 5-6 Lubrication chart for type 1006
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Fig. 5-7 Lubrication chart for type 1007
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Specifications for fuels, lubricants and process chemicals
Symbol Description
Diesel engine, check oil level
Gearbox or axle, check oil level
Hydraulic tank, check oil level
Carry out first oil change
Change oil
Lubricate machine
Lube point
Medium filling point
Observe operating manual
Tab. 5-3 Key to lubrication chart
5.7 Specifications for fuels, lubricants and

process chemicals
5.7.1 Diesel fuels
5.7.1.1 Specification
The diesel fuels must meet the minimum requirements of the fuel specifications
outlined below.
Approved specifications:
– DIN EN 590
– ASTM D 975 (89a) - 1D and 2D
The fuel supplier must submit a fuel certificate (fuel specification, sulphur content,
lubricity, cetane number)
5.7.1.2 Sulphur content, lubricity

The following restrictions apply:
– Do not use fuels with a sulphur content of more than 1 % (10,000 mg/kg).
– When using engine oils conforming to specification E6 and standard oil change
intervals (every 500 operating hours): Do not use fuels with a sulphur content of
more than 0.005 % (50 mg/kg).
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
– When using exhaust gas purification units (particle filters): Do not use fuels with
a sulphur content of more than 0.005 % (50 mg/kg).
– Diesel engines with external exhaust gas return system: We recommend using
fuels with a sulphur content of less than 0.005 % (50 mg/kg).
Additional information: see oil change intervals for operation under adverse
conditions.
According to DIN EN 590, diesel fuels must have a lubricity determined by HFRR test
(corrected wear scar diameter [wsd 1.4] at 60 °C) of maximum 460 µm
The ASTM D 975 fuel standard does not specify that the fuels must undergo a fuel
lubricity test. The required additives should be added by the supplier, who is
responsible for the quality of the fuel.
5.7.1.3 Cetane number

ASTM D 975 fuels must have a cetane number of minimum 45. A cetane number of
more than 50 is preferable, especially at temperatures below 0 °C (32 °F).
5.7.1.4 Low temperature operation

At low temperatures, paraffin crystals are formed in the diesel fuel. They increase the
flow stress in the fuel filter so that the diesel engine might not be supplied with
sufficient fuel.
Caution!
The use of an unsuitable fuel can cause damage to the diesel engine. Adding
petroleum, normal car petrol or other substances damages the injection system.
X Never add petroleum, car petrol or other additives to the diesel fuel.
X At ambient temperatures of below -20 °C: use start-up aid (e.g. fuel filter heater).
X For operation of the machine under arctic conditions: use special diesel fuels
that offer adequate viscosity.
5.7.2 Lubricating oil for the diesel engine
5.7.2.1 Quality
Modern diesel engines must be lubricated with high-performance oils. They consist
of a basic oil with special additives.
The lubricating oil requirements for LIEBHERR diesel engines are based on the
following standards and regulations:
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Designation Specification
ACEA classification (Association des E4, E6, E7
Constructeurs Européens
d'Automobiles) Caution: particle filter only permitted
with E6
API classification (American Petroleum CH-4, CI-4
Institute)
Caution: observe shorter oil change
intervals
Tab. 5-4 Lubricating oil specifications
If LIEBHERR oils are not available locally, use an oil that conforms to the
specifications (before choosing an oil, contact our customer service department).
5.7.2.2 Viscosity
The choice of the lubricating oil viscosity is based on the SAE classification (Society
of Automotive Engineers). The SAE classification does not provide any indication as
regards the quality of a lubricating oil. The relevant factor for the correct choice of
SAE class is the ambient temperature.
Excessively high viscosity might lead to start-up problems. If the viscosity is too low,
the oil's lubrication might not be sufficiently efficient.
The temperature ranges shown in the diagram are approximate ranges that might
temporarily be exceeded.
Fig. 5-8 Temperature-based selection of the SAE class
For ambient temperatures of -20 °C (-4 °F) to +45 °C (+113 °F), we recommend the
following diesel engine oils:
Liebherr Motoroil 10W-40, specification ACEA E4
Liebherr Motoroil 10W-40 low ash, specification ACEA E6
For ambient temperatures of -30 °C (-22 °F) to +30 °C (+86 °F), we recommend the
following diesel engine oils:
Liebherr Motoroil 10W-30, specification ACEA E4
5.7.2.3 Adverse operating conditions affecting the oil change

intervals
Oil change intervals: see chapter "Inspection and maintenance schedule".
Subsequent oil changes depend on the climate, the sulphur content of the fuel and
the oil grade. For details, see the table below.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
If the specified operating hours (h) per year are not reached, the diesel engine oil and
the filter must be changed at least once every year.
A number of adverse factors (unfavourable operating conditions) affect the length
of the maintenance interval.
Possible adverse factors:
– Frequent cold starts
– Sulphur content of fuel
– Operating temperature
If such factors apply, the oil and filter must be changed according to the table below.
Adverse factor Oil quality
CH-4, CI-4 E4 / E7*

Operating conditions Sulphur content of fuel Interval
Normal climate, to -10 °C to 0.5 % 250 h 500 h
between 0.5 % and 1 % 125 h 250 h
below -10 °C to 0.5 % 125 h 250 h
between 0.5 % and 1 % not permissible 125 h
Adverse factor Oil quality
E6
Operating conditions Sulphur content of fuel Interval
Normal climate, to -10 °C to 0.005 % 500 h
between 0.005 % and 0.05 % 250 h
between 0.0501 % and 0.1 % 125 h
below -10 °C to 0.005 % 250 h
between 0.005 % and 0.05 % 125 h
between 0.0501 % and 0.1 % not permissible
h= operating hours
* TBN minimum 13 mg KOH/g
5.7.3 Coolants for diesel engine
5.7.3.1 General recommendations

The cooling system works only properly when pressurised. It is therefore imperative
that it is kept clean and sealed at all times, that the radiator sealing and operating
valves work properly and that the required coolant level is maintained.
Corrosion inhibitors/antifreeze agents approved by LIEBHERR ensure proper
protection against frost, corrosion and cavitation without causing damage to seals
and hoses and without foaming.

Coolants that contain unsuitable corrosion inhibitors or antifreeze agents or that have
been prepared incorrectly might cause failure of assemblies and component parts in
the coolant circuit due to cavitation or corrosion. Heat-insulating deposits on
components that conduct heat might result in overheating and consequently failure
of the engine.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
5.7.3.2 Water (fresh water)

Clear and clean water free of particles that meets the following chemical
requirements is suitable for use as a coolant.
Do not use sea water, brackish water, brine or industrial wastewater.
Designation Value / unit

Total alkaline earth metals (water 0.6 to 3.6 mmol/l (3 to 20 °dH)
hardness)
pH at 20 °C 6.5 to 8.5
Chloride ion concentration max. 80 mg/l
Sulphate ion concentration max. 100 mg/l
Tab. 5-5 Fresh water quality
Designation Value / unit

Total alkaline earth metals (water 0.6 to 2.7 mmol/l (3 to 15 °dH)
hardness)
pH at 20 °C 6.5 to 8.0
Chloride ion concentration max. 80 mg/l
Sulphate ion concentration max. 80 mg/l
Tab. 5-6 Fresh water quality with use of DCA 4*
* = Diesel Coolant Additives

Water analysis results are available from the local authorities.
5.7.3.3 Mixing ratio for coolant

The coolant must contain min. 50% corrosion inhibitor and antifreeze agent at all
times of the year.
Mixing ratio
Outdoor temperature to Corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze
Water %
agent %
-37 °C 50 % 50 %
-50 °C 40 % 60 %
Tab. 5-7 Permissible mixing ratio (for all seasons)

Fig. 5-9 Temperature-based mixing ratio of water + corrosion inhibitor / antifreeze

agent
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
A Ambient temperature
B Corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze agent concentration in coolant
5.7.3.4 Permissible corrosion inhibitors/antifreeze agent
Note!
Improper mixing of different products might negatively affect the properties of the
coolant and cause damage to the cooling system.
X Use only approved products. Do not mix different products.
X Never mix products containing silicone with silicone-free products.
X If the recommended LIEBHERR product is not available locally:
Contact the LIEBHERR customer service department; choose product
conforming to the "Coolant specifications for LIEBHERR diesel engines".
Concentrate
Product name Manufacturer
Liebherr Antifreeze Concentrate Liebherr
Ready-mixed corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze agent (premix)

Liebherr Antifreeze Mix Liebherr
Premix = ready-mixed product (50 % water and 50 % corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze

agent)
5.7.3.5 Approved corrosion inhibitors without antifreeze agent
Note!
Improper mixing of different products might negatively affect the properties of the
coolant and cause damage to the cooling system.
X Use only approved products. Do not mix different products.
X Never mix products containing silicone with silicone-free products.
X If the recommended LIEBHERR product is not available locally:
Contact the LIEBHERR customer service department; choose product
conforming to the "Coolant specifications for LIEBHERR diesel engines".
In exceptional circumstances and at ambient temperatures that are always

above the freezing point, e.g. during use in tropical regions where there are no
corrosion inhibitors/antifreeze agents available, the following inhibitors must be

added to the coolant:
– DCA 4 (Diesel Coolant Additives 4)
– Caltex / Chevron / Havoline / Total product
In this case, the coolant must be changed annually.
As part of routine maintenance work, check the concentration and correct it, if
necessary.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
DCA 4 Diesel Coolant Additives Fleetguard / Cummins Filtration

Caltex CL Corrosion Inhibitor Concentrate Chevron Texaco
Chevron Heavy Duty Extended Life Corrosion Inhibitor Nitrite Chevron Texaco
Free (ELC)
Havoline Extended Life Corrosion Inhibitor (XLI) Chevron Texaco
Total WT Supra Total, Paris
5.7.4 Hydraulic oil

Hydraulic oils must meet the requirements outlined below.
Maximum water content of hydraulic oil: < 0.1 %
5.7.4.1 LIEBHERR hydraulic oil

LIEBHERR recommends using the following hydraulic oils in its machines
(depending on temperature range):
Fig. 5-10 Liebherr hydraulic oil, viscosity grade selection based on temperature
B Cold-start range with mandatory warm-up
C Operating range
Liebherr Hydraulic Plus and Liebherr Hydraulic Plus Arctic are suitable for both
long-term use and use in environmentally sensitive areas.
If LIEBHERR oils are not available locally, use one of the engine oils listed in section
"Engine oils for use as hydraulic oils" (before choosing an oil, contact the respective
customer service department).
Use only LIEBHERR hydraulic oils. The use of other oils is not permitted.
5.7.4.2 Engine oils for use as hydraulic oils

When using engine oils (third-party products) as hydraulic oils, we advise customers
to request a certificate from the oil manufacturer, confirming that the product meets
the following specifications.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Engine oils that are to be used as hydraulic oils must meet the following
specifications:
Single grade engine oils API - CD / ACEA - E1

(1): (MB 226.0 and 227.0)
Multigrade oils (2): API - CD, CE, CF / ACEA - E2, E3, E4
(MB 227.5, 228.1, 228.3 and 228.5)
Tab. 5-8 Classification of products, engine oils for use as hydraulic oils
Fig. 5-11 Engine oil for use as hydraulic oil, viscosity grade selection based on
temperature*
A Ambient temperature 1 Single grade engine oils

B Cold-start range with mandatory warm-up 2 Multigrade oils
C Operating range
* For oils with deviating viscosity grade, consult LIEBHERR customer service.
5.7.4.3 Warm-up instruction

The black bar B indicates ambient temperatures that are up to 20 °C below the
operating range C.
For cold starting at an ambient temperature below range B, the following warm-up
instruction for the hydraulic oil applies:
X 1. Start the diesel engine and set it to medium speed (not exceeding 50% of
maximum speed).
X 2. Carefully actuate the working hydraulics. Operate the hydraulic cylinders and
move them briefly to the stop.
X 3. After approx. 5 minutes, actuate the travel hydraulics. Total warm-up time:
approx. 10 minutes.
For cold starting at lower ambient temperatures, follow the warm-up instruction
below: Before starting the engine, warm up the hydraulic oil tank. Then proceed
according to the warm-up instruction in 1.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
5.7.4.4 Biodegradable hydraulic oils
Caution!
Do not mix hydraulic oil products!
When mixing different ester-based biodegradable hydraulic oils or mixing such
products with mineral oils, aggressive chemical reactions might occur, causing
damage to the hydraulic system.
X Therefore never mix biodegradable hydraulic oils from different producers, and
never mix bio hydraulic oils with mineral oils!
LIEBHERR recommends using the following hydraulic oils in its machines

(depending on the temperature range):
Liebherr Hydraulic Plus or Liebherr Hydraulic Plus Arctic
These products are polyalphaolefins (HEPR) conforming to CEC-L-33-A-93, and are
biodegradable.
When using these hydraulic oils, bypass filtration might be omitted.
If these oils are not available locally, use a fully saturated hydraulic environmental
ester synthetic oil (HEES fluid) (before choosing an oil, contact the respective
customer service department).
Caution!
The use of synthetic ester-based oils without bypass filter causes damage to the
hydraulic system!
If synthetic ester-based oils are to be used, bypass filtration is mandatory, as the
water content in the oil must be kept below 1000 ppm (0.1%).
X Always use a bypass filter (optional equipment).
For synthetic ester-based oils, we recommend replacing the hydraulic hoses every
4000 operating hours or at least every 4 years.
Do not use vegetable oils, as they do not possess the necessary thermal stability.
The use of polyglycols is not permissible, as they cause damage to paintwork.
When using third-party products, we advise customers to request a certificate from
the oil manufacturer, confirming that the product meets the above specifications.
5.7.4.5 Oil change, oil analysis and filter change
Oil change
Note!
LIEBHERR recommends having the oil regularly checked by analysis (see
chapter , "Oil analyses" on page 24).
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Oil change
Not for use in environmentally sensitive areas For use in environmentally

Oil type
sensitive areas (only
with oil analysis* permissible with oil
without oil analysis
(optional) analysis*)
LIEBHERR mineral oil every 3000 h every 6000 h - ***

Liebherr Hydraulic HVI
Liebherr Hydraulic Basic 68
Liebherr-PAO** every 4000 h every 8000 h every 8000 h

Liebherr Hydraulic Plus
Third-party product - mineral oil every 2000 h every 2000 h - ***
Third-party product - fully saturated - *** - *** every 2000 h

synthetic ester
Tab. 5-9 Oil change intervals
* If the result of the oil analysis is satisfactory, you may continue using the oil for a longer period.
If the result of the oil analysis is negative, immediately change the oil.
** PAO = polyalphaolefin
*** Do not mix products
Use in environmentally sensitive areas: Machines operated in such areas must
be filled with biodegradable hydraulic oil.
If the machine is operated for less than 1000 hours per year, an oil sample must be
taken at least once a year. If a hydraulic oil is used for a prolonged period of time, it
must be changed at least every 4 years (mineral oils and fully saturated synthetic
esters) or every 6 years (Liebherr-Plus oils).
If the machine is not in use for a period of more than 6 months, carry out an oil
analysis before restarting it.
Oil analyses
For regular oil analyses, LIEBHERR recommends contracting the specialist
company OELCHECK and changing the oil when indicated by the test results in the
lab report.
– Yellow kit for biodegradable hydraulic oils
– Green kit for mineral oils
See also customer service and product information.
Reasons for regular oil analyses:
– Reduction of costs thanks to prolonged oil change intervals
– Detailed information regarding the hydraulic system, its components and the
medium
– Better protection of resources and the environment
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Oil sampling / operating conditions
Oil sampling in machines operated under normal operating conditions
Oil sampling in machines operated under extremely dusty conditions
The oil sampling interval is determined by the actual operating conditions (for more information, see
chapter "Dust-intensive applications, reduction of oil contamination").
Tab. 5-10 Symbols: Oil sampling depending on operating conditions
Oil sampling
Not for use in environmentally sensitive areas For use in environmentally sensitive areas (oil
(oil analysis optional) analysis mandatory)
Oil type
LIEBHERR mineral oil every 1000 h every 250 h - ** - **

Liebherr Hydraulic HVI
Liebherr-PAO* every 1000 h every 250 h first at 0 h, then every first at 0 h, then every
Liebherr Hydraulic Plus 1000 h 250 h
Third-party product - mineral first at 1000 h, then every 250 h - ** - **

oil every 500 h
Third-party product - fully - ** - ** first at 0 h, then every first at 0 h, then every

saturated synthetic ester 500 h 250 h
Tab. 5-11 Oil sampling depending on operating conditions
* PAO = polyalphaolefin
** Do not mix products
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Filter change
Filter change / operating conditions
Filter change in machines operated under normal operating conditions
Filter change in machines operated under extremely dusty conditions
The filter change interval is determined by the actual operating conditions (for more information, see
chapter "Dust-intensive applications, reduction of oil contamination").
Tab. 5-12 Symbols: Filter change depending on operating conditions
Change of return filter (use only LIEBHERR filters)
every 1000 h every 500 h
Tab. 5-13 Filter change depending on operating conditions
Change of bypass oil filter
LIEBHERR filter Filters from other manufacturers
every 2000 h or as indicated every 500 h every 250 h
Tab. 5-14 Filter change depending on operating conditions
5.7.4.6 Dust-intensive applications, reduction of oil contamination

If the machine is normally operated with a hydraulic hammer or under similar
conditions (considerable dust generation), the hydraulic oil might become more
contaminated than under normal working conditions.
To prevent premature wear of the hydraulic components, the oil change and
sampling intervals must be shortened.

Observe the following:
– The filter cartridge(s) in the return filter must be replaced every 500 operating
hours and after every hydraulic oil change.
– Use 10-µm filter cartridges instead of the standard 20 / 5-µm cartridges.
– The 2-µm breather filter must be replaced every 500 operating hours and at every
hydraulic oil change.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Machines delivered with hydraulic hammer attachment and retrofitted hydraulic

hammer kits are already fitted with 10-µm filter cartridges in the return filter. Please
take this into account when ordering spare parts.
5.7.5 Lubricants for axles and gearboxes
5.7.5.1 Quality
Recommended lubricant Specification
Liebherr Gear Basic 90 LS API: GL-5

MIL-L: 2105 D
ZF: TE-ML 05C, 12C, 16E, 21C
Liebherr Gear Plus 20W-40 API: Niveau von GL4
ZF: TE-ML 05F, 06K, 17E
Liebherr Gear Hypoid 90 EP API: GL 5
MIL-L: 2105 B, C, D
ZF: TE-ML 05A, 12A, 16C, 17B, 19B
Liebherr Hypoid 85W-140 EP API: GL-5
MIL-L: 2105 D, PRF-2105 E
ZF: TE-ML 05A, 07A, 16D, 21A
Liebherr Hydraulic-Gear ATF GM: Dexron II D
ZF: TE-ML 03D, 04D, 11A, 14A, 17C
Liebherr Syntogear Plus 75W-90 API: GL-4, GL-5, MT-1
MIL-L: 2105 D, PRF-2105 E
ZF: TE-ML 02B, 05B, 07A, 12B, 16F, 17B, 19C, 21B
Tab. 5-15 Lubricating oil specifications
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
5.7.5.2 Viscosity
Fig. 5-12 Temperature-based selection of the SAE class
1 Use in gearboxes
2 Use in automatic transmissions
3 Use in axles
4 Use in pump distributor gear systems
* If the pump distributor gear is equipped with an oil cooler, the oil is not suitable
for the marked temperature range (shaded area).
The choice of the lubricating oil viscosity is based on the SAE classification (Society
of Automotive Engineers). The SAE classification does not provide any indication as
regards the quality of a lubricating oil. The relevant factor for the correct choice of
SAE class is the ambient temperature. Incorrect viscosity can impair the operation of
axles and gearboxes.
The temperature ranges shown in the diagram are approximate ranges that might
temporarily be exceeded.
5.7.6 Lubricating oil for transmission

Liebherr Motoroil 10W-40 API: CF
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
5.7.7 Grease
5.7.7.1 Quality
Liebherr Universalfett 9900 Soap-base grease (lithium complex)

KPF 2 N - 25 (DIN 51502)
NLGI grade: 2 (DIN 51818)
VKA welding force: > 6000 N (DIN 51350 / 4)
- Liebherr Universalfett Arctic (for low- Soap-base grease (lithium complex)
temperature operation) KPFHC 1 N - 60 (DIN 51502)
NLGI grade: 1 (DIN 51818)
VKA welding force: > 5500 N (DIN 51350 / 4)
The grease is used for both automatic and manual machine lubrication. it is supplied
by the central lubrication system or through lubrication nipples to the respective lube
points.
Examples:
– Slewing ring bearings
– Crown gears, geared wheels
– Bolts, axles and screws
– Attachments
5.7.7.2 Operating temperature
Fig. 5-13 Operating temperature for Liebherr greases
A Grease temperature
* The grease is not suitable for the temperature range (shaded), if used in a
central lubrication system.
** The grease may only be within the temperature range (shaded) for short
periods of time. Peak temperatures of max. 200 °C (392 °F) are possible.
5.7.8 Lubricants and care products for electrical and mechanical

components
Medium, purpose Product (manufacturer)

Contact spray for slip rings Cramolin
Lubricant for pistons, piston nuts and for the mounting Gleitmo 800
of piston rod bearings at hydraulic cylinders
Special corrosion inhibitor for mounting recesses of Rostilo Tarp CFX
sealing elements at hydraulic cylinders
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Diesel engine
5.8 Diesel engine
5.8.1 Checking the oil level in the diesel engine
Danger!
Risk of burning.
The engine oil is hot when it near its operating temperature.
X Do not allow hot oil or oil-bearing parts to come into contact with the skin.
The machine must be standing level.

X Wait until the oil has collected in the oil pan.
Fig. 5-14 Oil level markings on the dipstick
X Withdraw the dipstick and wipe with a clean lint-free cloth.

X Fully insert the dipstick.
X Withdraw the dipstick again and check the oil level.
ª The oil level must lie between the MIN and MAX marks.
5.8.2 Changing the diesel engine oil
Note!
X Only carry out the oil change when the engine is warm.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Diesel engine
Fig. 5-15 Drain valve on the oil pan, oil filter cartridges, oil filling nozzle
Drain the oil (A):

X Unscrew the cover cap on the oil pan drain valve.
X Screw the supplied oil drain hose 1 onto the oil pan drain valve.
X Collect the oil in a suitable container.
X Unscrew the oil drainage hose and screw the cover cap onto the drain valve.
To change the oil filter cartridges (B):
Danger!
Risk of burning.
X Avoid skin contact with the hot oil when unscrewing the oil filter cartridges.
Note!
Protect the ribbed V-belt against any oil that leaks out when changing the filter
cartridge!
X Loosen the oil filter cartridge using a strap spanner and unscrew the filter.
X Clean the sealing surface on the filter bracket.
X Oil the rubber sealing ring on the new oil filter cartridges.
X Screw on the new filter elements until the sealing ring fits against the filter head.
X Use the oil filter key to tighten the oil filter cartridges 1/2 to 3/4 turn by hand.
Fill with oil (C):

X Add the oil through oil filler nozzle until the level reaches the upper marking on
the dipstick.
X Close off the oil filling nozzle.
X Start the engine and check the oil pressure.
X Shout down the engine after 2-3 minutes.
X Check the oil level and add more oil if necessary.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Diesel engine
5.8.3 Ribbed V-belt for A/C compressor and alternator installation

The diesel engine is fitted with a tensioning device for the ribbed V-belt. This is self-
tensioning and therefore maintenance-free. The ribbed V-belt should be regularly
checked for wear and replaced if necessary.
Fig. 5-16 Replacing the ribbed V-belt
To replace the ribbed V-belt:

To replace the ribbed V-belt, you will need a ratchet compliant with DIN 3122
D12.5 (1/2").
X Reset the tensioning device in a counter-clockwise direction against the spring
force as far as the stop.
X Remove the ribbed V-belt.
X Place the new ribbed V-belt on the belt pulleys for the crankshaft, a/c compressor,
alternator and deflection pulley with the tensioning device reset.
X Move the tensioning device in a clockwise direction back to the tensioned
position.
Note!
When replacing the ribbed V-belt, check the tensioning pulley and deflection pulley
for ease of movement. Immediately replace defective tensioning pulleys and
deflection pulleys.
5.8.4 Crankcase bleeding point

Fig. 5-17 Replace the filter element
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Diesel engine
Replace the filter insert:

X Carefully clean the crankcase bleeding point and surrounding area.
X Unscrew and remove the cover cap; if necessary, use a screwdriver.
X Withdraw the filter cartridge insert and dispose of it in an environmentally
acceptable manner.
X Fit the new filter cartridge insert and push it to the stop position.
X Fit the cover cap and turn it by hand until you reach the stop position.
5.8.5 Grease the starter tooth ring

The maintenance cover is located behind the flywheel housing on the right side of
the engine.
Fig. 5-18 Grease the starter tooth ring
1 Maintenance cover 4 Turning device

2 Starter tooth ring 5 Pinion
3 Sensor tooth ring
Note!
When greasing, ensure that sensor tooth ring 3 is kept free of grease.
X Unscrew maintenance cover 1.

X Fit turning device 4 to the flywheel housing.
X Turn the flywheel with turning device 4 and use pinion 5 on the turning device to
transfer grease onto starter tooth ring 2.
X Remove turning device 4.
X Screw on maintenance cover 1.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Cooling system
5.9 Cooling system
5.9.1 Checking and cleaning the cooling system
Fig. 5-19 Cooling system
The machine has a combined water-charge air-fuel-hydraulic oil cooler.

Optimal cooling can only be achieved when the cooler is kept clean.
X Check the engine, fan and cooler for damage and clean if necessary.
X If required, clean the cooling fins with compressed air or a steam jet (from inside
out).
X In case of leaks, change the pressure relief valve (sealing cap of expansion tank).
X Regularly check the condition and seals on the connecting hoses between the
coolant cooler and engine as well as on the coolant hoses.
5.9.2 Checking the coolant level
Danger!
Risk of burning due to hot coolant.
The engine cooling system is hot and pressurized when running at operating
temperature.
X Avoid touching coolant or coolant-bearing parts.
X Only check the coolant level when the sealing cap on the filler neck has cooled
sufficiently.
X Open the sealing cap a half turn.

X Relieve any pressure that may be present in this position. After the pressure has
equalised, slowly turn it fully open.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Cooling system
Fig. 5-20 Checking the expansion tank, coolant level
The coolant level when cold must reach the lower end of the immersion tube under
the filler neck.
X Add more coolant if necessary.
X Close the sealing cap.
X After adding coolant, allow the engine to run for a short time with the heating
switched on and check the coolant level once again.
5.9.3 Changing the coolant
Danger!
Risk of burning due to hot coolant.
X Only change the coolant when the engine is cold.
Fig. 5-21 Cooling circuit shutoff valves
The following points should be noted when changing the coolant:

– Change the coolant in the entire coolant circuit at least every two years.
– The coolant should preferably be changed with the cooling circuit shutoff valves
closed.
– Bleed the cooling circuit after it is refilled.
– Coolant can only flow through the cooling circuit when the ignition key is in the
contact position.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Cooling system
5.9.3.1 Draining the coolant
Fig. 5-22 Draining the coolant
To drain the coolant at the cooler:

X Unscrew the protective cap of drain valve 1 on the coolant radiator.
X Screw the supplied drain hose to the drain valve.
X Allow the coolant to drain into a suitable container.
To drain the coolant at the diesel engine:

X Unscrew the protective cap on drain valve 2 on the engine oil cooler plate.
X Screw the supplied drain hose to the drain valve.
X Allow the coolant to drain into a suitable container.
5.9.3.2 Refilling the coolant and bleeding the coolant circuit

X Close drain valve 1 on the coolant cooler.
X Close drain valve 2 on the engine.
X Fully open the regulating valve on the heating unit.
X Fill with coolant through filler neck until it reaches the upper edge of the filler
neck.
X Re-close the sealing cap.
X Allow the engine to run under load for approx. 20 minutes.
X If necessary, partially cover the cooling system so that the opening temperature
of the thermostats is exceeded.
ª The overheating indicator should not be triggered.

ª The water temperature indicator on the monitoring display must remain below
the red area.
X Remove any covers that may be on the cooling system.
X Allow the engine to continue to run at a low idle for approx. one minute.
X Re-check the coolant level in the expansion tank and refill with coolant if
necessary.
X Open the sealing cap.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Cooling system
X Fill with coolant through the filler neck until it reaches the upper edge of the filler
neck.
X Re-close the sealing cap.
X If the coolant level sensor is triggered, check the coolant level (refill if necessary).
X Bleed as described above.
Caution!
The engine could be damaged.
X Immediately bring the engine to a low idle if the temperature or coolant level
indicator starts to flash.
X Check the coolant level and refill with coolant if necessary.
5.9.4 Checking coolant, adjusting mixing ratio
5.9.4.1 Coolant with corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze agent

The mixing ratio must at all times conform to a frost protection of -37 °C.
X Take a coolant sample and analyse it with a suitable method for the frost
protection temperature.
X Adjust mixing ratio, if the frost protection is not sufficient.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Cooling system
Fig. 5-23 Determining refill volume - example for -15 °C:
1 Corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze agent 3 Max. frost protection temperature of

(concentrate), refill volume in litres the cooling system -°C
2 Auxiliary line 4 Coolant volume in radiator in litres
Determining refill volume - example for -15 °C / 50 litres of coolant:

Based on the measured frost protection temperature (-15 °C) follow the auxiliary line
2 from the left bottom corner to the vertical line 4 (coolant volume – 50 litres) and
from there horizontally to the left scale. The refill volume 1 is 14.8 litres.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Cooling system
This corresponds to the refill volume of corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze agent

(concentrate) to be added in order to again achieve a frost protection temperature of
-37 °C.
Correcting mixing ratio

The necessary refill volume is known.
X To correct the mixing ratio, at least the (previously determined) volume must be
drained from the cooling system.
X Add the determined volume of corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze agent (concentrate).
X To achieve the required coolant level, add some of the previously drained coolant.
5.9.4.2 Coolant with corrosion inhibitor (without antifreeze agent)

When using DCA 4:
X Take a coolant sample and analyse the concentration using a Fleetguard CC
2602 M testing kit.
X If the concentration is incorrect, correct the mixing ratio (according to the values
indicated by the test kit).
When using Caltex / Chevron / Havoline / Total:
The mixing ratio must always show a Brix value of 2.8-0.9+0.9 % . This corresponds
to 5 to 10 % of corrosion inhibitor and 90 to 95 % of water.
X Take a coolant sample and analyse with a Gefo refractometer.
Fig. 5-24 Gefo refractometer 2710
Refractometer:
– Adjusting screw for adjustment to 0-line (water line)
– Adjustment of acuity by turning the eyepiece
– Soft edge of eyepiece
– Sturdy metal housing
– Safe handling thanks to rubber jacket
Measuring procedure:
X Carefully clean the lid and prism.
X Apply 1 to 2 drops of sample liquid onto the prism.

X Close the lid.
ª The liquid is distributed.
X Hold the device against a light-coloured background and look through the
eyepiece.
X Adjust focus on scale and read the value at the blue separating line.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Cooling system
Fig. 5-25 Determining refill volume - example for 1 % Brix.
1 Corrosion inhibitor, refill volume in 3 Refractometer value in % Brix

litres
2 Auxiliary line 4 Coolant volume in radiator in litres
Determining refill volume - example for 1 % Brix / 50 litres of coolant:

Based on the measured value (1 % Brix), follow the auxiliary line 2 from the left
bottom corner to the vertical line 4 (coolant volume – 50 litres) and from there
horizontally to the left scale. The refill volume 1 is 2.4 litres.
This corresponds to the refill volume of corrosion inhibitor (concentrate) to be added
in order to again achieve a value of 2.8 % Brix.
Correcting mixing ratio

The necessary refill volume is known.
X To correct the mixing ratio, at least the (previously determined) volume must be
drained from the cooling system.
X Add the determined volume of corrosion inhibitor.
X To achieve the required coolant level, add some of the previously drained coolant.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Fuel system
5.10 Fuel system
Danger!
Danger of explosion!
X Avoid open flames when working on the fuel system and when refuelling.
X Do not smoke.
5.10.1 Refuelling
Note!
If the fuel tank is emptied while the diesel engine is running, the fuel system must
be bled, which is a complicated and time-consuming procedure.
X Therefore avoid running the tank empty and refuel the machine on time.
Fig. 5-26 Tank lid
X Remove the tank lid 1.

X Refill fuel through the strainer.
5.10.1.1 Electric refuelling pump (optional equipment)

Fig. 5-27 Electric refuelling pump
The electric refuelling tank is used to refill fuel into the fuel tank of the machine.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Fuel system
It is located below the flap on the front side of the hydraulic and fuel tanks. The
control panel 3 is removable.
To refuel and then store away the hoses, proceed as follows:

X Remove the tank lid.
X Insert the free end of the suction hose 1 into the fuel container.
X Open the stop cock 2 (position B).
X Switch on the refuelling pump with the switch S25 (green) to pump fuel into the
tank of the machine.
ª The pump is automatically switched off when the maximum fill level is reached.
ª The refuelling pump can be switched off at any time with the switch S59 (red).
Caution!
Prevent the pump from running dry!
X Ensure that the fuel level does not drop below the suction height of the suction
hose.
X Close the stop cock 2 (position A).

X Before storing away the hose, ensure that no fuel is left in the suction hose 1.
X Roll up the suction hose 1 and store it away it in the storage place.
X Close the flap.
X Replace the tank lid.
5.10.2 Dewatering fuel tank
Fig. 5-28 Dewatering fuel tank
The fuel tank must be dewatered daily:

The tank base is equipped with a water drain valve 1.
X Place a suitable container under the machine.

X Open the drain valve 1 at the bottom of the fuel tank.
X Drain off the water until fuel begins to escape.
X Close the drain valve 1.
Depending on the fuel quality and the conditions under which the machine is
operated, the interval may be prolonged to one week.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Fuel system
Note!
To minimise condensation in the tank, keep the fuel level as high as possible.
The indicator P3 indicates the fuel level in the tank.

When the red bars P3.1 are on, there is very little fuel left in the tank.
X If the fuel level is low, refuel before starting work.
5.10.3 Emptying and cleaning fuel tank
Fig. 5-29 Fuel tank

X To drain off the water from the tank, open the drain screw out the drain valve 1 by
two full revolutions and let the water flow out until fuel begins to escape.
X Screw in the screw.
X To empty the tank, remove the tank lid 3 and the drain valve 1 and collect the fuel
in a suitable container.
X Regularly check the fuel tank and the strainer 2 for dirt.
X If required, replace the strainer 2 and/or rinse out the fuel tank.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Fuel system
5.10.4 Maintenance of fuel filter
Fig. 5-30 Overview of fuel filter
1 Fuel pre-filter 2 Fuel fine filter
5.10.4.1 Dewatering fuel pre-filter:
Fig. 5-31 Fuel pre-filter
X Place a suitable container under the filter.

X Screw out the drain plug a.
X Operate the hand pump b to drain off the water until fuel begins to escape.
X Screw in the drain plug a.
5.10.4.2 Replacing filter cartridges

X Carefully clean the fuel filter and the adjacent area.
X Place a suitable container under the tank.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Fuel system
Changing the fuel pre-filter:
Fig. 5-32 Fuel pre-filter
1 Filter head 2 Filter cartridge 3 Water separator tank

4 Bleeder screw 5 Fuel pre-heating plug 6 Water level sensor
plug
7 O-ring 8 Seal ring a Drain plug
b Hand pump
X Disconnect the electrical connections 5 and 6.

X Screw out the bleeder screw 4 and the drain plug a and drain off the fuel.
X Remove the filter cartridge 2.
X Screw the water separator tank 3 from the filter cartridge 2.
X Clean the water separator water 3 with clean fuel.
X Apply fuel to the O-ring 7.
X Insert the new filter cartridge and tighten it by hand.
X Screw in the drain plug a.
X Apply clean fuel to the seal ring 8 of the new filter cartridge.
X Fill the filter cartridge 2 with clean fuel.
X Screw in the filter cartridge until the seal ring touches the filter head 1 and tighten
it by hand.
X Reconnect the electrical connections 5 and 6.
X Close the bleeder valve 4.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Fuel system
Changing the fuel fine filter:
Fig. 5-33 Fuel fine filter
X Remove the filter cartridge.

X Apply clean fuel to the seal ring of the new filter cartridge.
X Fill the filter cartridge with clean fuel.
X Screw in the filter cartridge until the seal ring touches the filter head and tighten it
by hand.
5.10.5 Bleeding fuel system

The fuel filter must be bled after:
– Change of fuel filter
The entire fuel system must be bled after:
– Emptying fuel tank
– Commissioning of the diesel engine after work on the fuel system
Note!
To bleed the fuel system, do not open the fuel/injection line or screw connections.
Bleeding fuel filter:
Fig. 5-34 Bleeding fuel filter

X Place a suitable container under the tank.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Fuel system
X Loosen the bleeder screw 1 at the filter head of the fuel pre-filter 2 and turn it out
by 3 thread turns.
X Operate the hand pump 2 until the fuel escapes without bubbles.
X Tighten the bleeder valve 1.
X Operate the hand pump 2 until there is a discernable resistance.
X Remove the bleeder screw 3 at the filter head of the fuel fine filter 2 and turn it out
by 3 thread turns.
X Operate the hand pump 2 until the fuel escapes without bubbles.
X Tighten the bleeder valve 3.
Bleeding crankcase:
Fig. 5-35 Bleeder screw at the crankcase
X Loosen the bleeder screw 1 at the crankcase and turn it out by 2-3 thread turns.
X Operate the hand pump 2 until the fuel escapes without bubbles at the bleeder
screw.
X Tighten the bleeder screw 1 at the crankcase.
X If required, start the diesel engine in purge mode (PURGE).
Starting diesel engine in PURGE mode:
Note!
To start the machine in purge mode, the fuel tank must be driven empty.
First bleed the emptied fuel system by hand (see previous chapter). Some air
remains however in the fuel high pressure system. This air can only escape when the
diesel engine is started.

The purge mode (drive menu, PURGE option) assists this procedure. The fuel high
pressure system is automatically bled, so that the diesel engine starts better.
The PURGE is only available if the diesel engine is not on.
X Switch on the ignition.
X In the operator's menu, select the PURGE option.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Dry air filter
Fig. 5-36 PURGE menu

ª The purge mode is activated (purge = ON)
ª The injection unit uses the maximum possible quantity of fuel. This results in
increased build-up of fumes.
ª When the diesel engine has started up and reached a certain speed (> 500
rpm), the purge mode is automatically deactivated (purge = OFF) and the
menu disappears from the display.
ª The injection unit works again in normal mode.
X Do not operate the starter for more than 20 seconds.
X If the diesel engine fails to start, bleed the fuel system again and restart the
engine in purge mode.
5.11 Dry air filter
It is only possible to provide maximum engine protection against premature dust

wear by ensuring that the air filter is serviced at regular intervals.
The dry air filter is designed to provide maximum protection over long maintenance
intervals.
Washing the filter cartridges is not recommended for safety reasons.
Fig. 5-37 Low pressure indicator
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Dry air filter
Low pressure indicator 1 stores the maximum attained suction underpressure

reached at the filter outlet when the diesel engine is running.
The appearance of the red display strip in alarm window 3 indicates that the
maximum permissible underpressure of 50 mbar has been reached.
X Replace the main element.
X Press reset button 2 to clear the stored underpressure reading.
Fig. 5-38 Dust discharge valve extractor slot
The dust discharge valve on the dry-air filter is accessible via an opening on the
underside of the engine compartment.
X Push up by hand the extractor slot on the dust discharge valve once a week to
ensure that it does not stick due to humidity and dust.
5.11.1 Changing the main element
Caution!
Only replace the main element when the maximum permissible suction
underpressure has been reached, or at least once a year.
Installing and removing the main element too often could damage the seals between
the filter element and filter housing.
X Only replace the safety element after every third change of the main element, or
at least once a year.
X Before installing a new insert, carefully clean the seal and seal contact surface in
the housing.
Fig. 5-39 Changing the filter cartridges
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Dry air filter
1 Filter housing cover 3 Main element

2 Filter housing 4 Safety element
X Remove the cover 1 with the engine switched off.

X Remove the contaminated main element 3.
X Clean the interior of the air filter housing and the sealing surface in the housing
using a damp cloth.
Caution!
Dirt could enter the engine intake!
X Do not clean the housing by blasting it out with compressed air.
X Insert the new main element and ensure that it is sealed and positioned correctly.
X Close filter housing 2 using cover 1.
5.11.2 Changing the safety element
Note!
Replace the safety element after replacing the main filter cartridge three times or at
least once a year.
Immediately replace the safety element if a visual check has shown that the safety
element is heavily contaminated.
X Remove main element 3.

X Remove safety element 4.
X Clean the interior of the air filter housing carefully using a damp cloth.
X Clean sealing surfaces in the housing and inspect for any damage.
X Insert the new safety element 4 carefully.
X Insert the main filter cartridge 3 and ensure that it is sealed and positioned
correctly.
X Close filter housing 2 using cover 1.
5.11.3 Checking the filtered air line

Fig. 5-40 Checking the filtered air line
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Hydraulic system
X Check the filtered air line between the filter outlet and the engine suction pipe 8
for damage and leaks each time the filter element is replaced.
X If necessary, retighten the tension clamp screws 7.
5.12 Hydraulic system
Maintenance work on the hydraulic system is limited to the hydraulic tank.

All other components of the unit do not require any special maintenance or servicing.
The network of pipes and hoses must however be inspected regularly for leaks.
Note!
Cleanliness is of particular importance for the proper working of the hydraulic
system.
For this reason, the prescribed intervals for
– change of the return filter
– cleaning of the oil cooler
– oil change must be strictly adhered to.
5.12.1 Preparation
Fig. 5-41 Machine position for the oil level check in the hydraulic system
Before checking the oil level or to add oil, ensure that:

– the machine is standing on level and firm ground,
– the working attachment is placed on the ground and the stick and die bucket
cylinders are fully extended (i.e. bucket and stick fully tilted in),
– the supports (blade support / outriggers) are fully extended.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Hydraulic system
5.12.2 Checking the oil level in the hydraulic tank
Fig. 5-42 Oil level in hydraulic tank
When the machine is in test position, the level may not drop below the centre mark
in the sight glass.
X If required, add oil through the return filter until the level reaches the centre mark.
The upper mark MAXI indicates the maximum oil level when all cylinders are fully
retracted.
The lower mark MINI indicates the minimum oil level when all cylinders are fully
extended.
If the oil level drops below the lower mark MINI, the minimum level is reached and
the respective warning symbol is shown at the display.
5.12.3 Releasing the pressure from the hydraulic system
Danger!
Fine jets of fluid escaping under high pressure can penetrate the skin and result in
serious injury.
X Before carrying out any work on the hydraulic system, you must fully
depressurise it.
X Do not use your bare hands to check the equipment for leaks.
Observe the following:

The machine must be in the position described above.
X Turn the switch S75 to position 0.
ª The oscillating axle is released.
X Operate the pilot control device (joystick and pedals) in all directions (while start
key is in contact position).
Danger!
At operating temperature, the hydraulic oil is hot and might even be under pressure.
X Avoid skin contact with hot oil or parts containing oil.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Hydraulic system
Fig. 5-43 Releasing pressure in the hydraulic system, breather filter
X Rotate the breather filter 1 by maximum one full turn.

ª The hydraulic system is now gradually depressurised.
The breather filter 1 can be rotated by hand when the safety pin 2 is inserted. If
necessary, use an open end spanner to open the filter.
5.12.4 Replacing breather filter

Depressurise the hydraulic system.
X Replace the filter 1 with the safety pin 2 (see Fig. 5-43) at each hydraulic oil
change.
Note!
X In areas with excessive production of dust, observe the special instructions for
the filter change.
5.12.5 Emptying and refilling hydraulic tank

Fig. 5-44 Draining and refilling hydraulic oil
1 Breather filter 2 Return filter 3 Drain valve
X If possible, empty and refill the hydraulic system using a filler unit.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Hydraulic system
Draining oil:
X Remove the lid from the return filter 2.
X Screw the drain hose onto the drain valve 3 at the bottom of the tank and let the
oil drain into a suitable container.
Refilling hydraulic oil:

X Remove the lid from the return filter 2.
X Refill oil through the filter cartridge until it reaches the centre mark in the sight
glass.
X Tighten the breather filter 1.
X Replace the lid from the return filter 2.
Caution!
Hydraulic components might be damaged, if the system is not bled!
X Bleed the hydraulic pumps after each hydraulic oil change.
Draining off the condensate (only for mineral oil):

X Regularly drain the condensate from the system.
X Connect the drain hose to the drain valve 3 (see Fig. 5-44) until the oil flowing into
the container does not contain any water.
5.12.6 Return filter
Fig. 5-45 Return filter
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Hydraulic system
1 Cover 4 Flat gasket

2 Hex head screw 5 Filter cartridge
3 Magnetic rod 6 Protective cylinder
The magnetic rod 5 of the return filter must be cleaned at regular intervals (see
maintenance schedule) and must be replaced together with the filter cartridge 6.
Note!
X In areas with excessive production of dust, observe the special instructions for
the filter change.
Cleaning magnetic rod, replacing filter element:

X Loosen the screws at the filter lid and lift off the lid 1 with the magnetic rod 5.
X Carefully clean the magnetic rod 5 removing any residual dirt.
X Remove the spent filter cartridge 6 holding it by the bracket.
X Insert the new filter cartridge into the tank, holding it by the bracket, and push it
down slightly. Place the bracket to the side at the tank ring.
Caution!
X Ensure that the filter cartridge is inserted vertically in the tank.
X Centre and place the lid 1 with the bypass cage 4 carefully on the filter cartridge
6. Ensure that the seal ring 3 is not damaged.
Note!
The filling opening of the hydraulic tank is equipped with a protective cylinder 7. This
prevents foreign bodies entering the hydraulic tank. If required, the protective
cylinder can be removed from the filling opening.
Note!
X After each replacement of the filter cartridge 6, also replace the pressure filter
cartridge integrated into the control oil unit.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Hydraulic system
5.12.7 Control oil filter
Fig. 5-46 Control oil unit
1 Control oil unit 5 Seal ring of filter cartridge

2 Pressure filter 6 Filter pot
3 Mounting stud 7 Seal ring of filter pot
4 Filter cartridge 8 Accumulator
The pressure filter 2 is an integral part of the control oil unit 1 located at the rear of
the hydraulic tank.
Note!
The cleaning of the filter cartridge is prohibited!
X Each time you open the filter pot, replace the cartridge.
Replacing filter cartridge:

X Remove the filter pot 6 of the pressure filter 2 and pull out the filter element 4.
X Clean the filter pot.
X Apply a little hydraulic oil to the threads and sealing faces at the filter pot 6 and at
the control oil unit 1 as well as to the sealing rings 5 and 7.
X Carefully place the new filter element 4 onto the mounting stud 2.
X Screw in the filter pot 6 to the stop and tighten it by hand.
5.12.8 Control circuit

The sensing devices do not require any special maintenance or servicing.
X Regularly inspect the pipelines and the connections of all units (pumps, pressure
accumulators, pressure relief valve, pressure filter, etc.) for leakage.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Hydraulic system
Danger!
The pressure accumulator 8 (see Fig. 5-46) ensures that the control circuit remains
pressurised after the diesel engine is shut down so that a number of movements
remain possible.
Prior to interfering with the control pressure circuit, it must be depressurised:
X To do this, place the attachment on the ground.
X Operate both joysticks (while the ignition key is in start position).
5.12.9 Bleeding of hydraulic pumps

Prior to commissioning the pumps, after repairs and after a replacement of the pump,
fill the pump housing with hydraulic oil through the leak oil connection.
After the system has been filled, and after an oil change in the hydraulic system,
bleed the hydraulic pumps.
Caution!
Risk of damage to machine or limited functionality!
Hydraulic pumps that were not bled might be damaged during operation, or might
result in a limited functioning of the fan drive.
X Bleed the hydraulic pumps also if air has been trapped in the system as a result
of work carried out on the hydraulic system.
The system can be bled at two points.

– Hydraulic pumps, (see Fig. 5-47)
– Hydraulic pump of the fan drive, (see Fig. 5-48)
Bleeding hydraulic pumps:

Fig. 5-47 Double hydraulic pump
X Place a suitable container to collect the hydraulic oil under the bleed point.
X Slightly loosen the leak oil hose 1 and let the air escape.
ª The working pumps are being bled.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Hydraulic system
X As soon as the hydraulic oil escapes without bubbles, tighten the leak oil hose 1.
X Slightly loosen the leak oil hose 2 and let the air escape.
ª The slewing gear pump is being bled.
X As soon as the hydraulic oil escapes without bubbles, tighten the leak oil hose 2.
Hydraulic pump of the fan drive,
Fig. 5-48 Hydraulic pump of the fan drive
X Turn the screw plug by one full rotation (see arrow) and let the air escape.
X As soon as the hydraulic oil escapes without bubbles, tighten the screw plug.
5.12.10 Removing suction hose
Fig. 5-49 Suction hose, stop cock

The stop cock of the suction hose has two positions:

– a open
– b closed
X If the suction hose is to be disconnected at the pump or at the hydraulic tank,
close the stop cock b.
X Release the pressure from the hydraulic system.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Hydraulic system
X Drain the hydraulic oil from the pump and suction hose.
X After completion of the repair, turn the stop cock to its initial position a.
X Tighten the breather filter at the hydraulic tank.
5.12.11 Feed line filter of the slewing gear circuit
Fig. 5-50 Feed line filter of the slewing gear circuit
The cartridge of the feed line filter attached to the slewing gear pump must be
replaced at prescribed intervals.
X Remove the filter pot.
X Take out the filter cartridge and insert a new one.
X Replace the filter pot.
5.12.12 Leak oil filter

Fig. 5-51 Leak oil filter
The leak oil filter is located in the engine compartment. It is mounted on the hydraulic
tank. The filter cartridge must be inspected at prescribed intervals and each time a
hydraulic system is replaced. If necessary, the cartridge must be cleaned.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Hydraulic system
Cleaning filter cartridge

X Remove the filter pot 1.
X Remove the filter cartridge.
X Wash the filter cartridge with petrol or replace it.
X Clean the filter pot 1 and the filter head.
X Mount the filter pot 1 with the filter cartridge.
Caution!
After cleaning or replacement of the cartridge, check the system for leakage.
X Start the engine and operate the machine for a short period of time.
X Check the filter pot and the filter head for leakage.
5.12.13 Bypass oil filter (optional extra)

The bypass oil filter has the task of filtering fine dirt and water out of the hydraulic
system.
Replace the filter element whenever the return-line filter is changed. The filter should
always be changed every six months.
Note!
LIEBHERR strictly requires the use of bypass oil filters when environmentally-
friendly hydraulic oils are used.
Fig. 5-52 Bypass oil filter
1 Screw 4 O-ring
2 Washer 5 Filter element

3 Cover 6 Filter housing
Replace filter element:

X Depressurize the hydraulic system.
X Remove screw 1 and remove cover 3.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Hydraulic system
X Slightly turn the old filter element 5 in a clockwise direction using the support
straps and lift at the same time.
X Wait until the oil has drained and then remove filter element 5. Catch any dripping
oil using a suitable container.
X Check the inlet and outlet of filter housing 6 for dirt residues and clean if
necessary.
X Take the new filter element 5 out of the packaging without removing the
cardboard shroud around the filter element.
Note!
Damaged packaging may have resulted in the ingress of humidity which can limit
the life of the filter element.
X Ensure that the packaging of the new filter element has not been damaged.
X Insert the new filter element 5.

X Fill filter housing 6 with the same hydraulic oil as the machine.
X Clean cover 3 and fit a new O-ring 4.
X Attach the cover 3 and fasten with screw 1. Tighten to a torque of 50 Nm.
X Start the engine and check whether the bypass oil filter is tight.
5.12.14 Maintenance of hydraulic cylinders
5.12.14.1 Checking piston rod bearing
Fig. 5-53 Piston rod bearing
Note
If there is a leak at the piston rod bearing of a hydraulic cylinder (arrow), we
recommend having the seal kit replaced by a LIEBHERR technician.
5.12.14.2 Preservation of piston rods

Prior to standstills of more than 4 weeks, and in particular prior to any sea transport
of the machine, carry out the following tasks:
X If possible, position and transport the machine in such a way that the piston rods
are fully retracted into the cylinders.
X Exposed piston rods must be protected with a thick layer of acid-free corrosion
protection grease.
X Before loading the machine, check the piston rods again for proper preservation.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Changing the oil on components
X Also apply corrosion protection grease to the piston rods, if the respective cylinder
is rarely operated during work. Piston rods that are not frequently retracted and
extended are not properly lubricated with hydraulic oil.
X Regularly check the preservation of rarely operated hydraulic cylinders.
5.12.15 Replacing hydraulic hoses
Fig. 5-54 High pressure hose with SAE fitting
Danger!
A defective hydraulic hose can cause accidents and injuries.
X Replace defective hydraulic hoses (bubbles, moisture, damaged top edge etc.)
immediately.
X Install new hydraulic hoses without torsion.
X Ensure that the hydraulic hose is not twisted when mounting.
Installed high pressure hoses with SAE connections have a nominal diameter of 16,
20 or 25.
Tighten the mounting screws of SAE fittings with the following tightening torques.
:
Screw Grade Torque
M10 10.9 68 Nm
M12 10.9 117 Nm
M14 10.9 185 Nm
Tab. 5-16 Tightening torques for SAE fittings
5.13 Changing the oil on components

5.13.1 General notes

The machine must be in level position.
X Shut down the engine.
X Wait for a short time until the oil has collected in the oil pan.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
X If possible, drain the oil when it is at operating temperature.
5.13.2 Swin gear - oil change
Fig. 5-55 Changing the oil on the swing gear
1 Drain valve 3 Oil container

2 Drain hose 4 Cap
To drain the oil:

X Remove the cap 4.
X Unscrew the cover of the drain valve 1 via the opening on the base plate of the
swing platform.
X Screw the provided drain hose 2 on the drain valve and allow the oil to flow into a
suitable container.
X Remove the hose 2.
X Reinstall the cover of the drain valve 1.
To add the oil:

X Add the oil via the tank 3 until the level reaches the MAX mark.
X Reinstall cover 4.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
5.13.3 Transmission – oil change
Fig. 5-56 Changing the oil in the transmission
1 Oil drain screw 2 Oil filling and oil filler screw
To drain the oil:

X Remove oil filling screw 2.
X Remove oil drain screw 1.
X Allow the oil to drain into a suitable container.
X Screw oil drain screw 1 back in.
To fill with oil:

X Fill with oil until it reaches the level of the lower edge of oil filling hole 2.
X Screw oil filling screw 2 back in.
5.13.4 Steering axle and rigid axle - oil change
Fig. 5-57 Changing the oil on the steering axle and rigid axle
To drain the oil:

copyright by
MJFCIFSS

To fill with oil:

5.13.5 Wheel hub - oil change
Fig. 5-58 Changing the oil in the wheel hub (A 934 C Li Fig. left, A 934 C-HD Li Fig.
right)
X Turn the wheel hub so that oil drain screw 1 is located exactly vertically beneath
the centre of the wheel arch.
To fill with oil:

X Turn the wheel hub until the level line is exactly horizontal.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Checking brake pads for wear
5.13.6 Pump distributor gear - oil change
Fig. 5-59 Oil change in the pump distributor gear
1 Oil filler neck / dipstick 3 Drain hose

2 Drain valve
Draining oil:
X Remove the dipstick 1.
X Remove the screw cap at the drain valve 2.
X Connect the drain hose 3 to the drain valve 2 and let the oil drain into a suitable
container.
X Disconnect the drain hose 3.
X Replace the screw cap at the drain valve 2.
Filling oil:
X Add oil through the filler neck 1 until it reaches the upper mark (max) on the
dipstick.
5.14 Checking brake pads for wear
The LIEBHERR customer service department checks the brakes for wear and
replaces worn brake pads.
X Brake pads must be checked at least once every year.
X The check must also be carried out, if any of the following occur:
– Unusual brake noises
– Reduced brake force
– Reduced brake pressure
– Drop of oil level in wheel hub
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Electrical system
5.15 Electrical system
5.15.1 Notes regarding the electrical system

X Regularly inspect the electrical system of the machine for defects.
X Defects such as loose connections, chaffed cables or poorly fixed clamps must
be eliminated without delay.
X Identify the cause of blown fuses and broken incandescent lamps, eliminate it and
replace the fuse or the lamp.
X Before carrying out any work on the electrical system or carrying out electric arc
welding work on the machine, disconnect the batteries.
5.15.2 Battery main switch
Caution!
Do not interrupt the saving process of the engine control unit.
After switching off the diesel engine, the engine control unit remains activated for
approx. 40 seconds in order to save system data. Switching off the battery main
switch during saving might result in the loss of data so that the diesel engine cannot
be restarted.
X After switching off the diesel engine, wait for approx. 1 minute before switching
off the battery main switch to ensure that the saving process is properly
completed.
Caution!
The auxiliary heater (optional equipment) remains on for a little while after the
ignition has been switched off. It might be damaged, if it is suddenly switched off
with the battery main switch during this afterrun time.
X Only switch off the battery main switch after the afterrun time of the auxiliary
heater has lapsed.
Fig. 5-60 Battery main switch
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Electrical system
X Before carrying out any work on the electrical system or performing welding work
on the machine, set the battery main switch to position 0 (off).
Note!
The battery might discharge itself during prolonged standstills.
X Prior to prolonged standstills, switch the battery main switch to position 0 (off).
5.15.3 Battery care
Danger!
Battery acid is highly corrosive.
X When working on the battery, always wear protective goggles and gloves.
Danger
Risk of explosion from hydrogen gas and sparks.
X Check the vent hoses for damage, especially after installation of the battery.
X The negative pole (-) must be disconnected first and reconnected last.
X Avoid sparks and naked flames when charging batteries or working on them.
X Charge the batteries only in well ventilated rooms.
Fig. 5-61 Battery care
For proper functioning, the battery must always bee kept clean.
The liquid level in the cells should be about 10 to 15 mm above the upper edge of the
plate. To refill the battery, only use demineralised water.
The hydrogen gas produced in the batteries must escape through rubber hoses B to
the outside of the building. Ensure that the rubber hoses are not kinked or damaged,
as this could lead to hydrogen gas collecting in the battery box.

X Lay the vent hoses B in such a way that there are not kinks or blocked sections
in the hoses.
X Always replace damaged vent hoses.
X Regularly clean the pole heads and cable terminals A and apply a thick layer of
acid-proof grease.
X From time to time, check the acid density using a battery tester C.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Electrical system
If the battery is fully charged, the density is 1.28 kg/l (31.5° Bé).
If the battery tester shows a lower value, the battery is discharged to some degree
and might need to be recharged.
5.15.4 Slip ring body (optional equipment)
Fig. 5-62 Slip ring body
The slip ring body connects the electrical components in the uppercarriage with the
electrical consumers in the undercarriage. The slip ring body can be accessed from
the uppercarriage and is located at the centre of the slewing gear.
Slip ring bodies are easily damaged by humidity, and insufficient care can lead to the
formation of oxide layers on the conductive surfaces. This can impair the electric
conductivity and result in malfunctions.
In order to prevent this, we recommend carrying out the following tasks every 500
operating hours:
X Loosen the lock nuts 2.
X Remove the housing 1.
X Remove any oxidation from the slip ring body (use a cleaning spray, if necessary).
X Replace damaged (corroded) fork terminals.
X Apply Cramolin contact spray to all slip ring elements.
X Mount the housing 1.
X Tighten the lock nuts 2 with a uniform torque.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Heating and air-conditioning system
5.16 Heating and air-conditioning system
5.16.1 Recirculated and ambient air filter
Fig. 5-63 Recirculated air filter
Fig. 5-64 Ambient air filter
If the ambient air filters are dirty, the air flow is reduced. This in turn affects its
performance and can result in frequent icing or shut-down of the a/c system.
Never operate the machine without filters, even for short periods, as this might result
in blockage of the heat exchanger.
The filters must be cleaned or replaced every 500 operating hours (shorten interval,
if the machine is operated in a particularly dusty environment).
Cleaning or replacing the recirculated and ambient air filters:

X To remove the recirculated air filter 1, tilt the backrest of the operator seat
forward.
X Open the quick fasteners 2 by turning them by 90 degrees.
X Remove the recirculated air filter 1.
X Remove the deflector 4.

X Remove the ambient air filter 3.
Note!
Incorrect cleaning of the filters might damage them.
X Never clean the filters with hot water or steam!
X If the ambient air filter is damaged or in poor state, replace it.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Heating and air-conditioning system
X To clean the filter elements 1 / 3, blow them out with compressed air or wash
them in cold or lukewarm water.
5.16.2 Heating system

Every year at the start of the heating period, have the following maintenance routine
completed by a qualified specialist.
X Check the entire coolant circuit for leakage.
X Retighten the connections in the coolant circuit, the hose connections at the heat
exchanger, the seals of the stop valves and the hose clamps.
X If necessary, bleed the heating system.
X Clean the solenoid valve.
X Check the heat exchanger and clean it, if necessary.
The system may only be operated with coolant containing a suitable corrosion
inhibitor and antifreeze agent.
5.16.3 air-conditioning system

X Switch on the a/c system every two to three weeks for about 10 minutes,
irrespective of the season.
Inspection of the condenser:
Fig. 5-65 A/c condensers
1 A/c condenser 2 Cooler
During the operating period, check the condenser every 500 operating hours:
X Inspect the condenser 1 for dirt.

X If necessary, clean the condenser: 1: loosen the securing screws and tilt the
upper part slightly out. Clean it with compressed air, blowing it from the inside
(blower side) out.
X Ensure that the condenser fins are clean.
Dirt on the condenser might lead to excessive pressure in the coolant circuit, so that
the air-conditioning system is automatically switched off.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Automatic lubrication of the machine
Maintenance of a/c system:

X During the operating period, the following maintenance tasks must be carried out
by a technician specialising in a/c systems:
every 500 operating hours:
– Testing of thermostat, blower and pressure switch
– Inspection of the electrical lines
– Testing of the condenser (if necessary: cleaning)
– Testing of a/c compressor
– If necessary, replace the dryer-collector unit.
every 1000 operating hours:
– Inspection of evaporator unit
– Inspection of the electrical lines
– Complete functional test of excess pressure switch
– Check cooling performance
Annually:
– replace the dryer-collector unit.
For this purpose, the a/c system must be drained, inspected for leakage and
refilled. Check the hose lines for chaffing and replace them, if necessary. If
required, retighten the hose connections.
– Functional test of the air flaps and the defrost thermostat.
5.17 Automatic lubrication of the machine
5.17.1 Semi-automatic central greasing system

The machine is equipped with a central greasing system.
The superstructure and the equipment do not need manual greasing. The bearing
points connected to the greasing system can be greased during operations by
starting the greasing process.
The chassis is not connected to the automatic greasing system and must be
manually greased. LHB/en/Edition: 07 / 2011
Fig. 5-66 Central greasing pump, semi-automatic
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
1 Grease container 4 Lubricating nipple for manual

intermediate greasing
2 Adapter (refilling the grease 5 Safety valve
container with a filler pump 6)
3 Lubricating nipple – refill grease 6 filler pump
container
Starting the greasing process:

Greasing is done using switch S84. While the switch is pressed, the electric pump
pumps grease to the connected bearing points.
The greasing process should be started once per work shift.
X Press switch S84.
ª Indicator light in the switch flashes.
ª Grease is delivered to the connected bearing points.
X Allow the switch to go on flashing until grease emerges from the bottom end of
the hydraulic jacks.
Note!
The time needed for greasing depends on the temperature of the grease and of the
components connected to the greasing system. In extremely low outside
temperatures: up to 30 minutes.

ª Indicator light in the switch goes out.
ª The greasing process is completed.
Fig. 5-67 Monitoring pin on the main distributor
The main distributor for the lubrication lines is built into the uppercarriage. A
functional check can be carried out using the monitoring pin (see arrow).
The continual backwards and forwards movement of the monitoring pin indicates
whether the greasing process is functioning correctly (grease delivery). If the
monitoring pin does not move, the error diagnosis is as follows:
– Blockage or pinching of a supply line (grease flows out of safety valve 5).
– In low outside temperatures, the use of a grease which is too viscous.
– Lack of lubricant in the grease container.

– Breakdown in drive motor's supply circuit.
X Find and rectify the cause of the problem immediately.
If the greasing pump is defective, the attached oiling points can be greased centrally
with a greasing pump via lubricating nipple 4.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
To refill the grease container:

The grease container must be checked once a week and refilled if necessary.
Note!
In order to avoid contamination and damage, the grease container should remain
closed.
X Do not remove the cover of the grease container when refilling.
Refilling the grease container is normally done via adapter 2.

X Insert a grease cartridge in the filler pump 6 supplied, connect the pump to the
adapter 2 and squeeze the contents of the grease cartridge into the container.
If the filler pump 6 or grease cartridge are not available, the grease container can be
refilled using a greasing pump or a grease gun via lubricating nipple 3.
After the grease container has been refilled, an intermediate greasing must be
carried out.
Intermediate greasing:
X Automatic: Start the greasing process with switch S84.
or
X Manually: Lubricate the lubricating points via lubricating nipple 4.
X Carry out intermediate greasing until grease emerges from the bottom end of the
hydraulic jacks.
5.17.2 Fully automatic central greasing system (optional extra)

The machine may be fitted with a fully automatic central greasing system on request.
The upper carriage and equipment do not require manual greasing. The bearing
points connected to the greasing system are greased at regular intervals during
operation.
The undercarriage is not connected to the automatic greasing system and must be
manually greased.
Fig. 5-68 Central greasing pump, fully automatic
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
1 Grease container 4 Lubricating nipple for manual

intermediate greasing
2 Adapter (refilling the grease 5 Safety valve
container using filler pump 6)
3 Lubricating nipple – refilling of 6 Filler pump
grease container
The indicator light in button S84 illuminates when the machine is switched on.
The greasing process begins automatically after a pause and stops when all bearing
points h;ave been greased without the operator having to become involved.
Button S84 remains permanently lit during the greasing process.
Button S84 will flash if a fault occurs In addition, symbol E514 is displayed on-screen
(error in central greasing system). The following defects may be responsible for the
fault:
– Blockage or pinching of a supply line (grease flows out of safety valve 5).
– Defective proximity switch or defect in its supply lead.
– The use of a grease which is too viscous at low outdoor temperatures.
– Lack of lubricant in the grease container.
– Failure of drive motor supply circuit.
X Find and rectify the cause of the problem immediately.
The screen symbol E514 will disappear after the next successful greasing process.
If the greasing system is functioning correctly, it is possible to initiate an additional
greasing pump cycle by pressing button S84 on the right control panel.
If the greasing pump is defective, the attached lubrication points can be greased
centrally using a greasing pump via lubricating nipple 4.
To refill the grease container:

The grease container must be checked once a week and refilled if necessary.
Note!
In order to avoid contamination and damage, the grease container should remain
closed.
X Do not remove the cover of the grease container when refilling.
The grease container is normally refilled via adapter 2.

X Insert a grease cartridge in the supplied filler pump 6, connect the pump to
adapter 2 and squeeze in the contents of the grease cartridge.
If the filler pump 6 or grease cartridge are not available, the grease container can be
refilled using a greasing pump or a grease gun via lubricating nipple 3.
An intermediate greasing must be carried out after the grease container has been
refilled.
Intermediate greasing:
X Automatic: Press button S84.
or
X Manually: Lubricate the lubricating points via lubricating nipple 4.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Manual lubrication of the machine
X Continue intermediate greasing until grease emerges from the bottom end of the
hydraulic jacks.
Adjusting grease quantity:

Depending on the actual use of the machine, the lubricant quantities that are applied
by the automatic lubrication system can be adjusted on the screen:
see operator's menu option "Automatic central lubrication system".
5.18 Manual lubrication of the machine
Certain parts of the working tools, attachments and the undercarriage are lubricated
manually. The affected lubricating points are equipped with lubricating nipples.
Note!
We recommend using a grease gun, as it reduces the force required and ensures
that the grease is squeezed in slowly.
5.18.1 Lubricating the axles and drive shaft
Fig. 5-69 Grease nipples on axle
The bearing points on steering knuckle bearing 1 (both axles), steering linkage, tie
rod and oscillating axle (steering axle) are equipped with greasing nipples.
Caution!
Steering knuckle bearings 1should not be over-greased.
X Only grease each bearing position with two grease strokes.
X Use a hand grease gun to grease the bearing positions via the lubrication nipples.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Fig. 5-70 Grease nipples on drive shaft
X Use a hand grease gun to grease the bearing positions on the drive shaft via the
lubrication nipples.
5.18.2 Attachments (optional equipment)
Fig. 5-71 Lubricating attachment (example of grapple)
The attachments (e.g. grapple, quick-change adapter systems) must be lubricated

manually. In grapples, the respective lubricating points are labelled.
For normal operation, the grapple must be lubricated daily or once per shift. Other
working tools must be lubricated at weekly intervals.
Machines operated under adverse conditions (e.g. in contact with water or corrosive
substances) should be lubricated more frequently.
X Examine the attachment to detect all lubricating nipples.
X Lubricate the attachment, using a grease gun. Press in grease until clean grease
escapes at the respective bearing point (unless instructed otherwise).
If the attachment is equipped with a rotator, the moving parts must also be lubricated.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
X Lubricate the rotator (bearing, crown gear, pinion) using a grease gun, until clean
grease escapes at the respective bearing point (approx. 2 lubricating strokes).
X If the rotator is not equipped with a separate lubricating nipple, apply grease to
the crown gear and the pinion.
5.18.3 Industrial stick with mechanical quick-change adapter
Fig. 5-72 Lubricating the mechanical quick-change adapter
X Lubricate the quick-change adapter through the lubrication nipples with a grease
gun (approx. 2 lubricating strokes).
Note!
If the mechanical quick-change adapter is lubricated while the bolts are extended,
the cavity between the locking bolts is filled with grease, so that they cannot be
retracted.
X Therefore lubricate the system only, if the locking bolts are retracted.
5.18.4 Industrial stick with hydraulic quick-change adapter
Fig. 5-73 Lubricating the hydraulic quick-change adapter
X Lubricate the quick-change adapter through the lubrication nipples with a grease
gun (approx. 2 lubricating strokes).
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Note!
If the quick-change adapter is lubricated while the bolts are extended, the cavity
between the locking bolts is filled with grease, so that they cannot be retracted.
5.18.5 LIKUFIX MH 40 quick-coupling system
Fig. 5-74 Lubricating MH 40 (with removable protective cover)
Fig. 5-75 Lubricating MH 40 (with housing)
The lubrication nipple of the locking bolts are accessible through the recesses in the
housing, (see Fig. 5-75), or when the protective cover is removed, (see Fig. 5-74).
X If necessary, remove the protective cover 2.
X Lubricate the locking bolts 1 through the lubricating nipple, using a grease gun
(approx. 2 lubricating strokes).
Note!
If the quick-change adapter is lubricated while released, the cavity between the
locking bolts is filled with grease, so that they cannot be extended.
X Therefore do not lubricate the quick-change adapter when it is released.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
5.18.6 Hydraulic quick change adapter

The hydraulic quick change adapter is not greased via the central lubrication system.
The bearing points must be greased using the grease gun.
Fig. 5-76 Lubricating the quick change adapter
X Grease the locking pins via the grease fitting with a grease gun.
Note!
The hydraulic quick change adapter cannot be sufficiently greased if the locking
pins are extended.
X Make sure that the locking pins are retracted during the lubrication procedure.
5.18.7 Mechanical quick-change adapter

The mechanical quick-change adapter is not lubricated by the central lubrication
system. The respective bearing points must therefore be manually lubricated with a
grease gun.
Fig. 5-77 Lubricating quick-change adapter
X Lubricate the lube points through the lubrication nipple, using a grease gun.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Couplings of the quick-change adapter systems (optional equipment)
Note!
If the mechanical quick-change adapter is lubricated while the bolt is extended, the
cavity between the locking bolts is filled with grease, so that they cannot be
retracted.
5.19 Couplings of the quick-change adapter

systems (optional equipment)
5.19.1 Hydraulic coupling
Fig. 5-78 Hydraulic coupling plug
The LIKUFIX hydraulic coupling system and the multi-coupling system are equipped
with hydraulic coupling plugs (see arrows).
The coupling plugs are maintenance-free. We recommend cleaning the system
regularly. This prevents caking of dirt and icing up in winter. With regular cleaning,
the seals of the system have a long service life.
Cleaning:
X Remove dirt and clean all coupling parts and sealing surfaces with a clean cloth
and oil.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Couplings of the quick-change adapter systems (optional equipment)
Changing seal ring:
Fig. 5-79 Changing seal ring
Caution!
X Before changing the seal ring, depressurise the system using the joystick
joystick).
In the event of leakage at the coupling plugs (A), change the seal rings.
X Hold down the seal washer of the coupling plug with a screwdriver and lever out
the defective seal ring using a pointed tool (B).
X Squeeze the new seal ring and place it with its open side facing downwards onto
the seal washer (C).
X Push the washer into the groove, place the screwdriver onto the centre of the seal
ring and remove your hand (D).
X Let the seal ring expand into the groove (E).
X Remove the screwdriver (F).
ª The seal washer must move upwards.
X If this is not the case, push the seal ring into the groove until the seal washer can
move.
5.19.2 LIKUFIX electric coupling

The LIKUFIX hydraulic coupling system is equipped with an additional electric
coupling (e.g. for the operation of a magnet system). This coupling must be regularly
inspected and cleaned.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Parking and swing gear brake
Fig. 5-80 Electric couplings
1 Electric coupling top section 2 Electric coupling bottom section
X Switch off the magnet system (if installed).

X Remove the working tool, if required.
X Check the contacts for corrosion and wear (e.g. burn marks).
X Clean the contacts of the electric couplings 1 and 2 with a dry cloth and apply
contact spray (Cramolin), if necessary.
X Check the electric couplings and the screwed connections for proper fixture.
X Check the contacts of the top section 1 for play: it must be possible to push in the
contacts against the spring force.
X Check whether the seals at the contacts of the electric couplings (see arrows) are
properly installed and undamaged.
X Repair any damage and replace defective parts.
5.20 Parking and swing gear brake
Both the parking brake on the transmission and the swing gear brake are negative
acting, wet multi-disk brakes.
They are vented hydraulically and are fully sealed and integrated in the transmission
or swing gear.
Their usage purely as parking brakes makes them wear-free and therefore
maintenance free.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
General maintenance tasks
5.21 General maintenance tasks
5.21.1 Replacing wear parts

Apart from maintenance and care tasks that must be carried out at prescribed
intervals, the following minor repairs can be made by the machine operator or a
maintenance technician:
– Replacement of worn teeth on digging tool.
– Replacement of defective seals on pipe and hose lines and at connections of the
hydraulic units (with the exception of the pressure-relief valves, which are factory-
sealed).
– Replacement of high-pressure hoses, hydraulic lines and screw connections of
the hydraulic unit.
Only use original LIEBHERR spare parts. This applies in particular to hoses and
hydraulic lines that must be factory-mounted.
All other repairs, and in particular the removal of the counter weight, must be carried
out by authorised specialist technicians.
5.21.2 Replacing teeth on digging tool

If the teeth are heavily worn, excess force is required to move the digging tool into
the material to be excavated. This can lead to damage to the tooth adapters.
Therefore replace worn teeth in due course.
Do not work with the machine, if there are teeth missing on the digging tool or if they
are heavily worn.
U system:
Fig. 5-81 U system – replacing teeth on digging tool
X Drive out the roll pin 2 using a hammer and mandrel 1 (A).
X Remove the old tooth.

X Place the new tooth on the adapter (B).
X Drive in the roll pin 2 using a hammer (C).
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
General maintenance tasks
Z system:
Fig. 5-82 Removing teeth from digging tool - Z system
1 Plug 2 Locking bolt

3 Square spanner 4 Tooth
5 Tooth adapter 6 Locking piece
X Remove the plug 1 from the square recess of the locking bolt 2 (A).
X Turn the locking bolt with the square spanner 3 counter-clockwise (a - turn by
approx. 30°).
X Drive out the locking bolt from the opposite side (B).
X Take off the tooth 4 from the tooth adapter 5 and remove the locking piece 6 (C).
Note!
Before mounting a new tooth, check the state of the locking bolt and locking piece.
Replace any deformed or corroded parts.
Fig. 5-83 Mounting teeth on digging tool - Z system
X Insert the locking piece 6 into the recess of the tooth adapter 5 so that the flat
locking piece side touches the tooth adapter (D).

X Insert the new tooth into the tooth adapter.
X Insert the locking bolt to the stop (E).
X Turn the locking bolt with the square spanner -clockwise (b - turn by approx. 30°)
(F).
ª The nose 2a of the locking bolt slides across the protruding part 6a of the
locking piece and engages.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Maintenance and inspection schedule
X Insert the plug into the square recess of the locking bolt.
5.21.3 Welded parts on the machine

All welding work on all main power-transmitting components (e.g. undercarriage
frame, revolving deck, attachment parts, etc.) must be executed by the manufacturer
or an authorised specialist workshop.
X Before carrying out any arc welding work, disconnect the machine from the
battery.
X The negative pole (-) must be disconnected first and reconnected last.
X Also switch off the battery main switch!
Caution!
Bearings or sealing elements might be damaged (scorched) by high electric
currents!
X When carrying out welding work, connect the earth cable as close as possible
to the welding point so that the welding current does not travel through machine
parts such as the slewing ring, joints, bearings, bushes, rubber elements or
seals.
5.22 Maintenance and inspection schedule
Note!
Careful maintenance is only possible, if the machine is clean. Especially visual
inspections, e.g. for cracks can only be carried out properly on a clean machine.
X Before carrying out any maintenance work, clean the machine (see also chapter
"Cleaning").
Note!
The daily maintenance tasks of the machine operator include a functional test of the
brakes (slewing gear brake, working brake, parking brake), steering, electrical and
hydraulic systems.
Also to be carried out is a daily visual inspection of the motor, hydraulic system,
gearbox and axles for leakage.
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Maintenance/inspection at
WORK TO BE CARRIED OUT
operating hours
by maintenance personnel together with authorised specialist

upon acceptance
(machine operator) technicians
(every ...) / notes

Special interval
Initial and single interval
every 8 - 10
every 1000
every 2000
z Repeat interval Initial and single interval

every 500
every 50
7 Annually, at the start of the cold season Repeat interval

When required
DIESEL ENGINE
z z Check the oil level

z z Visual inspection (leakage, dirt, damage)
z Check oil level in pump distributor gear
Replace gear oil in pump distribution gear
Check flap of diesel engine brake
1) Change diesel engine oil (at least once a year)
Change oil filter insert (at least once a year)
Check batteries and cable connections
Belt drive: check belt; replace, if necessary / V-ribbed belt: check tension; adjust,
if necessary
Check intake and exhaust systems for general condition, fixture and leakage
Grease the flywheel ring gear
Replace filter insert at the crankcase ventilation
Check oil pan, engine bearings and diesel engine support for proper fixture
Check / readjust valve play
7 Check heating flange

3000 Check vibration dampers for deformation
RADIATOR
z z Check coolant level

Check cooling and heating systems for general condition and leakage
7 Check corrosion inhibitor and antifreeze agent concentration in coolant

3000 Change coolant (at least every 2 years)
FUEL SYSTEM
z z Check water separator at the fuel pre-filter and drain off water, if necessary
z Drain water and deposit from fuel tank
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
operating hours

upon acceptance
(every ...) / notes

Special interval Initial and single interval
every 8 - 10
every 1000
every 2000

every 500
every 50

When required
4) Check fuel system for leakage and general state

4) Change fuel pre-filter
4) Change fuel fine filter
Bleed fuel system
AIR FILTER
z z Check underpressure indicator of the air filter

z Clean dust removal valve of the air filter
Change main element of the dry air filter (according to maintenance indication /
annually)
Change safety element of the dry air filter (at every third main element change /
annually) - do not clean or reuse!
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM OF THE DIESEL ENGINE
Check control device bearing for general condition

Check sensor devices and cable connections
DIESEL ENGINE - EXHAUST GAS SYSTEM WITH PARTICLE FILTER (optional equipment)
z Drain off condensate at the condensate trap

Condensate trap: check and clean sintered metal filter, check connecting clamps
for proper seat
Condensate trap: replace sintered metal filter
Clean particle filter and pre-filter; if required, clean before prescribed interval has
lapsed
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
z z Check oil level in hydraulic tank

z Clean magnetic rod in return filter (daily during first 300 operating hours)
2) Replace filter element in bypass filter (optional equipment)
(in machines used in dusty environments: every 250 operating hours)
2) Replace filter insert in return filter
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
operating hours

upon acceptance
(every ...) / notes

Special interval
every 8 - 10
every 1000
every 2000
every 500
every 50

When required
Replace filter cartridge in control oil unit

Replace feed oil filter on slewing gear pump
Check components for proper mounting
Check the hydraulic oil cooler for dirt; clean it, if necessary
Drain water from hydraulic tank
(max. permissible water content for environmentally friendly fluids: 0.1 %; insert
bypass filter, take oil sample)
Check hydraulic system for leakage; complete functional test
Check / readjust servo, primary and secondary pressures
2), 3) Change hydraulic oil in tank (optimise interval by carrying out oil analyses)
2) Change breather filter on hydraulic tank
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
z z Check indicator lights and indicating devices upon start-up

Check lighting
Check acid density and level, wire terminals and terminal ports of the batteries
Spray slip rings of the slewing gear connection with Cramolin contact spray
Carry out functional tests of entire unit and all components
SLEWING GEAR MECHANISM
Check oil level; check system for leakage

Carry out functional test of slewing gear brake
Check gearbox and oil motor for proper mounting
Change gear oil
SLEWING RING
Check mounting bolts for press fit; slewing gear pining meshing
AXLES
z Lubricate steering knuckle bearing and oscillating bolts (weekly or monthly,

depending on use)
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
operating hours

upon acceptance
(every ...) / notes

every 8 - 10
every 1000
every 2000

every 500
every 50

When required
Checking wheel nuts for proper fit

(In new machines: first time after 50, 100 and then 250 operating hours, and after
each wheel change or loosening of the wheel lugs)
Check fixture of the axles and oscillating axle bearing

Change oil in axle housing (front and rear)
Change oil in planetary drive (front and rear)
Check multi-disc brake for wear (once a year; shorten interval, if necessary)
TRANSMISSION

Carry out functional test of power shift mechanism and parking brake
Check gearbox, oil motor and joint shafts for proper mounting
Change gear oil
STEERING
Check system for leakage; complete functional test

Check components and steering system parts for proper mounting
OSCILLATING AXLE SUPPORT
Check system for leakage; complete functional test

Check cylinders for proper mounting
BRAKE SYSTEM
Check system for leakage; check accumulator and brake pressure as well as
check switch
Carry out functional test
OPERATOR'S CAB + HEATING
z Check / add detergent solution in windscreen washer tank

7 Check function of heating
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
operating hours

upon acceptance
(every ...) / notes

Special interval
every 8 - 10
every 1000
every 2000
every 500
every 50

When required
Check heating system for leakage

Check door and window hinges as well as locks
z 7 Treat rubber seals of the operator's cab with silicone or talcum powder
7 Treat rubber seals of the access doors in the uppercarriage with silicone or talcum
powder
Check water inlet valve for contamination, and clean, if necessary; carry out
functional test of valve
AIR-CONDITIONING SYSTEM
z Regularly switch on air-conditioning system (at least 1x every 14 days)

Check condenser for contamination; blow clean, if necessary
Clean re-circulated air / fresh air filter; replace, if necessary; shorten interval if
there is excessive generation of dust
Check compressor mounting bolts and drive belts
Check dryer-collector unit (humidity, fill level); replace, if necessary
Check evaporator unit; clean, if necessary
Check electrical lines for chafe marks; check plug connections
Complete functional test of excess pressure switch
Check cooling performance
Replace dryer-collector unit every 12 months; also check cooling circuit for
leakage and change coolant and refrigeration oil
Every 12 months, employ a refrigeration technician to carry out a functional test of

the air flaps and the defrost thermostat
UNDERCARRIAGE + UPPERCARRIAGE + WORKING ATTACHMENTS

z z Lubricate bearing points, using the semi-automatic central lubrication system;

exception: not required in units with fully automatic central lubrication system
z Check grease level in the central lubrication system tank; add grease, if required
z Lubricate bearing positions (undercarriage and working attachments)
Lubricate daily when required due to type of use and/or shift operation
z Inspect teeth for wear
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
operating hours

upon acceptance
(every ...) / notes

every 8 - 10
every 1000
every 2000

every 500
every 50

When required
250 Check parts for cracks

250 Check counter weight and tank for proper mounting
Check lines and screwed connections for proper fit
Check panelling hinges, quick fasteners and gas pressure springs of the caps
Instruct operators in the proper use of the equipment
Instruct the operator on how the machine must be lubricated according to the
lubricating chart and make him aware of potential operator errors
HYDRAULIC QUICK CHANGE ADAPTER
z z Carry out a functional test of the visual and acoustic warning systems
z z Carry out a visual inspection of the extended locking bolts
z z Check hydraulic hoses and wire harness
z Lubricate locking bolts
Clean mesh filter
MECHANICAL QUICK CHANGE ADAPTER
z z Carry out a visual inspection of the extended locking bolts

z Lubricate locking bolts
GENERAL
Check the entire machine to ensure that it is properly maintained and in safe
working order
Explain the machine documentation (in particular the operating manual and safety
instructions) to the operating personnel
1 Replace motor oil more often, if temperatures and the quality of fuels and oils make this seem
advisable.
2 In the case of applications with excessive dust generation, observe shortened maintenance
intervals.
3 For environmentally friendly hydraulic fluids, adjust the maintenance interval on the basis of
regular analyses.
4 The maintenance intervals might have to be shortened, depending on the operating conditions
(e.g. generation of dust, barrel fuelling).
copyright by
MJFCIFSS

A934C-LI 1006-1007 57105 07-2011 en PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

A934C-LI 1006-1007 57105 07-2011 en PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

en

Machine for Industrial Applications

from serial number 57105

Vehicle Id. No.:

A 934 C Litronic / A 934 C HD Litronic / 11140237

Warranty and liability

It is therefore the responsibility of the machine owner to assess whether third-party

Amendments, general terms and conditions, copyright

2 Safety notes, signs ........................................................................................................................................ 2-1

3 Control, operation.......................................................................................................................................... 3-1

3.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................. 3-50

3.3.9 Oscillating axle locking device ................................................................................................ 3-64

4 Malfunctions ................................................................................................................................................... 4-1

4.2.1 Diesel engine and fuel system.................................................................................................. 4-8

4.4 Emergency operation........................................................................................................................... 4-16

5 Maintenance ................................................................................................................................................... 5-1

5.8.5 Grease the starter tooth ring .................................................................................................. 5-33

5.10.4 Maintenance of fuel filter ........................................................................................................ 5-44

5.18.7 Mechanical quick-change adapter .......................................................................................... 5-80

5.22 Maintenance and inspection schedule................................................................................................. 5-86

1.1 Design and overview

1.1.1 General overview

Fig. 1-1 General overview

3 Industrial boom 4 Stick cylinder

Fig. 1-2 Uppercarriage

1 Slewing gear mechanism 2 Control block

Fig. 1-3 Undercarriage

1 Outrigger support 2 Rigid axle

1.2 Vibration emissions

Weighted effective vibration in m/s²

Machine type Typical working cycles

The measurement uncertainty is defined in standard EN 12096:1997.

1.3 Sound emission

1.4 EC Declaration of Conformity

Designation/function: Hydraulic excavator

1. Relevant regulations (last valid version):

2. Applied harmonised standards, in particular:

Kirchdorf, tt.mm.yyyy (Head of Quality Management Dept.)

Ein Unternehmen der Liebherr-EMtec GmbH

Fig. 1-4 Sample EC Declaration of Conformity (from year of manufacture 2010)

Only for customers in member states of the European Union: a EC Declaration of

1.5 Technical data

See technical description on the following pages.

A 934 C Umschlag.indd 1 06.04.2009 13:21:37

2 A 934 C Litronic Machine for Industrial Applications

A 934 C Umschlag.indd 2 06.04.2009 13:21:37

A 934 C Litronic Machine for Industrial Applications 3

A 934 C Umschlag.indd 3 06.04.2009 13:21:37

4 A 934 C Litronic Machine for Industrial Applications

A 934 C Umschlag.indd 4 06.04.2009 13:21:38

Robust undercarriage Litronic-System

A 934 C Litronic Machine for Industrial Applications 5

A 934 C Umschlag.indd 5 06.04.2009 13:21:38

6 A 934 C Litronic Machine for Industrial Applications

A 934 C Umschlag.indd 6 06.04.2009 13:21:38

Liebherr hydraulic cylinders Functional safety

A 934 C Litronic Machine for Industrial Applications 7

A 934 C Umschlag.indd 7 06.04.2009 13:21:38

8 A 934 C Litronic Machine for Industrial Applications

A 934 C Umschlag.indd 8 06.04.2009 13:21:38

Storage compartment – Fully-automatic air-conditioning system

A 934 C Litronic Machine for Industrial Applications 9

A 934 C Umschlag.indd 9 06.04.2009 11:35:43

Hydraulic Cab Elevation mm Industrial-Type Straight Boom 7,60 m

A 934 C Litronic Machine for Industrial Applications 13

A 934 C Litronic Machine for Industrial Applications 15

A 934 C Litronic Machine for Industrial Applications 17

A 934 C Litronic Machine for Industrial Applications 19

A 934 C Litronic Machine for Industrial Applications 21

A 934 C Litronic Machine for Industrial Applications 23

Operating Weight:41,150 – 42,400 kg

Hydraulic Cab Elevation mm Industrial-Type Straight Boom 7,60 m

A 934 C HD Litronic Machine for Industrial Applications 3

A 934 C HD Litronic Machine for Industrial Applications 5

A 934 C HD Litronic Machine for Industrial Applications 7

A 934 C HD Litronic Machine for Industrial Applications 9

A 934 C HD Litronic Machine for Industrial Applications 11

A 934 C HD Litronic Machine for Industrial Applications 13

A 934 C HD Litronic Machine for Industrial Applications 15